First United Methodist Church of Palmdale

Transcription

Project# 06001
Specifications
First United Methodist Church
of Palmdale
25th Street West and Rancho Vista Blvd
Palmdale, CA 93551
10/18/11
00005-1
00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY PAGES:
00700
Conditions of the Contract
SPECIFICATIONS:
Division 1 - General requirements:
01000
01010
01341
01421
01500
01620
01630
01710
01720
01740
General Requirements
Summary of the Work
Shop Drawings
Roofing Inspection Services
Temporary Facilities
Storage and Protection
Product Options and Substitutions
Cleaning
Project Record Documents
Warranty
Division 2 - Site work:
02010
02070
02100
02110
02220
02221
02510
02513
02660
02730
02830
02841
Subsurface Investigation
Selective Demolition
Site Preparation
Clearing
Earthwork
Excavation and Backfill
Site Concrete
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Water Distribution
Sanitary Sewerage
Chain Link Fences
Bicycle Racks
Division 3 - Concrete:
03100
03200
03300
03375
03400
Concrete Formwork
Concrete Reinforcement
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Concrete Sealing
Precast Concrete
Division 6 - Wood and plastics:
06010
06100
06180
06195
06200
06400
Lumber
Rough Carpentry
Glued-Laminated Beams
Prefab. Wood Beams and Joists
Finish Carpentry
Architectural WoodworkLaminated Plastic Cabinets
Division 7 - Thermal and moisture protection:
07150
07175
07210
07241
07322
07521
07600
07620
07920
Deck Surfacing
Water Repellent Coating
Building Insulation
Architectural Foam Shapes
Concrete Roofing Tiles
Cap Sheet Roofing
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Gutters and Downspouts
Sealants and Calking
Division 8 - Doors and windows:
08100
08110
08200
08410
08520
08710
08800
Metal Doors and Frames
Metal Door Frames
Wood Doors
Alum. Entrances and Storefronts
Aluminum Windows
Finish Hardware
Glass & Glazing
Division 9 - Finishes:
09200
09260
09510
09650
09680
09900
09972
Lath and Plaster
Gypsum Wallboard System
Acoustical Ceilings
Sheet Vinyl Flooring
Carpeting
Painting
Plastic Coated Wall Panels
Division 4 - Masonry:
Division 10 - Specialties:
04220
04430
10165
10400
10520
10650
10800
Concrete Unit Masonry
Simulated Stone Veneer
Division 5 - Metals:
05120
05121
05500
Structural Steel
Welding Requirements
Metal Fabrications
Metal Toilet Partitions
Identifying Devices
Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
Operable Partitions
Toilet Room Accessories
10/18/11
00005-2
Division 11 - Equipment:
Division 12 - Furnishings:
Division 13 - Special construction:
Division 14 - Conveying systems:
14420
Wheelchair Lift
Division 15 - Mechanical:
15000
15010
15050
15330
15400
General Mechanical Provisions
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Basic Mechanical Materials
Fire Protection Sprinkler System
Plumbing
15440
15500
15880
15950
Fixtures and Trim
HVAC
Air Distribution
Temperature Controls
Division 16 - Electrical:
16010
16111
16400
16425
16500
16700
16720
16931
Electrical
Conduit and Wire
Service and Distribution
Switchboards
Light Fixtures
Sound Reinforcement System
Alarm and Detection Systems
Occupancy Motion Sensors
10/18/11
00700-1
00700 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
A. General:
1. Owner has indicated an intention to
Document A201, 1997 edition, as
Conditions of the Contract.
2. Supplementary Conditions will be as
upon by and between Owner and
Contractor.
use AIA
General
agreed
General
3. General and Supplementary Conditions may
affect required performance of subcontracts
and sub-subcontracts. Those who contemplate
furnishing labor and/or materials to the Work
are advised to read and become familiar with
contents of General and Supplementary
Conditions.
4. In addition to a job-site telephone, the General
Contractor will be required to maintain a
personal, portable extension which will be in his
possession on the job site at all times.
10/18/11
01000-1
01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Submittals:
a. Where submittals are called for in these
Specifications, submit directly to Architect.
(1) One copy of shop drawings or
catalogue sheets to the architect.
Architect's comments will appear on a
copy returned to Contractor.
(2) Unrequired submittals will not be
reviewed by Architect.
2. Substitutions:
a. Contract is based on methods and materials described in Contract Documents.
b. Do not substitute methods or materials
unless such substitution has been approved in writing for this Work by Architect.
c. Decision of Architect is final.
3. Storage and protection:
a. Deliver products to job site in their manufacturers' original containers with labels
intact and legible.
b. Maintain packaged materials with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of
use.
c. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs
and soffits of openings used as
passageways, through which equipment
and materials are handled.
d. Maintain finished surfaces clean, unmarred, and suitably protected until
accepted by Owner.
e. In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to approval of
Architect and at no additional cost to
Owner.
4. Quality control:
a. Examine areas and conditions under
which work will be performed.
b. Correct conditions which may be detrimental to timely and proper completion of
Work.
c. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
d. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
thoroughly trained and experienced in
necessary crafts and completely familiar
with specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of Work.
e. Coordinate as necessary with other trades
to assure proper and adequate provisions
for interface of all parts of Work.
10/18/11
01010-1
01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
A. General:
1. Owner retained Architect to prepare portions,
but not all, required construction contract documents.
a. Portions of Project for which Architect is
responsible are described on Drawings
which bear Architect's name, and in these
Specifications.
b. It is assumed that drawings and specifications for which Architect is not responsible will
be prepared by others, at Owner's direction,
to cover those portions of Project for which
Architect was not retained.
2. Architect was retained by Owner:
a. To
prepare
sufficient
Drawings
and
Specifications for review by governmental
agencies having jurisdiction, and to secure
approvals for issuing required general
building permit;
b. To provide additional consulting services
when and if so requested by Owner during
construction phase of Work.
3. Architect
will
not
participate
in
other
construction phase activities except as called
for in these Specifications and as may be
required by governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
10/18/11
01341-1
01341 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
A – General:
1
.1 SUMMARY
A. Make submittals required by the Contract
Documents, and revise and resubmit as
necessary to establish compliance with the
specified requirements, all as described in this
Section.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section
include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General
Conditions,
Supplementary
Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2. Individual requirements for submittals also
may be described in pertinent Sections of
these Specifications.
The process for securing approval of
proposed substitutions is described in Section
01630, "Product Options and Substitutions."
C. Work not included:
1. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed
by the Architect.
2. The
Contractor
may
require
his
subcontractors to provide drawings, setting
diagrams, and similar information to help
coordinate the Work, but such data shall
remain between the Contractor and his
subcontractors and will not be reviewed by
the Architect unless specifically called for within
the Contract Documents.
B – Products:
2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Scale and measurements:
Make Shop
Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently
large to show all pertinent aspects of the item
and its method of connection to the Work.
B. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of three
blueline or blackline prints of each sheet.
C. Review comments of the Architect will be
returned to the Contractor. The Contractor
may make and distribute such copies as are
required for his purposes.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
A. Where contents of submitted literature from
manufacturers includes data not pertinent to
the submittal, clearly show which portion of
the contents is being submitted for review.
B. Submit the number of copies which are
required to be returned, plus one copy which
will be retained by the Architect.
C – Execution:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals of Shop Drawings, Samples,
substitution requests, and other items in
accordance with the provisions of this Section.
A. Consecutively number all submittals.
1. When material is submitted for any reason,
transmit under a new letter of transmittal and
with a new transmittal number.
2. On resubmittals, cite the original submittal
number for reference.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination of submittals:
1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review
and coordinate all aspects of each item
being submitted.
2. Verify that each item and the submittal for
it conform in all respects with the specified requirements.
3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to
each submittal, certify that this coordination
has been performed.
B. Accompany each submittal with a letter of
transmittal showing all information required for
identification and checking.
C. On at least the first page of each submittal,
and elsewhere as required for positive
identification, show the submittal number in
which the item was included.
10/18/11
3.2 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals far enough in advance of
scheduled dates for installation to provide
time required for reviews, for securing
necessary approvals, for possible revisions
and resubmittals, and for placing orders and
securing delivery.
01421-1
01421 ROOFING INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Products:
1. For work of this Section, retain roofing inspection
services of the following, or an equal approved
in advance by Architect.
a. National Roofing Consultants, Inc., Pomona,
California (909) 620-0177;
5.
B. Execution:
1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to
assure proper and adequate provision in work
of those trades for interface with work of this
Section.
2. Neither less than three nor more than ten calendar days prior to scheduled start of roofing
installation, conduct a roofing substrata
inspection and pre-roofing meeting at job site.
a. Except as otherwise directed by Architect,
Architect will be chairperson of meeting, will
take minutes of meeting, and will record all
agreements reached as a result of inspection and meeting.
b. Visually inspect all substrata upon which
roofing is scheduled to be applied.
(1) Determine general acceptability, and
determine areas requiring further preparation.
(2) Determine acceptable remedies for
unacceptable areas.
c. Discuss proposed schedule for installation of
roofing, and reach agreement as to dates
of start and finish of installation of roofing.
d. Discuss proposed methods for installation of
roofing, and equipment and personnel to
be used.
e. Discuss inspection methods to be used,
reports to be issued by roofing inspector,
responsibilities and limits of responsibilities of
roofing inspector, and potential problems
arising from use of methods not agreed to in
preroofing meeting.
3. Verify that materials delivered to job site are
those approved by Architect for use on this
Work.
4. Visually observe installation of roofing including,
but not necessarily limited to:
a. Check kettle temperatures, and verify that
bitumens
are
not
heated
beyond
temperatures recommended by manufacturer of approved roofing system materials.
b. At least three times daily, check temperatures
of bitumens as delivered to roof deck and
verify that temperatures of bitumens are
within range recommended by manufacturer of approved roofing system materials.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
c. Verify use of installation procedures agreed
upon in preroofing meeting.
d. Call
attention
of
subcontractor's
representative on job to unacceptable
methods and unacceptable results.
Make final visual inspection of entire roofing
installation.
a. Compile a list of items required to be revised
or replaced.
b. Deliver a copy of list to subcontractor's
representative on job, and to others as
appropriate.
c. Verify proper revision or replacement of all
items on list.
Make daily written reports of roofing inspection
activities, delivering copies to roofing subcontractor and others as agreed in preroofing
meeting.
Upon completion of roofing installation,
compile a comprehensive report covering
activities performed under this Section, and
deliver a copy of report to:
a. Architect;
b. Owner;
c. Roofing subcontractor; and
d. Others as agreed in preroofing meeting.
During progress of roofing installation, roofing
inspector is required to:
a. Make visual observations and compile
reports described in this Section;
b. Advise roofing subcontractor's representative on job as to unacceptable methods
and unacceptable results when so observed
by roofing inspector.
In connection with roofing installation, "unacceptable methods and unacceptable results"
mean methods and results other than:
a. Those recommended by manufacturer of
approved roofing system materials.
b. Those required by pertinent regulations of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
c. Those required by these Specifications; and
d. Those agreed to in preroofing meeting.
Roofing inspector is not empowered to:
a. Act for, or in lieu of, representatives of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction;
b. Give directions to Contractor, subcontractor, or workmen on job;
c. Revise any part of Contract Documents; or
d. Approve any change in methods agreed
upon in preroofing meeting.
Failure of roofing inspector to observe
unacceptable methods or unacceptable results
during progress of Work will not absolve
Contractor from his responsibility to complete
10/18/11
01421-2
Work in accordance with specified requirements
and agreed methods.
10/18/11
01500-1
01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A – General:
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Make submittals required by the Contract
Documents, and revise and resubmit as
necessary to establish compliance with the
specified requirements, all as described in this
Section.
A.
This Section describes construction facilities
and temporary controls required for the
Work.
B. Related work:
General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of
2. Except that equipment furnished by
subcontractors shall comply with requirements of pertinent safety regulations, such
equipment normally furnished by the individual trades in execution of their own
portions of the Work are not part of this
Section.
3. Permanent installation and hookup of the
various utility lines are described in other
Sections.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide construction facilities and
temporary controls needed for the Work
including, but not necessarily limited to:
Temporary utilities such as heat, water,
electricity, and telephone;
Field office for the Contractor's personnel;
Sanitary facilities;
Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades,
and canopies;
Temporary fencing of the construction site;
Project sign.
2.
upon completion of the Work,
remove such temporary facilities.
Provide and pay for water used in
construction.
B. Electricity:
1.
Provide necessary temporary wiring
and, upon completion of the
Work, remove such temporary
facility.
2.
Provide area distribution boxes so
located that the individual trades
may furnish and use 30 m (100 ft)
maximum length extension cords to
obtain power and lighting at
points where needed for work,
inspection, and safety.
C.
Heating: Provide and maintain heat
necessary for proper conduct of
operations needed in the Work.
D. Telephone:
1.
Make necessary arrangements and
pay costs for installation and
operation of telephone service to
the Contractor's office at the site.
2.
Make the telephone available to
the Architect for use in connection
with the Work.
2.2 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Contractor's facilities:
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Maintain temporary facilities and controls
in proper and safe condition throughout
progress of the Work.
B- Products:
2.1 UTILITIES
A. Water:
1.
Provide necessary temporary
piping and water supply and,
10/18/11
01620-1
01620 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Protect products scheduled for use in Work by
means including, but not necessarily limited to,
those described in this Section.
2. Except as otherwise approved by Architect,
determine and comply with manufacturers'
recommendations
on
product
handling,
storage, and protection.
3. Deliver
products
to
job
site in
their
manufacturer's original container, with labels
intact and legible.
a. Maintain packaged materials with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use.
b. Promptly remove damaged material and
unsuitable items from job site, and promptly
replace with material meeting specified
requirements, all at no additional cost to
Owner.
4. Architect may reject as non-complying all
material and products that do not bear
identification satisfactory to Architect as to
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
manufacturer, grade, quality, and other
pertinent information.
Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and
soffits of openings used as passageways,
through which equipment and materials are
handled.
Provide protection for finished floor surfaces in
traffic areas prior to allowing equipment or
materials to be moved over such surfaces.
Maintain finished surfaces clean, unmarred, and
suitably protected until accepted by Owner.
In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to approval of Architect and
at no additional cost to Owner.
When material is stored at job site, position to
permit easy access for proper inspection and
identification of each shipment.
a. Storage shall not interfere with ongoing
deliveries necessary to maintain functioning
of existing facility.
b. If necessary to reposition, do so without
additional expense to Owner.
10/18/11
01630-1
01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General:
1. Contract is based on standards of quality
established in Contract Documents.
2. In agreeing to terms and conditions of Contract,
Contractor has accepted a responsibility to
verify that specified products will be available
and to place orders for all required materials in
such a timely manner as is needed to meet
agreed construction schedule.
3. Neither Owner nor Architect has agreed to
substitution of materials or methods called for in
Contract Documents, except as may be
specifically otherwise stated in writing.
B. Products:
1. Materials and/or methods specified by name:
a. Where materials and/or methods are
specified
by
naming
one
single
manufacturer
and/or
model
number,
without stating that equal products will be
considered, only material and/or method
named is approved for incorporation into
Work.
b. Should Contractor demonstrate to approval
of Architect that a specified material or
method was ordered in a timely manner and
will not be available in time for
incorporation into this Work, Contractor shall
submit to Architect such data on proposed
substitute materials and/or methods as are
needed to
help Architect determine
suitability of proposed substitution.
2. Where materials and/or methods are specified
by name and/or model number, followed by
words "or an equal approved in advance by
Architect":
a. Material and/or method specified by name
establishes required standard of quality;
b. Materials and/or methods proposed by
Contractor to be used in lieu of materials
and/or methods so specified by name shall
in all ways equal or exceed qualities of
named materials and/or methods;
3. Following products do not require further
approval except for interface within Work:
a. Products specified by reference to standard
specifications such as ASTM and similar
standards;
b. Products specified by manufacturer's name
and catalog model number.
4. Where phrase "or equal," or "or equal as
approved by Architect," occurs in Contract
Documents, do not assume that materials,
equipment, or methods will be approved as
equal unless item has been specifically so
approved for this Work by Architect.
5. Decision of Architect shall be final.
6. Delays in construction arising by virtue of non
availability of a specified material and/or
method will not be considered by Architect as
justifying an extension of agreed Time of
Completion.
7. Such proposed substitutions shall be submitted
in writing and accompanied by supporting
documents sufficient for a fair and equitable
comparison.
10/18/11
01710-1
01710 CLEANING
A – General:
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Throughout the construction period, maintain
the buildings and site in a standard of
cleanliness as described in this Section.
B. Related work:
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
and Sections in Division l of these Specifications.
2. In addition to standards described in this
Section, comply with requirements for cleaning
as described in pertinent other Sections of these
Specifications.
A. Conduct daily inspection, and more often if
necessary, to verify that requirements for
cleanliness are being met.
B. In addition to the standards described in this
Section, comply with pertinent requirements of
B – Products:
2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and
materials needed to maintain the specified
standard of cleanliness.
2.2 COMPATIBILITY
A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment
which are compatible with the surface being
cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer
of the material.
C – Execution:
3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General:
1. Retain
stored
items
in
an
orderly
arrangement allowing maximum access, not
impeding traffic or drainage, and providing
required protection of materials.
2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris,
waste material, and other items not required for
construction of this Work.
3. At least twice each month, and more often if
necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris,
and waste material from the job site.
4. Provide adequate storage for all items
awaiting removal from the job site, observing
requirements for fire protection and protection
of the ecology.
B. Site:
1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect
the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste
material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect
all arrangements of materials stored on the site.
Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements
to meet the requirements of subparagraph 3.1A-1 above.
3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly
condition at all times.
C. Structures:
1. Weekly, and more often if necessary,
inspect the structures and pick up all scrap,
debris, and waste material; remove such items
to the place designated for their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep
interior spaces clean.
a. "Clean," for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from
dust and other material capable of being
removed by use of reasonable effort and a
hand-held broom.
3. As required preparatory to installation of
succeeding materials, clean the structures or
pertinent portions thereof to the degree of
cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer
of the succeeding material, using equipment
and materials required to achieve the necessary
cleanliness.
4. Following the installation of finish floor
materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more
often if necessary) at all times while work is being
performed in the space in which finish materials
are installed.
a. "Clean," for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from
foreign material which, in the opinion of the
Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor
material.
10/18/11
01421-2
d. In the event of stubborn stains not
removable with water, the Architect may require
light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Interior:
a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and
remove all traces of soil, waste materials,
smudges, and other foreign matter.
b. Remove all traces of splashed material
from adjacent surfaces.
c. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains,
and dirt from finished surfaces.
3. Glass: Clean inside and outside.
4. Polished surfaces:
To surfaces requiring
routine application of buffed polish, apply the
polish recommended by the manufacturer of
the material being polished.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. "Clean," for the purpose of this Article, and
except as may be specifically provided
otherwise, shall be interpreted as meaning the
level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled
cleaners using commercial quality building
maintenance equipment and materials.
B. Prior to completion of the Work, remove from
the job site all tools, surplus materials,
equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct
final progress cleaning as described in Article
3.1 above.
C. Site:
1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the
Architect, broom clean paved areas on the site
and public paved areas adjacent to the site.
2. Completely remove resultant debris.
D. Structures:
1. Exterior:
a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and
remove all traces of soil, waste materials,
smudges, and other foreign matter.
b. Remove all traces of splashed materials
from adjacent surfaces.
c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree
of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the
structure.
E.
Schedule final cleaning as approved by the
Architect to enable the Owner to accept a
completely clean Work.
3.3 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY
A. Should the Owner occupy the Work or any
portion thereof prior to its completion by the
Contractor and acceptance by the Owner,
responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall
be as determined by the Architect in
accordance with the General Conditions of the
Contract.
10/18/11
01720-1
01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A – General:
A.
Maintain the job set of Record Documents
completely protected from deterioration
and from loss and damage until
completion of the Work and transfer of all
recorded data to the final Project Record
Documents.
B.
In the event of loss of recorded data, use
means necessary to again secure the data
to the Architect's approval.
1.
Such means shall include, if
necessary in the opinion of the
Architect, removal and
replacement of concealing
materials.
2.
In such case, provide replacements
to the standards originally required
by the Contract Documents.
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Throughout progress of the Work, maintain
an accurate record of changes in the
Contract Documents, as described in
Article 3.1 below and, upon completion of
the Work, transfer the recorded changes
to a set of Record Documents, as
described in Article 3.2 below.
B. Related work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this
Section include, but are not
necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and Sections in Division
l of these Specifications.
2.
Other requirements affecting
Project Record Documents may
appear in pertinent other Sections
of these Specifications.
B – Products:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
A.
Job set: Promptly following receipt of the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, secure from
the Architect at no charge to the
Contractor one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract.
B.
Final Record Documents: At a time
nearing completion of the Work, secure
from the Architect at no charge to the
Contractor one complete set of sepia
transparencies of sewer water & gas plans.
Prior to submitting request for final
payment, submit the final Project Record
Documents to the Architect and secure his
approval.
A.
Delegate the responsibility for
maintenance of Record Documents to one
person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect.
B. Accuracy of records:
1.
Thoroughly coordinate changes
within the Record Documents,
making adequate and proper
entries on each page of
Specifications and each sheet of
Drawings and other Documents
where such entry is required to
show the change properly.
2.
Accuracy of records shall be such
that future search for items shown
in the Contract Documents may
rely reasonably on information
obtained from the approved
Project Record Documents.
C.
Make entries within 24 hours after receipt
of information that the change has
occurred.
C – Execution:
3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET
A.
Immediately upon receipt of the job set
described in Paragraph 2.1-A above,
identify each of the Documents with the
title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET."
B. Preservation:
1.
Considering the Contract
completion time, the probable
number of occasions upon which
the job set must be taken out for
new entries and for examination,
and the conditions under which
these activities will be performed,
devise a suitable method for
protecting the job set.
10/18/11
2.
3.
Do not use the job set for any
purpose except entry of new data
and for review by the Architect,
until start of transfer of data to final
Project Record Documents.
Maintain the job set at the site of
Work.
C. Making entries on Drawings:
1.
Using an erasable colored pencil
(not ink or indelible pencil), clearly
describe the change by graphic
line and note as required.
2. Date all entries.
3.
Call attention to the entry by a
"cloud" drawn around the area or
areas affected.
D.
Make entries in the pertinent other
Documents.
E.
Conversion of schematic layouts (Sewer,
Water Header, Gas):
1.
In some cases on the Drawings,
arrangements of, piping, is shown
schematically and is not intended
to portray precise physical layout.
a.
Final physical arrangement is
determined by the Contractor,
subject to the Architect's approval.
b.
However, design of future
modifications of the facility may
require accurate information as to
the final physical layout of items
which are shown only schematically on the Drawings.
2.
Show on the job set of Record
Drawings, by dimension accurate
to within one inch, the centerline of
each run of items such as are
described in subparagraph 3.1-E-1
above.
a.
Clearly identify the item by
accurate note such as "cast iron
drain," "galv. water," and the like.
b.
Show, by symbol or note, the
vertical location of the item ("under
slab," "in ceiling plenum,"
"exposed," and the like).
c.
Make all identification so
descriptive that it may be related
reliably to the Specifications.
3.2 FINAL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
The purpose of the final Project Record
Documents is to provide factual
information regarding all aspects of the
Work, both concealed and visible, to
enable future modification of the Work to
proceed without lengthy and expensive
site measurement, investigation, and
examination.
B.
Following receipt of the transparencies
described in Paragraph 2.1-B above ;
make required revisions.
C. Transfer of data to Drawings:
1.
Carefully transfer change data
shown on the job set of Record
Drawings to the corresponding
transparencies, coordinating the
changes as required.
2.
Make changes neatly, consistently,
and with the proper media to
assure longevity and clear reproduction.
D. Review and submittal:
1.
Submit the completed set of Project
Record Documents to the Architect
as described in Paragraph 1.2-D
above.
2.
Participate in review meetings as
required.
3.
Make required changes and
promptly deliver the final Project
Record Documents to the Architect.
3.3 CHANGES SUBSEQUENT TO ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor has no responsibility for
recording changes in the Work subsequent
to Final Completion, except for changes
resulting from work performed under
Warranty.
01740-1
01740 WARRANTY
A – General:
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This
Section
specifies
general
administrative and
procedural
requirements for Warranties and Bonds required by the Contract Documents,
including
manufacturers'
standard
warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for
terms of the Contractor's special
warranty of workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are
included in Section 01700.
3. Specific requirements for warranties
for the Work, and products and
installation that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual
Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.
4. Warranty periods specified begin
upon issuance of "Temporary Certificate
of Occupancy, (TCO)."
B. Drawings and general provisions of
Contract,
including
General
and
Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply
to the work of this Section.
C. Manufacturer's
disclaimers
and
limitations on product warranties do not
relieve the Contractor of the warranty on
the Work that incorporates the products,
nor
does
it
relieve
suppliers,
manufacturers, and/or subcontractors
required
to
countersign
special
warranties with the Contractor.
D. The warranties specified in the individual
Specification Sections shall be in
addition to and not a limitation of other
rights the Owner may have against the
Contractor
under
the
Contract
Documents.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard
product
warranties
are
preprinted written warranties published
by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically
endorsed by the manufacturer to the
Owner.
B. Special warranties are written warranties
required by or incorporated in the
Contract Documents, either to extend
time limits provided by standard
warranties or to provide greater rights for
the Owner.
1.3 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. When correcting warranted Work that
has failed, remove and replace other
Work that has been damaged as a
result of such failure or that must be
removed and replaced to provide
access for correction of warranted Work.
1. Tile roofs to be warranted for the
lifetime of the original Owner.
2. Cap sheet roofs to have the mfr’s
standard 10 year warrantee.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty:
1. When Work covered by a warranty
has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the
warranty by written endorsement.
2. The reinstated warranty shall be
equal to the original warranty with an
equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement cost:
1. Upon determination that Work
covered by a warranty has failed,
replace and rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with
requirements of Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor is responsible for the
cost of replacing or rebuilding defective
Work regardless of whether the Owner
has benefitted from use of the Work
through a portion of its anticipated
useful service life.
D. Owner's recourse:
1. Written warranties made to the
Owner are in addition to implied
warranties, and shall not limit the duties,
obligations,
rights,
and
remedies
otherwise available under the law, nor
shall warranty periods be interpreted as
limitations on time in which the Owner
can
enforce
such
other
duties,
obligations, rights, or remedies.
2. The Owner reserves a right to reject
warranties and to limit selections to
products with warranties not in conflict
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
E.
Contractor and subcontractor, supplier
or manufacturer.
2. Submit a draft to the Owner through
the Owner's Representative for approval
prior to final execution.
3. Refer to individual Sections of
Divisions 2 through 16 for specific
content requirements, and particular
requirements for submittal of special
warranties.
The Owner reserves a right to refuse to
accept Work where a special warranty,
certification, or similar commitment is
required on such Work or part of the
Work, until evidence is presented that
entities required to countersign such
commitments are willing to do so.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the Owner's
Representative prior to the date certified
for Substantial Completion.
1. If
the Owner's
Representative's
Certificate of Substantial Completion
designates a commencement date for
warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a
designated portion of the Work, submit
written warranties upon request of the
Owner's Representative.
2. When a designated portion of the
Work is completed and occupied or
used by the Owner during the construction period, by separate agreement
with the Contractor, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner's Representative within 15 calendar days of
completion of that designated portion
of the Work.
B. Submitting special warranties:
1. When a special warranty is required
to be executed by the Contractor, or the
Contractor
and
a
subcontractor,
supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate
terms and identification, ready for
execution by the required parties.
2. Submit a draft to the Owner through
the Owner's Representative for approval
prior to final execution.
C. Forms for special warranties are included
at the end of this Section.
1. Prepare a written document utilizing
the appropriate form,
ready for
execution by the Contractor, or the
D. Form of submittal:
1. At Final Completion, compile two
copies of each required warranty and
bond
properly executed
by the
Contractor, or by the Contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer.
2. Organize the warranty documents
into an orderly sequence based on the
table of contents of the Project Manual.
E.
Bind Warranties and Bonds in heavyduty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring
vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate
contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by
11" paper.
1. Binders:
a. Provide heavy paper dividers
with plastic covered tabs for each
separate warranty;
b. Mark the tab to identify the
product or installation;
c. Provide a typed description of
the product or installation, including the
name of the product, and the name,
address and telephone number of the
installer;
d. Identify each binder on the front
and the spine with the typed or printed
title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," title or
name of the Work, and the name of the
Contractor.
2. When operating and maintenance
manuals are required for warranted
construction, provide additional copies
of each required warranty, as necessary,
for inclusion in each required manual.
(Guaranty-Warranty
page)
form
follows
this
01421-3
10/18/11
GUARANTY-WARRANTY
We hereby warrant and the General Contractor and/or Material Manufacturer guaranty that the
(name of product, equipment or system):
___________________________________________________________
which we have installed in the (name and location of Work):
___________________________________________________________
has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Work as installed
will fulfill the requirements of the guaranty-warranty included in the Specifications. We agree
to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any other adjacent work which may
be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within
a period of ______________ years from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner,
without any expense whatsoever to the Owner, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or
neglect excepted.
In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within sixty days
after being notified in writing by the Owner, we collectively or separately do hereby authorize
the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense, and
we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefor upon demand.
Additional wording (if any) required by the Specification Section to which this Warranty or
Bond applies:
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Signed__________________ Countersigned_____________________
Subcontractor
General Contractor
Countersigned_____________________
Material Manufacturer
02010-1
02010 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
A. General:
1. A soils investigation report has been prepared
for site of this Work by a soil investigation
engineer selected by Owner.
2. Soils investigation report may be inspected at
office of Architect, and copies may be obtained
at cost of reproduction and handling upon
request
addressed
to
Architect
and
accompanied by full payment.
3. This report was obtained for Architect's use in
design and is a part of the Contract Documents.
4. Report is available for bidders' information, but
is not a warranty of subsurface conditions.
5. Bidders should visit site and acquaint themselves
with existing conditions.
6. A construction soil engineer will be retained by
Contractor to observe performance of work in
connection with excavating, trenching, filling,
backfilling, and grading, and to perform
compaction tests. See allowance in Bid
Instructions.
7. Readjust work performed that does not meet
technical or design requirements, but make no
deviation from Contract Documents without
specific and written approval from Architect.
10/18/11
02070-1
02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General:
1. By careful study of Contract Documents,
determine location and extent of selective
demolition to be performed.
2. Visit site and verify extent and location of
selective demolition required. Verify on-site items
to be preserved.
3. Prepare and follow an organized plan for
demolition and removal of items:
a. Shut off, cap, and otherwise protect existing
public utility lines in accordance with
requirements of public agency or utility
having jurisdiction;
b. Completely remove items scheduled to be
so demolished and removed, leaving
surfaces clean, solid, and ready to receive
new materials.
c. Notify Owner in writing of any hidden or
subsurface conditions which may affect the
project.
4. Prevent dust from becoming a nuisance to
public, to neighbors, and to other work being
performed on or near job site.
5. Leave site and surroundings clean and ready
for next trade.
10/18/11
02100-1
02100 SITE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. For work of this Section, retain the services of
a licensed surveyor or engineer recognized
by the appropriate governing agency.
B. Execution:
1. Visit and inspect site prior to beginning work.
2. Field measurements:
a. Accurately set all property lines.
b. Reset all disturbed survey marks and
stakes accurately.
10/18/11
02110-1
02110 CLEARING
A. General:
1. Clear and grub site as shown on Drawings and
specified in this Section.
B. Products:
1. Provide materials, not specifically described but
required for proper completion of work of this
Section, as selected by Contractor subject to
approval of Architect.
C. Execution:
1. Protect existing utilities indicated or made
known.
2. Protect trees and shrubs, where indicated to
remain, by providing a fence around tree or
shrub of sufficient distance away and of
sufficient height so trees and shrubs will not be
damaged in any way as part of this Work.
3. Protection of persons and property:
a. Barricade open depressions and holes
occurring as part of this Work, and post
warning lights on property adjacent to or
with public access.
b. Operate warning lights during hours from
dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise
required.
c. Protect
structures,
utilities,
sidewalks,
pavements, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlement, lateral
movement, undermining, washout, and
other hazards created by operations under
this Section.
4. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming
a nuisance to public, to neighbors, and to other
work being performed on or near site.
5. Maintain access to site at all times.
6. Clearing:
a. Clean out roots 1" in diameter and larger to
a depth of at least 12" below existing
ground surface or subgrade of new graded
surface, whichever is lower.
b. Treat roots remaining in soil with a weed killer
approved by Architect.
7. Conservation of topsoil:
a. After area has been cleared of vegetation,
strip existing topsoil to depth necessary to
provide at least 6" depth of topsoil in areas
shown on Drawings to be turfed or planted,
and to fill planters, without contamination
with subsoils.
b. Stockpile in an area clear of new
construction.
c. Maintain stockpile in a manner that will not
obstruct natural flow of drainage.
(1) Maintain stockpile free from debris and
trash.
(2) Keep topsoil damp to prevent dust and
drying out.
8. Disposal:
a. Remove brush, grass, roots, trash, and other
material from clearing operations.
b. Dispose of away from site in a legal manner.
c. Do not store or permit debris to accumulate
on job site.
d. Do not burn debris at site.
9. Utilities:
a. Coordinate with utility companies and
agencies as required.
b. Where utility cutting, capping, or plugging is
required, perform such work in accordance
with requirements of utility company or
governmental agency having jurisdiction.
10/18/11
02220-1
02220 EARTHWORK
A. General:
1. Use sufficient and competent workmen, and
equipment adequate in size, capacity, and
numbers to accomplish work of this Section in a
timely manner.
2. In addition to complying with requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction,
comply with directions of soil engineer.
B. Products:
1. Fill and backfill material:
a. Provide soil materials free from organic
matter
and
deleterious
substances,
containing no rocks or lumps over 6" in
greatest dimension, and with not more than
15% of rocks or lumps larger than 2-3/8" in
their greatest dimension.
b. Fill material is subject to approval of soil
engineer, and is that material removed from
excavations or imported from off-site borrow
areas,
predominantly
granular,
nonexpansive soils free from roots and other
deleterious matter.
2. Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical
compound, soluble in water, capable of
inhibiting growth of vegetation, and approved
for use on this Work by governmental agencies
having jurisdiction.
3. Topsoil:
a. Where and if shown on Drawings or
otherwise
required,
provide
topsoil
consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy
character, containing an amount of organic
matter normal to region, capable of
sustaining healthy plant life, and reasonably
free from subsoil, roots, heavy or stiff clay,
stones larger than 2" in greatest dimension,
noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other
deleterious matter.
b. Obtain topsoil from sources within project
limits, or provide imported topsoil obtained
from sources outside project limits, or from
both sources.
4. Provide other materials,
not specifically
described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by Contractor
subject to approval of Architect.
C. Execution:
1. Transport satisfactory excavated materials to,
and place in, fill or embankment areas within
limits of Work.
2. Unsatisfactory excavated materials:
a. Excavate to a distance below grade or as
directed by soil engineer, and replace with
satisfactory materials.
b. Include
excavation
of
unsatisfactory
materials, and replacement with satisfactory
materials, as parts of work of this Section.
c. Dispose
of
unsatisfactory
excavated
material, and surplus satisfactory excavated
material, away from the site at disposal
areas arranged and paid for by Contractor.
3. Shoring and bracing:
a. Provide shoring and bracing as necessary
for safety of personnel, protection of work,
and compliance with requirements of
b. Maintain
shoring
and
bracing
in
excavations regardless of time period
excavations will be open.
c. Carry shoring and bracing down as
excavation progresses.
4. Grading, filling, backfilling, and compacting:
a. Remove
vegetation,
debris,
and
unsatisfactory material from ground surface
prior to placing fills.
b. Perform this portion of Work as directed by
soil engineer.
10/18/11
02221-1
02221 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
A – General:
removed from excavations or imported
from off-site borrow areas, predominantly
granular, non-expansive soils free from
roots and other deleterious matter.
3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension
greater than 25 mm (1") in the upper 300
mm (12") of fill or embankment.
4. Cohesionless material used for structural
backfill:
a. Provide sand free from organic
material and other foreign matter,
and as approved by the soil engineer.
5. Where granular base is called for under
building slabs, provide aggregate
complying with requirements of Section
03300 of these Specifications.
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Excavate, backfill, compact, and grade
the site to the elevations shown on the
Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed to meet the requirements of the
construction shown in the Contract
Documents.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this
Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and
Sections in Division l of these
Specifications.
2. Section 02010: Soils report and soil
engineer.
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
thoroughly trained and experienced in the
with the specified requirements and
methods needed for proper performance
of the work of this Section.
B.
Use equipment adequate in size, capacity,
and numbers to accomplish the work of
this Section in a timely manner.
C.
In addition to complying with requirements
of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, comply with the directions of
the soil engineer.
2.2 WEED KILLER
A.
2.3 TOPSOIL
A.
Where and if shown on the Drawings or
otherwise required, provide topsoil
consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy
character, containing an amount of
organic matter normal to the region,
capable of sustaining healthy plant life,
and reasonably free from subsoil, roots,
heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 50
mm (2") in greatest dimension, noxious
weeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other
deleterious matter.
B.
Obtain topsoil from sources within the
project limits, or provide imported topsoil
obtained from sources outside the project
limits, or from both sources.
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section
01620.
B – Products:
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Fill and backfill materials:
1. Provide soil materials free from organic
matter and deleterious substances,
containing no rocks or lumps over 150 mm
(6") in greatest dimension, and with not
more than 15% of the rocks or lumps larger
than 60 mm (2-3/8") in their greatest
dimension.
2. Fill material is subject to the approval of
the soil engineer, and is that material
Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free
chemical compound, soluble in water,
capable of inhibiting growth of vegetation, and approved for use on this Work
by governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Provide other materials, not specifically
described but required for a complete
and proper installation, as selected by the
Contractor subject to the approval of the
Owner.
C – Execution:
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
10/18/11
A.
Examine the areas and conditions under
which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental
to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES
01050.
D.
Use means necessary to prevent dust
becoming a nuisance to the public, to
neighbors, and to other work being
performed on or near the site.
E.
Maintain access to adjacent areas at all
times.
3.4 EXCAVATING
A.
3.3 PROCEDURES
A. Utilities:
1. Unless shown to be removed, protect
active utility lines shown on the Drawings or
otherwise made known to the Contractor
prior to excavating. If damaged, repair or
replace at no additional cost to the
Owner.
2. If active utility lines are encountered, and
are not shown on the Drawings or
otherwise made known to the Contractor,
promptly take necessary steps to assure
that service is not interrupted.
3. If service is interrupted as a result of work
under this Section, immediately restore
service by repairing the damaged utility at
no additional cost to the Owner.
4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with
the permanent facilities being constructed
under this Section, immediately notify the
Architect and secure his instructions.
5. Do not proceed with permanent
relocation of utilities until written instructions
are received from the Architect.
B. Satisfactory excavated materials:
1. Transport to, and place in, fill or
embankment areas within the limits of the
Work.
C. Unsatisfactory excavated materials:
1. Excavate to a distance below grade as
directed by the soil engineer, and replace
with satisfactory materials.
2. Include excavation of unsatisfactory
materials, and replacement by satisfactory
materials, as parts of the work of this
Section.
D. Surplus materials:
1. Dispose of unsatisfactory excavated
material, and surplus satisfactory
excavated material, away from the site at
disposal areas arranged and paid for by
the Contractor.
E.
Excavation of rock:
1. Where rocks, boulders, granite, or similar
material is encountered, and where such
material cannot be removed or
excavated by conventional earth moving
or ripping equipment, take required steps
to proceed with the general grading
operations of the Work, and remove or excavate such material by means which will
neither cause additional cost to the Owner
nor endanger buildings or structures
whether on or off the site.
2. Do not use explosives without written
permission from the Owner and
governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
F.
Excavate and backfill in a manner and
sequence that will provide proper
drainage at all times.
B. Protection of persons and property:
1. Barricade open holes and depressions
occurring as part of the Work, and post
warning lights on property adjacent to or
with public access.
2. Operate warning lights during hours from
dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise
required.
3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement,
washout, and other hazards created by
operations under this Section.
C. Dewatering:
1. Remove all water, including rain water,
encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved location by
pumps, drains, and other approved
methods.
2. Keep excavations and site construction
area free from water.
Perform excavating of every type of
material encountered within the limits of
the Work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and specified herein.
G. Borrow:
1. Obtain material required for fill or
embankment in excess of that produced
within the grading limits
of the Work from borrow areas selected
and paid for by the Contractor and
approved by the soil engineer.
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions
shown within a tolerance of 20 mm (0.10
ft), and extending a sufficient distance
from footings and foundations to permit
placing and removing concrete formwork,
installation of services, other construction
required, and for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and
foundations, take care not to disturb
bottom of excavation:
a. Excavate by hand tools to final grade
just before concrete is placed.
b. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive
concrete.
3. Excavate for footings and foundations
only after general site excavating, filling,
and grading are complete.
H. Ditches and gutters:
1. Cut accurately to the cross sections,
grades, and elevations shown.
2. Maintain excavations free from detrimental
quantities of leaves, sticks, trash, and other
debris until completion of the Work.
3. Dispose of excavated materials as shown
on the Drawings or directed by the soil
engineer; except do not, in any case,
deposit materials less than 1 m (3'-0") from
the edge of a ditch.
I.
J.
Unauthorized excavation:
1. Unauthorized excavation consists of
removal of materials beyond indicated
subgrade elevations or dimensions without
specific instruction from the Architect or the
soil engineer.
2. Under footings, foundations, or retaining
walls:
a. Fill unauthorized excavations by
extending the indicated bottom
elevation of the footing or base to the
excavation bottom, without altering
the required top elevation.
b. When acceptable to the soil engineer,
lean concrete fill may be used to bring
the bottom elevation to proper
position.
3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact
unauthorized excavations as specified for
authorized excavations, unless otherwise
directed by the soil engineer.
Stability of excavations:
1. Slope sides of excavations to 1:1 or flatter,
unless otherwise directed by the soil
engineer.
2. Shore and brace where sloping is not
possible because of space restrictions or
stability of the materials being excavated.
3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations
in a safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
K. Shoring and bracing:
1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing
as may be necessary for safety of
personnel, protection of work, and
compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2. Maintain shoring and bracing in
excavations regardless of the time period
excavations will be open.
3. Carry shoring and bracing down as
excavation progresses.
L.
Excavating for structures:
M. Excavating for pavements:
1. Cut surface under pavements to comply
with cross sections, elevations, and
grades.
N. Cold weather protection:
1. Protect excavation bottoms against
freezing when atmospheric temperature is
less than 2 degrees C (35 degrees F).
3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
A. General:
1. For each classification listed below, place
acceptable soil material in layers to
required subgrade elevations.
2. In excavations:
a Use satisfactory excavated or borrow
material.
3. Under asphalt pavements:
a. Use subbase materials.
4. Under building slabs:
a. Use granular fill, if so called for on the
Drawings, complying with aggregate
acceptable under Section 03300 of
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Backfill excavations as promptly as
progress of the Work permits, but not until
completion of the following.
Acceptance of construction below finish
grade including, where applicable, dampproofing and waterproofing.
Inspecting, testing, approving, and
recording locations of underground
utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing shoring and bracing, and
backfilling of voids with satisfactory
materials.
Removing trash and debris.
Placement of horizontal bracing on
horizontally supported walls.
C. Ground surface preparation:
1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory
soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious
matter from ground surface prior to
placement of fills.
2. Plow, strip, or break up sloped surfaces
steeper than one vertical to four horizontal
so that fill material will bond with existing
surface.
3. When existing ground surface has a
density less than that specified under
"compacting" for the particular area,
break up the ground surface, pulverize,
moisture condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required
depth and percentage of maximum
density.
D. Placing and compacting:
1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not
more than 200 mm (8") in loose depth.
2. Before compacting, moisten or aerate
each layer as necessary to provide the
optimum moisture content.
3. Compact each layer to required
percentage of maximum density for area.
4. Do not place backfill or fill material on
surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
containing frost or ice.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly
adjacent to structures, to required
elevations.
5. Take care to prevent wedging action of
backfill against structures by carrying the
material uniformly around the structure to
approximately the same elevation in each
lift.
6. Where the construction includes basement
or other underground walls having
structural floors over them, do not backfill
such walls until the structural floors are in
place and have attained sufficient
strength to support the walls.
a transition, or if such a transition defeats
positive control of drainage.
B. Grading outside building lines:
1. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to
achieve drainage away from the
structures, and to prevent ponding.
2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular
surface changes, and:
a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled
to be under walks to line, grade, and
cross-section, with finished surface not
more than 20 mm (0.10 ft) above or
below the required subgrade
elevation.
b. Shape the surface of areas scheduled
to be under pavement to line, grade,
and cross-section, with finished surface
not more than 10 mm (0.05 ft) above
or below the required subgrade
elevation.
3.7 COMPACTING
A.
Control soil compaction during
construction to provide the minimum
percentage of density specified for each
area as determined according to ASTM
D1557.
B.
Provide not less than the following
maximum density of soil material
compacted at optimum moisture content
for the actual density of each layer of soil
material in place, and as approved by the
soil engineer.
Structures:
a. Compact the top 200 mm (8") of
subgrade and each layer of fill
material or backfill material at 90% of
maximum density.
Lawn and unpaved areas:
maximum density.
b. Compact the upper 300 mm (12") of
filled areas, or natural soils exposed by
excavating, at 85% of maximum
density.
Walks:
maximum density.
Pavements:
maximum density.
1.
2.
3.6 GRADING
A. General:
1. Uniformly grade the areas within limits of
grading under this Section, including
adjacent transition areas.
2. Smooth the finished surfaces within
specified tolerance.
3. Compact with uniform levels or slopes
between points where elevations are
shown on the Drawings, or between such
points and existing grades.
4. Where a change of slope is indicated on
the Drawings, construct a rolled transition
section having a minimum radius of
approximately 2.4 m (8'-0"), unless
adjacent construction will not permit such
3.
4.
C. Moisture control:
1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material
must be moisture-conditioned before
compacting, uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade or layer of soil
material to prevent free water appearing
on surface during or subsequent to
compacting operations.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air
dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compacting to the specified density.
3. Soil material that has been removed
because it is too wet to permit
compacting may be stockpiled or spread
and allowed to dry. Assist drying by
disking, harrowing, or pulverizing until
moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisturedensity relation tests approved by the soil
engineer.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Secure the soil engineer's inspection and
approval of subgrades and fill layers
before subsequent construction is
permitted thereon.
B.
Provide at least the following tests to the
approval of the soil engineer:
1. At paved areas, at least one field density
test for every 188 sq m (2000 sq ft) of
paved area, but not less than three tests;
2. In each compacted fill layer, one field
density test for every 188 sq m (2000 sq ft)
of overlaying paved area, but not less
than three tests.
C.
If, in the soil engineer's opinion based on
reports of the testing laboratory, subgrade
or fills which have been placed are below
specified density, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions
of Section 01410 of these Specifications.
3.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of newly graded areas:
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic
and erosion, and keep free from trash and
weeds;
2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled,
eroded, and rutted areas to the specified
tolerances.
B. Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed by subsequent construction
operations or adverse weather, scarify the
surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction.
3.10
CERTIFICATION
A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work,
and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect a written report from the soil
engineer certifying that the compaction
requirements have been obtained. State in
the report the area of fill or embankment, the
compaction density obtained, and the type or
classification of fill material placed.
02510-1
02510 SITE CONCRETE
A – General:
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide site cast-in-place concrete, including
formwork and reinforcement, where shown on
the Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Secure concrete mix designs from the testing
laboratory and submit to the Architect for review
and approval.
B. Distribute approved mix designs to testing
laboratory, batch plant, job site, and
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the
specified requirements and methods needed for
proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Provide access for, and cooperate with, the
inspector and testing laboratory.
C. Do not commence placement of concrete until
mix designs have been reviewed and approved
by the Architect and all governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, and until copies of the
approved mix designs are at the job site and
the batch plant.
01620.
B – Products:
2.1 FORMS
A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain
formwork so it will safely support loads which
might be applied until such loads can be
supported safely by the concrete structure.
B. Construct forms to the exact sizes, shapes, lines,
and dimensions shown, and as required to
obtain accurate alignment, location, grades,
and level and plumb work in the finished
concrete.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with the following as minimums:
1. Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60 unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings, using deformed bars for
number 3 and larger;
2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185;
3. Bending: ACI 318.
B. Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes
and dimensions, within fabrication tolerances
stated in the CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practices."
C. Do not use reinforcement having any of the
following defects:
1. Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the
specified fabricating tolerances;
2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings
or required for this Work;
3. Bars with cross-section reduced due to
excessive rust or other causes.
2.3 CONCRETE
A. Comply with the following as minimums:
1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, type I or II,
low alkali.
2. Aggregate, general:
a. ASTM C30, uniformly graded and clean;
b. Do not use aggregate known to cause
excessive shrinkage.
3. Aggregate, coarse:
Crushed rock or
washed gravel with minimum size between 20
mm and 38 mm (3/4" and 1-1/2"), and with a
maximum size number 4.
4. Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of
hard and durable particles varying from fine to
particles passing a 9.5 mm (3/8") screen, of
which at least 12% shall pass a 50-mesh screen.
5. Water: Clean and potable.
10/18/11
B. Provide concrete with the compressive strengths
shown on the Drawings. When such strengths
are not shown on the Drawings, provide:
1. Concrete
walks
and
slabs
on
grade............2500 psi;
2. All other site concrete......................3000 psi.
C. Expansion and control joints:
1. Locate only where shown on the Drawings
or otherwise approved in advance by the
Architect.
2. Except as otherwise directed, assume joint
spacing to be at maximum intervals of 6 m (20
ft).
3. Where required at curbs and gutters,
provide asphalt-impregnated fiber filler material,
13 mm (1/2") thick, installing tops of joints flush
with the concrete surface.
4. Control joints:
a. Use only formed control joints unless
otherwise specifically approved in
advance by the Architect.
b. Make formed control joints not less in
depth than 1/4 the slab thickness.
c. Where sawed joints are specifically
permitted by the Architect, make such
joints not less than 25 mm (1") deep.
D. Surface treatment:
1. Where "sealer" or "hardener" is called for on
the Drawings, provide "Ashford Formula"
manufactured
by
Curecrete
Chemical
Company
and
distributed
by
Martech
Associates, 19836 Vintage Street, Chatsworth,
California 91311 (213) 993-1163, and provide
the manufacturer's standard written 20 year/10
year warranty.
2. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect
or shown on the Drawings, on all other concrete
slab, driveway, and walkway surfaces provide
"Hunt TLF" curing agent manufactured by Hunt
Process Co., Inc.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Where colored concrete is called for:
1. Provide all aggregate, both fine and
coarse, from one single source, using the same
mix design;
2. Do not exceed 100 mm (4") slump;
3. Provide and use color admixture selected by
the Architect from standard products of L. M.
Scofield Company or approved equal.
B. Provide other materials,
not specifically
proper installation, as selected by the
Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
C – Execution:
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which
work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 REINFORCING
A. Comply with the following, as well as the
specified standards, for details and methods of
reinforcing placement and supports.
1. Clean reinforcement and remove loose dust
and mill scale, earth, and other materials that
reduce bond or destroy bond with concrete.
2. Position, support, and secure reinforcement
against displacement by forms, construction,
and the concrete placement operations.
3. Place reinforcement to obtain the required
coverages for concrete protection.
4. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths
as practicable, lapping adjoining pieces one
full mesh minimum.
5. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or
required by governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, lap bars 40 diameters minimum.
3.3 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Transit mix the concrete in accordance with
provisions of ASTM C94.
B. Mixing water:
1. At the batch plant, withhold 10 liters of water
per cu m (2-1/2 gal of water per cu yd) of concrete.
2. Upon arrival at the job site, add all or part
of the withheld water (as required for proper
slump) before the concrete is discharged from
the mixer.
3. Mix not less than five minutes after the
withheld water has been added, and not less
than one minute of that time immediately prior
to discharge of the batch.
4. Unless otherwise directed, provide 15
minutes total mixing time per batch after first
addition of water.
C. Do not use concrete that has stood for over 30
minutes after leaving the mixer, or concrete that
is not placed within 60 minutes after water is first
introduced into the mix.
3.4 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Preparation:
1. Remove foreign matter accumulated in the
forms.
2. Rigidly close openings left in the formwork.
3. Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up
cracks; wet other material sufficiently to maintain
workability of the concrete.
4. Use only clean tools.
B. Conveying:
1. Perform concrete placing at such a rate that
concrete that is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.
2. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in
its final location so as to avoid separation due
to rehandling and flowing.
3. Do not use concrete that becomes nonplastic and unworkable, or does not meet
required quality control limits, or has been
contaminated by foreign materials.
4. Remove rejected concrete from the job site.
C. Placing concrete slabs:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a
continuous
operation,
within
limits
of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel
or section is completed.
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a
straightedge, and then strike off.
3. Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the
surface, leaving the surface free from bumps
and hollows.
4. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface.
Do not disturb the slab surface prior to start of
finishing operations.
3.5 CONSOLIDATION
A. General:
1. Consolidate each layer of concrete
immediately after placing, by use of internal
concrete vibrators supplemented by hand
spading, rodding, or tamping.
2. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete
inside the forms.
3.6 JOINTS
A. Do not permit reinforcement or other embedded
metal items that are being bonded with
concrete to extend continuously through any
expansion joint.
3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Except as may be shown otherwise on the
Drawings, provide the following finishes at the
indicated locations:
1. Walks and pavement:
a. Light broom finish perpendicular to the
long dimension of the slab;
b. Score walks in pattern indicated or
directed.
2. Curbs: Steel trowel finish, followed by fine
hair brush finish.
3. Ramps, stair treads, and landings: Light
broom finish.
3.9 REMEDIAL WORK
A. Repair or replace deficient work as directed by
the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
02513-1
02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
A. General:
1. Use sufficient and competent workmen, and
equipment adequate in size, capacity, and
numbers to accomplish work of this Section in a
timely manner.
B. Products:
3. Apply seal coat in accordance with its
manufacturer's recommendations, achieving a
finished surface which, when dry and thoroughly
set, is smooth, tough, resilient, of uniform black
color, and free from coarse textured areas, lap
marks, ridges, and other surface irregularities.
4. Using the approved traffic paint, provide
striping and marking called for on Drawings.
1. Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical
weed killer compound containing not less than
30% sodium chlorate, or a chlorate-borate
compound, non-flammable, not creating a fire
hazard when applied in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, soluble in
water, and capable of being spread dry or in
solution.
2. Provide headers and stakes of Construction
grade Redwood in dimensions as required for
use.
3. Provide hot plant mixed asphaltic concrete
using aggregate in size and type appropriate to
anticipated traffic, and as approved in
advance by the project Civil Engineer.
4. Provide a sealer consisting of suitable fibrated
chemical type asphalt binders and fillers having
a container consistency suitable for troweling
after thorough stirring, and containing no clay
or other deleterious materials.
5. Provide traffic paint in color or colors selected
by Owner from standard colors from an
approved manufacturer.
6. Provide other materials,
not specifically
subject to approval of Architect.
C. Execution:
1. Placement:
a. Where subbase and/or base course is called
for on Drawings, spread approved material
to a thickness giving compacted thickness
shown on Drawings, and compact to 95%.
b. Provide prime coat and tack coat as
required, allow to dry, and spread hot
asphaltic concrete in layers not more than 3"
thick.
2. Prior to application of seal coat, perform a
flood test in presence of Owner.
a. Flood entire asphaltic concrete paved area
with water;
b. If a depression is found where water ponds
to a depth of more than 1/8" in 6'-0", fill or
otherwise correct.
c. Feather and smooth edges of fill so that joint
between fill and original surface is invisible.
10/18/11
02660-1
02660 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A – General:
1.1 SUMMARY
B – Products:
A. Provide water distribution system as
shown on the Drawings, specified herein,
and needed for a complete and proper
installation.
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this
Section include, but are not necessarily
limited
to,
General
Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and Sections
in Division l of these Specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent
Section 01341.
provisions
of
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days
after the Contractor has received the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be
provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturer's specifications and
other
data
needed
to
prove
compliance with the specified requirements;
3. Names and addresses of the nearest
service and maintenance organization
that readily stocks repair parts;
4. Manufacturer's
recommended
installation procedures which, when
approved by the Owner, will become
the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on
the Work.
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled
workmen
thoroughly
trained
and
experienced in the necessary crafts and
completely familiar with the specified
requirements and methods needed for
proper performance of the work of this
Section.
A. Comply with pertinent
Section 01620.
provisions
of
A. General:
1. Assume connection point to building
service lines as being approximately 1.5
meters (five feet) outside buildings and
structures to which service is required.
2. Pipe materials 75 mm (3") size and
larger: Use cast iron, ductile iron, or
plastic pipes unless otherwise indicated
or approved in advance by the
Architect.
3. Pipe materials less than 75 mm (3")
size: Use plastic or galvanized steel.
B. Pipe:
1. Cast iron pipe:
a. Comply with ANSI A-21.6 or ANSI
A-21.8 unless otherwise shown or
specified.
b. Use
cement
mortar
lining
complying with ANSI A-21.4 or AWWA
C205, standard thickness.
2. Ductile iron pipe:
a. Comply with ANSI A-21.51 unless
otherwise shown or specified.
b. Use
cement
mortar
lining
complying with ANSI A-21.4 or AWWA
C205, standard thickness.
3. Plastic pipe:
a. Use acrylonitrile-butadine-styrene
(ABS) complying with ASTM D15527; or
b. Use
polyvinyl-chloride
(PVC)
complying with ASTM D1785, schedule
40.
4. Galvanized steel:
a. Use schedule 40 steel pipe risers
and fittings, with PVC or ABS couplings
below grade to steel risers for hose
bibbs, and complying with ASTM A120.
C. Joints:
1. Cast iron or ductile iron pipe:
a. Use mechanical joints of the
stuffing-box type complying with ANSI
A-21.11 as modified by ANSI A-21.51 for
ductile iron pipe, with push-on joints
complying with ANSI A-21.11 for cast
iron, and ANSI A-21.51 for ductile iron; or
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
b. Use rubber gaskets and lubricant
complying with applicable requirements
of ANSI A-21.11.
2. Plastic pipe:
a. Use solvent cement for PVC joints
complying with ASTM D2564.
b. Use solvent cement for ABS joints
complying with ASTM D2235:
3. Steel pipe fittings 63 mm (2-1/2") or
less in diameter:
a. Use malleable iron bonded screw
fittings, manufactured to standards of
ANSI B-16.3.
b. Use unions that are screwed,
malleable iron, ground joint, 136 kg (300
lb) AAR, with bronze-to-iron seat.
4. Insulating joints:
a. Provide between non-threaded
ferrous and non-ferrous metallic pipe,
fittings, and valves.
Use sandwich type flange insulating gasket
of the dielectric type, insulating washers,
and insulating sleeves for flange bolts.
Use full faced insulating gaskets with outside
diameter equal to the flange outside
diameter.
Use full length bolt insulating sleeves.
d. Install in a manner to prevent
metal-to-metal contact of dissimilar
metallic piping elements.
D. Fittings and specials:
1. Cast iron pipe and ductile iron pipe:
a. Use fittings and specials suitable
for (150 psi) pressure rating unless
otherwise specified.
b. For use with mechanical joint
pipe, comply with ANSI A-21.10.
c. For use with push-on joint pipe,
comply with ANSI A21.10 and ANSI
A-21.11.
d. Use
cement
mortar
lining
complying with ANSI A-21.4, standard
thickness.
2. Plastic pipe:
a. Use fittings and specials suitable
for schedule 40 rating, unless otherwise
specified or directed.
b. Use fittings and specials for PVC
pipe complying with ASTM D2468.
c. For threaded PVC fittings, use
schedule 80.
3. Steel pipe: Comply with ANSI B-16.3,
using fittings and specials made for steel
pipe.
E.
Valves
1. Gate valves:
a. Use gate valves designed for the
required working pressure.
b. Provide connections as required
for the piping in which they are installed.
c. Provide a clear waterway equal
to the full nominal diameter of the valve,
openable by turning counter clockwise.
d. Provide an arrow on the
operating nut or wheel, cast in metal,
indicating direction of opening.
e. Valves smaller than 75 mm (3"):
(1) Provide all bronze, screwed,
single wedge disc, screw-in bonnet,
packing gland, and nut, with non-rising
stem.
(2) Buried valves: Install in
suitable precast concrete hand hole with
cover marked "WATER."
f. Valves 75 mm (3") and
larger:
(1) Design in accordance with
AWWA C500, standard, bronze trimmed,
non-rising stem, solid wedge disc valves.
(2) Buried valves:
Provide 50
mm (2") operating nuts and in a suitable
valve box with extension and marked
cover.
(3) Provide tee handle socket
operating wrenches of suitable size.
2. Check valves:
a. Use check valves designed for
the required working pressure of with a
clear waterway equal to the full nominal
diameter of the valve.
b. Use valves designed to permit
flow in one direction, when the inlet
pressure is greater than the discharge
pressure, and to close tightly to prevent
return flow when discharge pressure
exceeds inlet pressure.
c. Distinctly cast on the body of
each valve:
(1) Manufacturer's name, initials,
or trademark by which he can be
identified readily;
(2) Valve size;
(3) Working pressure;
(4) Direction of flow.
01421-3
10/18/11
d. Valves 50 mm (2") and smaller:
Provide all bronze, designed for screwed
fittings.
e. Valves larger than 50 mm (2"):
(1) Provide iron body, bronze
mounted, with flanged ends, of the nonslam type;
(2) Provide class 125 flanges
complying with ANSI B-16.1.
F.
Service fittings:
1. PVC mains smaller than 50 mm (2") in
diameter:
a. Make 20 mm (3/4") maximum
service with tees or plastic valve tees.
b. Acceptable products:
(1) As manufactured by Mueller
Company, Decatur, Illinois.
2. PVC mains 50 mm (2") to 88 mm
(3-1/2") in diameter: For 20 mm (3/4")
service to 25 mm (1") service, use bronze
service clamp and bronze corporation
stop designed for PVC pipe.
3. Service clamps and corporation
stops:
a. Use bronze.
b. Provide service clamp with
flattened straps and molded neoprene
gaskets.
4. Services larger than those stated
above: Make with standard tees on
new lines, and tapping tees on existing
lines.
2.2 TAPPING SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeve type coupling for existing
water mains, furnished with outlet
flanged to American 125 standard (ASA
series 15):
1. Acceptable products:
a. Clow
Corporation,
Corona,
California; boltless type:
(1) Model C1 series for existing
cast iron mains, complying with AWWA
class A;
(2) Model CA for class 150 and
class 200 existing asbestos cement
mains, when so directed by the Architect.
2. Coordinate requirements of tapping
sleeves with gate valves and other
fittings as required.
2.3 VALVE BOXES
A. Valves 75 mm (3") and larger:
1. Use service box of cast iron,
extension type of the required length,
with screw adjustment.
2. Provide the word "WATER" cast into
the cover.
a. Alhambra Foundry Company,
Alhambra, California:
(1) For valves 150 mm (6") and
smaller: Model A-3004;
(2) For valves 200 mm (8") and
larger: Model 3005.
B. Valves 63 mm (2-1/2") and smaller:
1. Use precast concrete box with the
word "WATER" cast into the cover.
2. Provide risers on pipe line to place
valve within box depth.
a. Manufactured
by
Brooks
Products, Inc., El Monte, California.
C – Execution:
A. Examine the areas and conditions under
performed.
Correct
conditions
detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENT
A. Make necessary measurements in the
field to assure precise fit of items in
accordance with the approved design.
3.3 HANDLING
A. Handle pipe accessories so as to ensure
delivery to the trench in sound,
undamaged condition:
1. Carry pipe into position; do not
drag.
01421-4
10/18/11
2. Use pinch bars or tongs for aligning
or turning the pipe only on the bare end
of the pipe.
B. Thoroughly clean interior of pipe and
accessories before lowering pipe into
trench. Keep clean during laying operations by plugging or other method
approved by the Owner.
C. Before installation, inspect each piece of
pipe and each fitting for defects:
1. Material found to be defective
before or after laying: Replace with
sound material meeting the specified requirements, and without additional cost
to the Owner.
D. Rubber gaskets: Store in a cool dark
place until just prior to time of
installation.
3.4 PIPE CUTTING
A. Cut pipe neatly and without damage to
the pipe.
B. Unless otherwise recommended by the
pipe manufacturer, cut pipe with
mechanical cutter only.
1. Use wheel cutters when practicable.
2. Cut plastic pipe square, and remove
all burrs.
3.5 LOCATING
A. Locate water pipe at least 3 meters (ten
feet) away, horizontally, from sewer
pipes.
1. Where bottom of the water pipe will
be at least 300 mm (12") above top of
the sewer pipe, locate water pipe at
least 1.5 meters (six feet) away,
horizontally, from the sewer pipe.
B. Where water lines cross under gravityflow sewer lines, fully encase the sewer
pipe in concrete for a distance of at
least 3 meters (ten feet) each side of the
crossing, or provide pressure pipe with
no joint located within 900 mm (36") of
the crossing.
1. Cross water lines in cases above
sewage force mains or inverted siphons
at least 600 mm (24") above the sewer
line.
2. Encase in concrete those joints in the
sewer main closer, horizontally, than 900
mm (36") to the crossing.
C. Do not place water lines in the same
trench with sewer lines or electric wiring.
3.6 JOINT DEFLECTION
A. Cast iron pipe:
1. Maximum allowable deflection will
be given in AWWA C600.
B. Plastic pipe: Unless a lesser amount is
recommended
by
the
pipe
manufacturer,
maximum
allowable
deflections from a straight line or grade,
or offsets, will be five degrees.
3.7 PLACING AND LAYING
A. General:
1. Lower pipe and accessories into
trench by means of derrick, ropes, or belt
slings.
2. Do not dump or drop any of the
materials of this Section into the trench.
3. Except where necessary in making
connections to other lines, lay pipe with
the bells facing in the direction of laying.
4. Rest the full length of each section of
pipe solidly on the pipe bed, with
recesses excavated to accommodate
bells, couplings, and joints.
5. Take up and relay pipe that has the
grade or joint disturbed after laying.
6. Do not lay pipe in water, or when
trench conditions are unsuitable for the
work; keep water out of the trench until
jointing is completed.
7. Securely close open ends of pipe,
fittings, and valves when work is not in
progress.
8. Where any part of coating or lining is
damaged, repair to the approval of the
Owner and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. Plastic pipe:
01421-5
10/18/11
1. Position pipe and fittings in trench in
a manner that identifying markings will
be readily visible for inspection.
2. Cutting and joining:
a. Protect against abrasion from
serrated holding devices.
b. Remove burrs and glosses from
surfaces to be jointed; use abrasive
paper, file, or steel wool.
c. Remove dirt, dust, and moisture
by wiping clean with chemical cleaner or
dry cloth.
d. Using a pure bristle paint brush,
apply an even coat of the specified
solvent cement in the fitting socket and
on the surface of the pipe to be joined
e. Promptly insert pipe into bottom
of the fitting socket; turn the pipe slightly
to assure an even distribution of cement.
f. Remove excess solvent cement
from exterior of the joint.
g. Should cement begin to dry
before the joint is made, reapply cement
before assembling.
h. Allow at least one hour for the
joint to gain strength before handling or
installing the pipe.
3. Do not thread plastic pipe; make
connections only with the solvent cement
or with special adapter fittings designed
for the purpose.
4. Align pipe system components
without strain.
5. Support piping at intervals of not
more than 1.2 meters (four feet), at ends,
branch fittings, and change of direction
or elevation.
6. Support plastic pipe in trenches with
a 75 mm (3") layer of sand. Allow no
rocks, debris, or potentially damaging
substances within 150 mm (6") of plastic
pipe in trenches.
7. Provide an electrically continuous
type TW insulated number 14 tracer wire
in the trench along the pipe, fastened to
the pipe at 6 meter (20 foot) intervals,
and terminating aboveground with a
300 mm (12") lead taped around each
riser.
C. Connections: Use specials and fittings to
suit the actual conditions where
connections are made between new
work and existing mains. Use only those
specials and fittings approved by the
utility having jurisdiction.
D. Sleeves:
1. Where pipe passes through walls of
valve pits or structures, provide cast iron
wall sleeves.
2. Fill annular space between walls and
sleeves with rich cement mortar.
3. Fill annular space between pipe and
sleeves with mastic.
3.8 JOINTING
A. General:
1. Cast iron pipe, ductile iron pipe,
mechanical joints, and push-on type
joints:
a. Install in accordance with AWWA
C600, modified as necessary by the
recommendation of the manufacturer to
provide for special requirements of
ductile iron pipe.
2. Make connections between different
types of pipe and accessories with
transition fittings.
3. Rubber gaskets:
a. Handle,
lubricate
where
necessary,
and
install
in
strict
accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer.
3.9 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES
A. General:
1. Center valve boxes on the valves,
setting plumb.
2. Tamp earth fill around each valve
box to a distance of four feet on all
sides, or to the undisturbed trench face if
less than 1.2 meters (four feet).
3. Tighten stuffing boxes, and fully open
and close each valve to assure that all
parts are in working condition.
B. Service boxes:
1. Where water lines are located below
paved streets having curbs, install boxes
directly back of the curbs.
2. Where no curbing exists, install boxes
in accessible locations beyond limits of
street surfacing, walks, and driveways.
01421-6
10/18/11
3.10
hydrostatic pressure required by the
governmental
agencies
having
jurisdiction.
2. Open and close each valve several
times during the test.
3. Carefully examine exposed pipe,
joints, fittings, and valves.
4. Replace or remake joints showing
visible leakage.
5. Remove cracked pipe, defective
pipe, and cracked or defective joints,
fittings, and valves. Replace with sound
material and repeat the test until results
are satisfactory.
6. Make repair and
replacement
without additional cost to the Owner.
THRUST BLOCKS
A. General:
1. Provide thrust blocks, or metal tie
rods and clamps or lugs, on plugs, caps,
tees, and bends deflecting 22-1/2
degrees or more either vertically or
horizontally, and on water lines 150 mm
(6") in diameter or larger.
B. Installation:
1. Locate thrust blocking between solid
ground and the fitting to be anchored.
2. Unless otherwise shown or directed
by the Architect, place the base and
thrust bearing sides of thrust blocking
directly against undisturbed earth.
3. Sides of thrust blocking not subject to
thrust may be placed against forms.
4. Place thrust blocking so the fitting
joints will be accessible for repair.
5. Protect steel rods and clamps by
galvanizing
or
by
coating
with
bituminous paint.
3.11
TESTING AND INSPECTING
A. Closing uninspected work: Do not allow
or cause any of the work of this Section
to be covered up or enclosed until after
it has been completely inspected and
tested, and has been approved by the
Owner.
B. Hydrostatic tests:
1. Where any section of a water line is
provided with concrete thrust blocking
for fittings, do not make hydrostatic tests
until at least five days after installation of
the concrete thrust blocking, unless
otherwise directed by the Owner.
2. Devise a method for disposal of
wastewater from hydrostatic tests, and
for disinfection, as approved in advance by the Owner.
C. Pressure tests:
1. After the pipe is laid, the joints
completed, fire hydrants permanently
installed, and the trench partially
backfilled leaving the joints exposed for
examination, subject the newly laid
piping and valved sections of water
distribution and service piping to a
D. Leakage test:
1. Conduct leakage test after the
pressure test has been completed
satisfactorily.
Duration of each leakage test: At least two
hours.
During the test, subject water lines to the required working pressure.
2. Leakage is defined as the quantity of
water to be supplied into the newly laid
pipe, or any valved or approved
section thereof, necessary to maintain
the specified leakage test pressure after
the pipe has been filled with water and
the air expelled.
3. Should any test of pipe disclose
leakage greater than that permitted by
the governmental agencies having jurisdiction, locate and repair the defective joint or joints until the leakage is
within the permitted allowance, and at
no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Time for making test:
1. Except for joint material setting, or
where
concrete
reaction
backing
necessitates a five day delay, pipelines
jointed with rubber gaskets, mechanical,
or push-on joints, or couplings may be
subjected
to
hydrostatic
pressure,
inspected, and tested for leakage at any
time after partial completion of backfill.
2. Cement mortar lined pipe may be
filled with water as recommended by the
manufacturer before being subjected to
the pressure test and subsequent
leakage test.
01421-7
10/18/11
F.
Disinfection:
1. Before acceptance of the potable
water system, disinfect each unit of
completed water supply, distribution,
and service line in accordance with
AWWA C601.
2. Perform all such tests and disinfection
in a manner approved by governmental
agencies having jurisdiction.
3. Furnish two copies of a Certificate of
Disinfection to the Owner.
3.12
PAINTING
A. Paint valves, pipe, and vents
accordance with the provisions
Section 09900.
in
of
02730-1
02730 SANITARY SEWERAGE
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Clay pipe and fittings (VCP):
1. Use extra strength, bell and spigot,
complying with ASTM C200.
2. Use compression joints complying with
ASTM C425, type II.
A. Provide sanitary sewerage system as shown on
the Drawings, specified herein, and needed
for a complete and proper installation.
C. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings (PVC):
1. Use extra strength, minimum of SDR 35.
2. Comply with ASTM D3034.
B. Related work:
General
Conditions,
Supplementary
Conditions, and Sections in Division l of these
Specifications.
D. Acrylonitrile butadine styrene pipe and fittings
(ABS):
1. Comply with ASTM D2680.
A – General:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
01341.
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after
the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other
data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation
procedures which, will become the basis for
accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the Work.
necessary crafts and completely familiar with
the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work
of this Section.
2.2 MANHOLES
A. Precast:
1. Provide reinforced precast concrete
manhole sections complying with ASTM C478,
except use portland cement as specified
below.
2. Provide joints of mortar, with approved
mastic or rubber gasket, or an approved
combination of those types.
3. Provide precast units of concrete rings and
eccentric cone section, with ladder rungs cast
into the units.
4. Approved manufacturer:
a. Ameron Pipe Products Group.
B. Portland cement:
1. For concrete in manholes, comply with
ASTM C150, type II.
2. For concrete in cradle and encasement:
Type optional with the Contractor.
C. Concrete:
1. Provide concrete in accordance with
pertinent provisions of Section 03300 of these
Specifications.
D. Mortar:
1. Comply with ASTM C270, type M.
2.3 FRAMES AND COVERS
01620.
A. Use cast iron frames and covers, with the
wording "SEWER" cast into the covers in letters
50 mm (2") high and plainly visible, as
manufactured by Alhambra Foundry.
B – Products:
A. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings (CIP):
1. Comply with ASTM A74, class SV.
2. Use rubber gaskets complying with ASTM
C564 for compression joints.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts as required and where
shown on the Drawings.
1. Provide traffic weight covers and frames
where cleanouts are within pavement, with the
letters "SSCO" cast into the cover.
10/18/11
a. Alhambra Foundry, Model A-2100, 250
mm (10") round cover, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings.
B. Where cleanout is within a graded area,
construct as shown on the Drawings.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically
proper installation, as selected by the
Contractor subject to the approval of the
Owner.
C – Execution:
which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and
proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Make necessary measurements in the field to
assure precise fit of items in accordance with
the approved design.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Trench, backfill, and compact for the work of
this Section in strict accordance with pertinent
provisions of Section 02221 of these
Specifications.
B. Location:
1. Where the sewer location is not located
clearly by dimensions on the Drawings, locate
the sewer:
a. Not closer than 3 meters (ten feet) from
a water supply main or service line.
b. Where the bottom of the water pipe
will be at least 300 mm (12") above the top of
the sewer pipe, the horizontal spacing may be
a minimum of 1.8 meters (six feet).
c. Where the gravity flow sewers cross
above water lines, fully encase the sewer pipe
for a distance of ten feet on each side of the
crossing; or
d. Use acceptable pressure pipe with no
joint closer horizontally than three feet from the
crossing.
e. Where concrete encasement is used,
provide not less than 100 mm (4") thickness
including that on pipe joints.
C. Pipe laying:
1. Protect pipe during handling against
shocks and free fall.
Remove extraneous
material from the pipe interior.
2. Lay pipe by proceeding upgrade with the
spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe pointing in
direction of flow.
3. Lay each pipe accurately to the indicated
line and grade, aligning so the sewer has a
uniform invert.
4. Continually clear interior of the pipe free
from foreign material.
5. Before making pipe joints, clean and dry
all surfaces of the pipe to be joined.
6. Use lubricants, primers, and adhesives
recommended for the purpose by the pipe
manufacturer.
7. Place, fit, join, and adjust the joints to
obtain the degree of water tightness required.
3.4 WYE BRANCHES
A. Provide
wye
branches
where
sewer
connections are indicated or required.
1. Where joining an existing line, join by
placing a saddle over the line, and make
connection in a manner that will not obstruct
or interfere with the existing flow.
2. When conditions are such that connection
pipe cannot be supported adequately on
undisturbed earth or compacted fill, encase
the pipe in a concrete backfill, or support on
a concrete cradle.
B. Provide concrete required because of
conditions resulting from faulty construction
methods or negligence, at no additional cost
to the Owner.
3.5 MANHOLES
A. General:
1. Shape the invert channels to be smooth
and semicircular, conforming to the inside of
the adjacent sewer section.
2. Make changes in direction of flow with a
smooth curve of as large a radius as the size
of the manhole will permit.
3. Make changes in size and grade of
channels smoothly and evenly.
4. Form the invert channels directly in the
concrete of the manhole base, with mortar, or
by laying full section sewer pipe through the
manhole and breaking out the top half after
surrounding concrete has hardened.
5. Smooth the floor of the manhole outside
the channels, and slope toward the channels
at not less than 25 mm (1") per 300 mm (foot)
nor more than 50 mm (2") per 300 mm (foot).
6. Prevent free drop inside the manholes
exceeding 450 mm (18") measured from the
invert of the inlet pipe to the top of the floor of
the manhole outside the channels.
7. Construct drop manholes whenever the
free drop otherwise would be greater than
450 mm (18").
B. Manhole rungs:
1. Provide each manhole with individual
wall-mounted rungs fabricated of aluminum,
plastic-covered steel, or galvanized steel.
2. Comply
with
the
requirements
of
C. Jointing and plastering:
1. Completely fill mortar joints, and leave
smooth and free from surplus mortar on the
inside of the manhole.
D. Frames and covers: Unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings, set frames and covers:
1. In paved areas: So that the top of the
cover will be flush with the finished pavement;
or
2. In unpaved areas: 50 mm (2") higher than
finished grade.
3.6 MANHOLE OVER EXISTING PIPE
A. Construct new manhole as specified, breaking
upper half of existing pipe after base of
manhole is completed so as not to obstruct
flow of the existing pipe.
3.7 BUILDING CONNECTIONS
A. Terminate building connections where shown
on the Drawings.
B. Provide temporary closures at terminals where
the building pipe is not installed.
1. Place marker post at grade end of
plugged line.
2. Where building piping has been installed,
make connection to the building piping
system.
3.8 TESTING AND INSPECTING
A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this
Section to be covered up or enclosed until
after it has been inspected and tested, and
has been approved by the Plumbing
Inspector.
B. Leakage tests:
1. Test lines for leakage by exfiltration tests.
a. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill the
trench to at least the lower half of the pipe.
b. If required, place sufficient additional
backfill to prevent pipe movement during
testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit
inspection.
2. Water exfiltration tests:
a. Test each section of sewer line between
successive manholes by closing the lower end
of the sewer to be tested, and the inlet sewer
of the upper manhole, using stoppers.
b. Fill the manhole and pipe with water to
a point four feet above the invert of the sewer
at the center of the upper manhole; or, if
groundwater is present, four feet above the
average adjacent groundwater level.
Allowable leakage will be computed by the
formula:
(1) For mortared joints: E = 0.0001 LD
H;
(2) For all other joints: E = 0.0002 LD H;
(3) "L" is the length of sewer and house
connections tested, in feet;
(4) "E" is the allowable leakage in liters
(gallons) per minute of sewer test;
(5) "D" is the internal pipe diameter in
inches;
(6) "H" is the difference in elevation between the water surface in the upper manhole
and the invert of the pipe at the lower
manhole; or, if groundwater is present above
the invert of the pipe in the lower manhole, the
difference in elevation between water surface
in the upper manhole and the groundwater at
the lower manhole.
3. Water infiltration test:
a. If, in the opinion of the Owner, excessive groundwater is encountered in the construction of a section of the sewer, the
exfiltration test shall not be used.
b. Close the end of the sewer at the
upper structure sufficiently to prevent the entrance of water.
c. Discontinue pumping of groundwater
for at least three days, then test for infiltration.
d. Infiltration into each individual reach of
sewer between adjoining manholes shall not
exceed that allowed in the formula given for
the exfiltration test, except that "H" in the
formula shall be the difference between the
groundwater surface and the invert of the
sewer at the downstream manhole.
4. Provide and use measuring devices
5. Provide water, materials, and labor for
making required tests.
6. Make tests in the presence of the Owner,
giving the Owner at least three days advance
notice of being ready for test observation.
C. Submit test data to the Owner for review and
approval.
02830-1
02830 CHAIN LINK FENCES
A. Products:
1. Provide steel pipe, galvanized at 1.8 oz, in
following sizes:
a. End, corner, slope, and pull posts: 2.875"
o.d.;
b. Line posts: 2.375" o.d. at eight feet O.C.
c. Gate posts: 4" o.d.;
d. Top rails: 1.660" o.d.;
e. Post braces: 1.660" o.d.;
f.
Gates: 1.90" o.d.
2. Provide 7 gage galvanized tension wire at
bottom of fabric.
3. Provide 9 gage fabric, galvanized at 2.0 oz, in
2" mesh, with top and bottom selvages twisted
and barbed.
4. Provide post tops, stretcher bars, gate
hardware, and all other accessory items
required for a complete and proper installation.
5. All heights are six feet above finish surface.
B. Execution:
1. Set all posts in 30" deep x 8" diameter
concrete at earth locations and ten inches
into masonry at top of masonry wall
locations. Use fast setting liquid grout.
2. Allow concrete to attain 28 day strength
before rails, tension wires, and fabric are
installed.
10/18/11
02841-1
SECTION 02841
BICYCLE RACKS
Part 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Provide in-ground mounted bicycle racks where shown on the Drawings, as
specified herein.
B.
Related work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in
Division l of these Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
Part 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BICYCLE RACKS
A.
Provide in-ground mounted bicycle racks, manufactured by DERO Bike rack Co.,
2657 32nd Avenue S, Minneapolis, MN 55406 (ph: 888-337-6729), or equal
approved in advance by the Owner, complete with suitable anchorage devices
as required for positive and permanent attachment to the concrete surfaces.
Part 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of
the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Carefully coordinate the arrangement of bicycle racks with the layout of the
flatwork, providing proper mounting to engage wheels.
B.
Fix the bicycle racks into final position by means of in-ground anchorage devices
approved in advance by the Owner.
C.
Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each installed bicycle rack
and verify that it is in perfect condition and properly set.
10/18/11
D.
02841-2
Promptly remove units that are in any way damaged, and replace with new units
meeting the specified requirements.
10/18/11
03100-1
03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
A. General:
1. Design of formwork is Contractor's responsibility.
2. In addition to complying with pertinent
regulations of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, comply with pertinent provisions of
ACI 347.
B. Products:
1. Except for metal forms, use new materials.
Materials may be reused during progress of
Work, provided they are completely cleaned
and reconditioned, recoated for each use, and
capable of producing formwork of required
quality.
2. For footing and foundations, use Douglas Fir
boards or planks secured to wood or steel
stakes, substantially constructed to shapes
indicated and to support required loads.
3. For studs, wales, and supports, use Standard
grade or better Douglas Fir, dimensions as
required to support loads but not less than 2" x
4".
4. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete
together with combination steel ties and
spreaders approved by Architect.
a. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows,
each tier plumb from top to bottom and
each row level.
b. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more
than 6" below pour lines. Tighten after
concrete has set and before next pour is
made.
c. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide
form ties of removable type with she-bolts
equipped with permanent plugs and a
system approved by Architect for fixing
plugs in place.
5. Design of formwork:
a. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain
formwork so that it will safely support vertical
and lateral loads that might be applied,
until such loads can be supported by
concrete structure.
b. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground
by
formwork
system
and
in-place
construction that has attained adequate
strength for that purpose.
c. Construct formwork so concrete members
and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position.
d. Design forms and falsework to include
assumed values of live load, dead load,
weight of moving equipment operated on
formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete
drop,
vibrator
frequency,
ambient
temperature, foundation pressures, stresses,
lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to
safety of structure during construction.
e. Provide shores and struts with positive means
of adjustment capable of taking up
formwork settlement during concrete placing
operations, using wedges or jacks or a
combination thereof.
f. Provide trussed supports when adequate
foundations for shores and struts cannot be
secured.
g. Support form materials by structural
members spaced sufficiently close to prevent
objectionable deflection.
h. Fit forms placed in successive units for
continuous surfaces to accurate alignment,
free from irregularities, and within allowable
tolerances.
i. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of cement paste during concrete
placement. Solidly butt joints, and provide
backup material at joints as required to
prevent leakage and prevent fins.
j. Provide camber in formwork as required for
anticipated deflections due to weight and
pressures of fresh concrete and construction
loads.
C. Execution:
1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to
exact sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions
shown, and as required to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, and level and
plumb work in finished structure.
2. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses,
moldings, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other
features as required.
3. Fabrication:
a. Fabricate forms for easy removal without
hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces.
b. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates
where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces.
c. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,
reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent
swelling and assure ease of removal.
d. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where
so directed by Architect.
4. Forms for exposed concrete:
a. Drill forms to suit ties being used, and to
prevent leakage of cement paste around tie
holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties
through improperly prepared holes.
b. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting
planes, without visible edges or offsets.
-
03100-2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Back joints with extra studs or girts to
maintain true, square intersections.
c. Use extra studs, wales, and bracing to
prevent objectionable bowing of forms
between studs, and to avoid bowed
appearance in concrete.
Do not use
narrow strips of form material which will
produce bow.
Corner treatment:
a. Unless shown otherwise, form chamfers with
3/4" x 3/4" strips, accurately formed and
surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines
and tight edges.
b. Extend terminal edges to required limit, and
miter chamfer strips at changes in direction.
Locate control joints as indicated on Drawings
and, where required but not shown on
Drawings, as approved by Architect.
Provisions for other trades:
a. Provide openings in concrete formwork to
accommodate work of other trades.
b. Verify size and location of openings,
recesses, and chases with trade requiring
such items.
c. Accurately place and securely support items
to be built into the concrete.
Coat form contact surfaces with form coating
compound before reinforcement is placed.
a. Do not allow excess form coating material
to accumulate in forms or to come in
contact with surfaces which will bond to
fresh concrete.
b. Apply form coating material in strict
accordance
with
its
manufacturer's
recommendations.
Form removal:
a. Do not disturb or remove forms until
concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit
form removal with complete safety.
b. Do not remove shoring until member has
acquired sufficient strength to support its
own weight, load upon it, and added load
of construction.
c. Do not strip floor slabs in less than two days.
d. Do not strip vertical concrete in less than
seven days.
Finished surfaces:
a. Exercise care in removing forms from finished
concrete surfaces so that surfaces are not
marred or gouged.
b. Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull form
ties neatly.
c. Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or
other metal to project from, or be visible on,
any concrete surface except where so
shown on Drawings.
d. Solidly pack form tie holes, rod holes, and
similar holes in the concrete. For packing,
use cement grout specified in Section 03300
of these Specifications, flushing holes with
water before packing, screeding off flush,
and grinding to match adjacent surfaces.
-
03200-1
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with pertinent provisions of following,
except as may be modified herein:
a. ACI 318;
b. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Products:
1. Bars:
a. Provide deformed billet steel bars complying
with ASTM A615, using grades shown on
Drawings.
b. Per A.S.T.M. A615, for #3 and #4 bars use
grade 40, Fy'=40,000 PSI; for #5 and larger
use grade 60, Fy'=60,000 PSI
2. Steel wire:
a. Comply with ASTM A82.
b. For tie wire, comply with Fed Spec QQ-W461, annealed steel, black, 16 gage
minimum.
3. Welded wire fabric:
a. Provide welded steel, complying with ASTM
A185.
4. Welding electrodes:
a. Comply with AWS A5.1, low hydrogen, E70
series.
5. Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for
spacing,
supporting,
and
fastening
reinforcement in place:
a. Use wire bar type supports complying with
CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
b. Do not use wood, brick, or other noncomplying material.
c. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand
plates or horizontal runners where base
material will not support chair legs.
d. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces,
where legs of supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with either hot-dip
galvanized or plastic-protected legs.
6. Fabrication:
a. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to
required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI
Manual.
b. In case of fabricating errors, do not
straighten or re-bend reinforcement in a
manner that will weaken or injure material.
c. Reinforcement with any of following defects
will not be acceptable.
(1) Bar lengths, depths, and/or bends
exceeding the specified fabrication
tolerances;
(2) Bends or kinks not shown on Drawings;
(3) Bars with reduced cross-section due to
excessive rusting or other causes.
C. Execution:
1. Comply with specified standards for detail and
method of placing reinforcement and supports,
except as may be modified herein.
2. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and
mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce
or destroy bond with concrete.
3. Position, support, and secure reinforcement
against displacement by formwork, construction, and concrete placing operations.
4. Locate and support reinforcement by metal
chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers,
as required.
5. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum
coverages for concrete protection.
6. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar
supports together with specified wire.
7. Set tie wires so twisted ends are directed away
from exposed concrete surfaces.
8. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as
practicable, lapping adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh.
9. Provide sufficient numbers of supports, and of
strength to carry the reinforcement.
10. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2"
beyond last leg of any continuous bar support.
11. Do not use supports as bases for runways for
concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
12. Splices:
a. Tie lap splices securely with specified wire to
prevent displacement of splices during
placement of concrete.
b. Splice devices:
(1) Install in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
(2) Splice in a manner developing at least
125% of yielding strength of bar.
(3) Do not splice bars except at locations
shown on Drawings, except as otherwise
specifically approved by Architect.
13. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.479.
10/18/11
03300-1
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. General:
1. Do not commence placement of concrete until
mix designs have been reviewed and approved
by Architect and all governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, and until copies are at job
site, batch plant, and building department.
B. Products:
1. Provide a standard brand of portland cement
complying with ASTM C150, type I or II, low alkali
unless otherwise noted. Do not change brand
of cement during progress of Work except as
approved in writing by Architect.
2. Provide hard-rock aggregate complying with
ASTM C33, with additional attributes as specified
herein.
3. For making grading tests of fine and coarse
aggregate, use square mesh wire cloth
complying with ASTM E11.
4. Fine aggregate: Provide washed natural sand
having strong, hard, durable particles, and
containing no more than 2% by weight of
deleterious matter such as clay lumps, mica,
shale, or schist.
5. Coarse aggregates:
a. Provide coarse aggregate consisting of
clean, hard, fine grained, sound crushed
rock or washed gravel, or a combination of
both, containing not more than 5% by
weight of flat, chip-like, thin, elongated,
friable, or laminated pieces, nor more than
2% by weight of shale or cherty material.
b. Any piece having a length in excess of five
times average thickness shall be considered
flat or elongated.
c. Use coarse aggregate of largest practicable
size for each condition of placement.
d. Do not exceed 3/4 of clear distance
between reinforcing bars, 1/5 of narrowest
dimension between sides of forms, or 1/3 of
any slab section.
6. Lightweight aggregate, coarse and fine:
Provide rounded, sealed, expanded shale or
clay conforming to ASTM C330.
7. Use only water which is clean and free from
deleterious amounts of acid, alkali, salt, and
organic matter.
8. Use only a standard brand of admixture for
concrete meeting or exceeding following
requirements:
a. Reduce required mixing water at least 75%
without entraining air in excess of 2% by
volume.
9.
10.
11.
12.
b. If admixture used entrains more than 2% air,
water reduction shall be at least 10%, but in
no case shall volume of air entrained
exceed 5%.
c. A separate approved air-entraining agent
may be used in addition to water-reducing
admixture, provided combination of two
admixtures meets requirements listed above.
d. If pozzolanic materials are used, make them
from an oil-impregnated diatomaceous
shale, or from an opaline cherty shale, chert,
or porcelaneous rock found in the Monterey
formation, or other Miocene strata, or
material
of
similar
mineralogical
composition.
e. Use only automatic dispensers approved by
testing agency for adding admixture.
f. If an air-entraining agent is used, run air
content determinations periodically during
pour to make certain volume of air
entrained is less than 5%.
Abrasive:
a. Provide aluminum uniformly graded oxide
grains, screen size 12-13, 14-36, or 16-30.
(1) "Alundrum;"
(2) "Aloxite."
Expansion joint filler:
a. Provide preformed strips, non-extruding and
resilient bituminous type, of thickness
indicated, complying with ASTM D1751.
b. If sealants specified in Section 07920 are
used in joints built under this Section, provide
a filler complying with ASTM D1752.
Curing materials:
a. Curing paper: Comply with ASTM C171,
type 1, regular.
b. Liquid curing compounds:
(1) Provide a standard brand, clear or
black
as
required
for
particular
application, and complying with ASTM
C309.
(2) When black compound is used, provide
compatibility with adhesive used for
laying floor covering in such areas.
Floor hardener:
a. Provide mineral or metallic hardener, natural
gray in color.
(1) "Lithochrome"
by
L.
M.
Scofield
Company;
(2) "Hydroment" by the Upco Company;
(3) "Colorcron" or "Masterplate" by Master
Builders;
(4) "Harcol" or "Ferrolith H" by Sonneborn;
10/18/11
03300-2
(5) "Colorundum" or "Duraflex" by A. C. Horn
Products.
13. Vapor barrier membrane:
a. Provide a 10 mil vapor barrier with a
permeance rating of 0.01 US perms or less
and complying with ASTM E1745.
b. If vapor barrier is shown on Drawings, but
thickness is not indicated, provide 10 mil
thickness.
14. Provide mix design prepared by approved
testing agency, based on strengths of
approved materials, and meeting requirements
stated on Drawings. Secure Architect's approval
of each mix design, including new mix designs
required to be prepared should a change
occur in materials being used.
15. Lightweight concrete:
a. Design mix in accordance with provisions of
ACI 613A, and pertinent requirements of
b. Unless otherwise directed, use type II
portland cement and achieve a weight of
not more than 110 pcf and an ultimate
compressive strength of 3000 lbs at 28 days.
3.
C. Execution:
1. Concrete for minor work, when approved by
Architect, may be mixed at site in a power mixer
when mixer has a capacity not less than one full
sack batch.
2. Unless otherwise approved by Architect, use
ready mixed concrete complying with ASTM
C94, except as may be modified by following.
a. For materials for ready mixed concrete, and
for methods of measuring materials, comply
with applicable provisions of this Section.
b. Equip loading plant to handle not less than
four sizes of aggregate in such a manner as
to prevent intermixing of aggregates until
loaded into weighing hopper.
c. Equip truck mixers with a mixing water tank
fitted with a water gage.
d. Mixing:
(1) Mix each batch of concrete not less than
15 minutes, five minutes of which shall be
at site.
(2) Rotate drum at rate specified by
manufacturer of mixer as "mixing speed."
(3) Whenever there is a delay in unloading,
rotate drum slowly at intervals to prevent
incipient set of concrete.
e. Addition of water:
(1) Normally, do not deliver concrete with
total permissible amount of water
incorporated therein.
(2) Unless otherwise approved by Architect,
withhold at least 2-1/2 gal per cu yd and
add before concrete is discharged but
4.
5.
6.
only under observation of designated
inspector.
(3) After water is added, at least five minutes
of mixing time shall be immediately prior
to discharge.
(4) Concrete will be rejected if not placed in
final position within 1-1/2 hours after
water is first added to batch.
f. Concrete at time of placing shall be in such
condition that it can be placed properly.
g. Discharge all wash water from mixing drum
before truck reloads at batching plant.
Concrete consistency:
a. Use amount of water established by
approved mix design.
(1) Do not exceed maximum quantity
specified for grade of concrete.
(2) Use minimum amount of water necessary
to produce concrete of workability
required.
(3) Do not supplement predetermined
amount of water with additional water
for any reason.
b. Measure concrete consistency by ASTM
C143 method.
(1) As part of routine testing and inspecting,
test twice each day or partial day's run
of mixer.
(2) Maintain a complete and accurate
record of tests.
c. Provide maximum slumps of concrete as:
(1) Footings, and slabs on soil:
3";
(2) Other concrete:
4".
Cement grout and dry-pack grout:
a. Mix at site, in composition of one volume of
portland cement to 2-1/2 volumes of fine
aggregate.
b. Mix materials dry; then add sufficient water
to make mixture flow under its own weight.
c. When grout is used as a dry-pack concrete,
add sufficient water to make a stiff mixture
that can be molded into a sphere.
Miscellaneous provisions:
a. Provide strengths of concrete as shown on
Drawings.
b. Provide concrete dense and free from
honeycomb and other defects.
c. Place and finish members to conform to
shapes and dimensions indicated, with all
surfaces true to line, plumb, and level.
Reglets and rebates:
a. Form reglets and rebates as required to
receive
frames,
flashing,
and
other
equipment.
b. Verify dimensions and positions of required
reglets and rebates with trades whose work
10/18/11
03300-3
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
is related to or contingent upon such
dimensions and positions.
c. If concrete slabs on earth join a wall or other
perpendicular concrete surface, form a
reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal
concrete work.
(1) Provide reglet full thickness of slab and
3/4" deep, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
(2) Exterior walks need not be provided for
in this way except where so detailed on
Drawings.
Embedded piping and rough hardware:
a. Coordinate the various trades who are
required to fasten work to structure, or are
required to insert therein any sleeve, box,
bolt, anchor, insert, or other rough
hardware.
b. Provide every facility for setting all required
items accurately in forms.
c. Be responsible for changes in position of
such items after they have been set.
d. Provide in forms for all sleeves, boxes, bolts,
anchors, inserts, strap anchors for frames,
and other rough hardware required for
Work, and which are shown or required to
be embedded in concrete.
e. Conduits and sleeves:
(1) Locate so as not to reduce the strength
of construction. Do not place pipes,
except conduits, in a slab of less than 31/2" thickness.
(2) Do not place conduit between bottom
of reinforcing steel and bottom of
supported slab.
(3) In placing conduits at slabs on earth,
place below reinforcement, and encase
in concrete by increasing thickness of
slab locally to at least 3" of concrete
around conduit on all sides.
Where openings in floors and walls are required
by various trades, but are not detailed on
Drawings, reinforce as directed by Architect.
Before placing concrete, thoroughly clean
forms, wash out with water, and make tight.
Time of placing:
a. Do not place concrete until reinforcement,
conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, sleeves,
hangers, bolts, and other embedded
materials are securely and properly fastened
in correct positions.
b. Pour patios and sidewalks after interior and
exterior stucco and painting have been
completed.
Preparation:
a. Before new concrete is deposited upon or
against concrete that has taken its initial set
or has hardened, remove all incrustations
from forms and reinforcement.
b. Remove all laitance, oil, and loose particles
from concrete and concrete surfaces, and
thoroughly clean forms with water under stiff
pressure.
c. Remove laitance after concrete has
hardened partially (not less than two hours
nor more than four hours after placing) by
brushing with stiff bristles, or by directing a
stream of water from a 1/4" nozzle to expose
clean top surface of coarse aggregate.
12. Method of placing:
a. Place concrete only under degree of
inspection
required
by
governmental
b. Do not place concrete outside of regular
working hours unless required inspection
authorities have been notified properly and
are present.
c. Spouts, pipes, troughs, belts, chain buckets,
and other equipment may be used in
conveying concrete.
d. Do not permit concrete to free drop more
than 6'-0".
e. Deposit concrete direct into conveyances,
and direct from conveyances to final points
of repose, except where troughs, buckets, or
the like are used, in which case dump
concrete into hoppers and then into
conveyances.
f. Where tremies are used, or where free drop
is 5'-0" or more, and through reinforcement,
use a dumping box or board, moving
concrete therefrom by shovels or hoes.
g. Deposit concrete so surface is kept level
throughout, a minimum being permitted to
flow from one position to another, and
place as rapidly as practicable after mixing.
h. Do not use in this Work any concrete not
placed within 30 minutes after leaving
mixer.
13. Tamping and conveying:
a. Thoroughly
work
concrete
around
reinforcement and embedded fixtures, and
into corners of forms, during placing
operations.
b. Completely compact with tamping poles
and by tapping forms until concrete is
thoroughly compact and without voids.
Determine number of tampers needed by
amount and method of placing concrete.
c. Exercise care to tamp concrete vigorously
and thoroughly to obtain maximum density.
d. Use manual tampers as well as mechanical
vibrators.
(1) Exercise care to direct quick handling of
vibrators from one position to another.
(2) Do not over-vibrate concrete.
(3) Do not move concrete by use of
vibrator.
10/18/11
03300-4
14. Stoppages:
a. Stop concrete placing only when and where
b. Maintain flow surface of freshly placed
concrete as level whenever a pour is
stopped,
providing
tight
dams
to
accomplish this.
c. Make construction joints where appropriate.
Max. area between joints =400 sq.ft.
d. Provide keys and dowels at construction
joints where indicated on Drawings, and
where placement is interrupted.
15. Preparation for slabs on earth:
a. Prepare subgrade as specified in other
Sections.
b. Dampen subgrade for exterior slabs and
paving prior to placing concrete, but do
not dampen subgrade at interior floor slabs.
c. Provide specified vapor barrier membrane,
with bedding and covering shown on
Drawings, beneath floor slabs on grade.
(1) Place the membrane in as large sheets
as practicable, lapping 12", with top lap
placed in direction concrete will be
spread.
(2) Carefully cut, fit, and seal membrane to
all pipes and conduits projecting
through membrane, using small sheets,
where necessary, and pressure-sensitive
tape.
(3) Make necessary repairs to membrane,
and secure approval before placing
concrete.
(4) Do not permit membrane to be
punctured except at screed stakes and
utility risers.
16. Placing and finishing:
a. Tamp freshly placed concrete, except slabs
to receive separate topping finish or mortar
setting bed, using a heavy tamper, until at
least 3/8" of mortar is brought to surface.
b. Use tampers having a face consisting
essentially of a grid of parallel metal bars.
c. Tamp with a light tamper, and screed with a
heavy straightedge, until depressions and
irregularities are worked out and surface is
true to finish grades and elev.s.
d. Remove excess water and debris worked to
surface in compacting and screeding.
e. At slabs to receive separate topping finish or
mortar setting beds, do not continue
tamping to raise mortar described above.
f. Remove laitance.
g. When concrete has hardened sufficiently,
float to a compact and smooth surface.
h. Provide finish surfaces shown on Drawings or
otherwise directed by Architect.
17. Except as otherwise directed by Architect or
called for in Contract Documents, cure and
protect concrete in accordance with pertinent
provisions of ACI 302.
18. At concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint, or
other finish, and which have been formed by oilcoated forms, scrub with a solution of 1-1/2 lbs
caustic soda to one gal of water.
19. On surfaces where smooth wood or waste
molds have been used, scrub with a solution of
20% muriatic acid or hydrochloric acid.
20. After surfaces have been scrubbed, wash with
clean water as soon as possible.
21. Defective concrete:
a. Following concrete will be deemed to be
defective, and shall be removed promptly
from job site.
(1) Concrete which is not formed as
indicated, is not true to intended
alignment, is not plumb or level where so
intended, is not true to intended grades
and levels;
(2) Has voids or honeycomb that have
been cut, resurfaced, or filled, except
with approval of Architect;
(3) Has sawdust, shavings, wood, or
embedded debris;
(4) Or does not conform fully to provisions
of Contract Documents.
b. Repairs and replacements:
(1) Defective concrete may be cut out and
repaired with gunite, or other approved
methods, when and as directed by
Architect.
(2) Where defective concrete is found after
removal of forms, cut out defective
concrete, if necessary, and make
surfaces match adjacent surfaces.
(3) Work uneven surfaces and angles of
concrete to
a surface matching
adjacent concrete surfaces.
22. After steel columns have been installed and
leveled, dry-pack space between bottom of
plate and concrete, using cement grout driven
in to completely fill space and forming a solid
bearing for column base plate.
23. Walls and curbs:
a. Construct header walls and curbs as shown
on Drawings.
b. Trowel exposed conc. surfaces smooth.
24. Leave openings in floor slabs and future
foundations for machines and equipment,
where so indicated on Drawings, and in
dimensions and arrangements required for
approved machines and equipment.
10/18/11
03375-1
03375 CONCRETE SEALING
A. General:
1. Use applicator currently approved in writing by
manufacturer of specified product.
2. Upon completion of work of this Section, and as
a condition of its acceptance, deliver to
Architect two copies of manufacturer's standard
written warranty, signed by an officer of
manufacturer's firm and cosigned by an officer
of applicator's firm, under which:
a. Surfaces to which product was applied are
warranted to remain waterproof, dustproof,
hardened, and abrasion resistant; and
b. Manufacturer agrees to provide materials
required to maintain such surfaces in
warranted condition for a period of twenty
years commencing on date on which
product was applied; and
c. Applicator agrees to provide labor and
equipment required to maintain such
surfaces in warranted condition for a period
of ten years commencing on date on which
material was applied; and
d. Warranted materials, labor, and equipment
will be provided at no additional cost to
Owner.
B. Products:
1. Provide "Ashford Formula" manufactured by
Curecrete Chemical Company, P. O. Box 735,
Orem, Utah 84057 (801) 489-5663 - (Calif. Rep.:
Bruce Silvers, (714) 855-3366).
C. Execution:
1. Preparation:
a. On freshly finished concrete surfaces, no
additional surface preparation is required.
b. On areas where forms are recently removed,
remove all form oil and breaking
compound residue to assure penetration of
product into surface.
c. On existing concrete, vertical surfaces, and
masonry surfaces:
(1) Sweep all areas to be treated, using fine
bristle broom, or hose off with water and
let dry to remove surface dust and dirt.
(2) Free surface from contaminants which
would inhibit penetration of product into
pores of material to be treated.
(3) Remove curing, sealing, and coating
agents
by use of chemical or
mechanical means as necessary.
(4) If acid is used to remove surface
coatings, flush surface with water
sufficiently to remove acid and acid
residue.
d. When applying near windows, mask glass.
e. Avoid contact with plant life, glass,
aluminum, and other finished surfaces.
Where contact occurs, immediately wipe
with damp cloth or flush with water.
f. Avoid contact with asphaltic concrete.
2. Application:
a. On freshly finished surfaces, spray product
with a low pressure sprayer immediately
following finishing operation.
(1) To assure proper curing, apply product
to entire surface as soon as surface is
firm enough to walk on, and before
checking and temperature cracking
begins.
(2) Keep entire surface wet for 30 minutes by
brooming excess product onto dry
spots, or by respraying dry spots
immediately.
(3) As product begins to dry into surface
and becomes slippery underfoot, lightly
sprinkle surface with water to aid
penetration and to bring alkali to
surface.
(4) As product again begins to dry into
surface and become slippery underfoot,
flush surface with water and squeegee
surface totally dry, removing all excess
product and alkali or other impurities
brought to surface.
b. On broom-finished surfaces, no flushing is
required, but squeegee or broom excess
product from surface after 30 to 40 minutes.
c. On cured concrete surfaces, saturate
surface with specified product.
(1) If dry spots appear, broom excess
material onto dry spots or respray them
immediately.
(2) Keep entire surface wet with product for
30 minutes.
(3) If, after 30 to 40 minutes, majority of
product has not been absorbed into
surface, broom or squeegee excess
product from low spots and puddles so
it will be absorbed into surface, or
remove such excess product from
surface.
(4) If, after 30 to 40 minutes, majority of
product is still on surface, wait until
surface becomes slippery underfoot and
then flush entire surface with clear water
and squeegee completely dry. If no
water is available, squeegee excess
product from surface after 30 minutes so
that surface is completely dry.
-
03400 -1
03400 PRECAST CONCRETE
A. General:
1. Submit Shop Drawings showing complete
information for fabrication and erection of
work of this Section including, but not
necessarily limited to:
a. Member dimensions and cross sections;
locations, size, and type of reinforcement,
including special reinforcement and lifting
devices necessary for handling and
erection;
b. Erection procedures, sequence of erection,
and required handling equipment;
c. Layout, dimensions, and identification of
each precast unit corresponding to
sequence and procedure of installation;
d. Welded connections, indicated by AWS
standard symbols;
e. Details of inserts, connections, and joints,
including accessories and construction at
openings in precast units;
f. Location and details of anchorage
devices that are to be embedded in other
construction.
2. Samples:
a. Accompanying above submittal, submit
precast Samples approximately 12" x 12" x
4", showing quality, texture, and color of
proposed finish.
b. When so requested by Architect, submit
Samples of cast-in gaskets, anchorages,
and other attachments and accessories.
c. Prior to start of installation, and after
Architect's review of finish Samples, submit
one full size Sample of each required
precast unit, delivered to job site.
Acceptable full size Samples may be
incorporated into construction.
d. Architect's review of Samples will be for
color, texture, and general condition only.
Compliance with all other requirements is
exclusive responsibility of Contractor.
3. Demonstrate manufacturer's capability to
make and provide specified quality products
by attestation of Prestressed Concrete Institute
under Plant Certification Program.
4. Deliver work of this Section to job site in such
quantities and at such times as to assure
continuity of construction.
5. Store units at job site in a manner to prevent
cracking, distortion, warping, staining, and
other physical damage, and in a manner to
keep markings visible.
6. Lift and support units only at designated lifting
points or supporting points as shown on
approved Shop Drawings.
B. Products:
1. Pertinent design as shown on Drawings is
considered satisfactory for cast-in-place
concrete, but does not provide for stresses
incurred in factory precasting, transporting,
and erecting.
2. Modification:
a. Provide complete design, calculations,
and drawings, as called for above.
b. Maintain general design concept as
shown, without decreasing or increasing
sizes of members and without altering
profiles and alignment,
except as
c. Make necessary provisions in design to
accommodate
stresses
to
be
encountered.
3. Standards:
a. Design in accordance with pertinent
recommendations contained in ACI 301,
ACI 304, ACI 347, CRSI "Manual of
Standard Practice," and PCI 116.
b. Comply
with
requirements
of
governmental
agencies
having
jurisdiction.
c. In event of conflict between or among
standards, more stringent provision shall
govern unless directed otherwise by
Architect.
4. Provide reinforcement, accessories, and
connection materials required in accordance
with final design as approved by Architect.
5. Standards:
a. Meet or exceed quality specified for similar
materials under other Sections of these
Specifications.
b. For materials not specified under other
Sections of these Specifications, but
required for a complete and proper
installation, provide new materials, first
quality of their respective kinds, as selected
by Contractor subject to approval of
Architect.
6. Concrete design mixes:
a. Prepare design mixes for each type of
concrete required, and secure Architect's
approval of proposed design mix.
b. Pay costs for securing design mix.
c. Have mixes prepared either by testing
agency selected by Owner or by qualified
precast concrete manufacturing personnel
d. Proportion mixes either by laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods, using
materials to be employed on Work for
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
each type of concrete required, and
complying with ACI 211.1.
e. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or
approved by Architect, design mix and
proportion concrete to attain a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 psi when
cured and tested at 28 days in
accordance with ASTM C39.
Fabricate work of this Section to shapes and
sizes indicated, and of texture matching
approved Samples.
Provide finished units which are straight, true to
size and shape, and within specified casting
tolerances.
Make exposed edges sharp, straight, and
square. Make flat surfaces into a true plane.
Warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained,
and otherwise defective units will not be
acceptable.
Place and secure in forms all anchors, clips,
stud bolts, inserts, lifting devices, shear ties,
and other devices required for handling and
installing precast units and for attachment of
subsequent items as indicated or specified.
Form cure work of this Section for a minimum
of 20 hours.
a. Keep wet continuously for not less than six
days after being removed from forms.
b. Following curing period, allow units to air
dry for at least four days before being
erected.
Maintain casting, bowing, warping, and
dimension
tolerance
within
following
maximums:
a. Overall dimension for height and width of
units: Plus zero of unit dimension to minus
3/32" for 10'-0" and over.
b. Make thickness of units plus or minus 1/8"
maximum.
c. Bowing or warping:
Do not exceed
1/360 of span.
d. Insert locations: Place within plus or minus
1/4" in each direction.
e. Opening
dimensions
to
figured
dimensions: Accurate within a tolerance
of plus 1/8" to minus zero.
C. Execution:
1. Coordinate as required with other trades to
Section.
2. Install work of this Section in strict accordance
with
original
design,
approved
Shop
Drawings,
pertinent
requirements
of
and manufacturer's recommended installation
procedures as approved by
Architect,
3.
4.
5.
6.
anchoring all components firmly into position
for long life under hard use.
Provide flexible bearing pads where indicated
on approved Shop Drawings. Set pads on
level and uniform bearing surfaces. Maintain
in correct position until all pre-cast units are in
place.
Welding: Comply with AWS D1.0 and D12.1,
including prequalification of welders.
Do not use powder actuated fasteners for
surface attachment of accessory items except
as specifically approved by Architect and
specifically accepted
by precast unit
manufacturer.
After precast units have been placed and
secured, grout open spaces at connections
and joints.
a. Use only grout system or systems
recommended by manufacturer of precast
units and approved by Architect.
b. Provide forms or other acceptable
method to retain grout in place until it is
sufficiently hard to support itself.
c. Pack spaces with stiff grout material,
tamping voids completely full. Place grout
in a manner to finish smooth, plumb, and
level with adjacent concrete surfaces.
d. Keep grouted surfaces damp for not less
than 24 hours after grout has taken its
initial set. Promptly remove grout material
from exposed surfaces before it hardens.
04220-1
04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. General:
1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and completely familiar with
specified requirements and methods needed for
proper performance of work of this Section.
2. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms that allow air circulation under stacked
units.
3. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use.
4. Contractor to verify conditions and dimensions
and report discrepancies to the engineer.
5. All work shall comply with the International
Building Code and all other local codes and
ordinances that apply.
6. All concrete shall develop a minimum
compressive strength of 2500 P.S.I. at 24 days.
Call for Building Department inspection prior to
pouring any concrete or grout.
Provide such field engineering services as are
required for proper completion of the Work
including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Structural design of shores, forms, and similar
items provided by the Contractor as part of
his means and methods of construction,
such as the temporary shoring of masonry
walls until lateral supporting elements (floors,
roofs, etc.) are in place.
B. Products
1. Provide hollow load-bearing concrete masonry
units complying with ASTM C90, grade N, type I
in color as specified on the drawings.
a. Provide units of dimensions shown on Drawings.
b. Where dimensions are not shown on Drawings, provide units having nominal face
dimensions of 16" long by 8" high by depth
shown or otherwise required.
c. Provide lightweight, medium weight, or
normal weight concrete masonry units as
required per plan with minimum compressive
strength as required per ASTM standards.
2. Provide accessory shapes as indicated or otherwise required.
3. Comply with following as minimums for reinforcement.
a. Bars: ASTM A615, (#4 bars and smaller, use
Grade 40 deformed; #5 bars and larger use
Grade 60 deformed).
b. Bending: ACI 318.
c. Wire reinforcement: ASTM A82.
d. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with
recommendations
contained
in
CRSI
"Manual of Standard Practice."
4. Mortar ingredients:
a. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150,
type I.
b. Lime:
(1) Provide hydrated lime complying with
ASTM C207 or quicklime complying with
ASTM C5.
(2) When quicklime is used, slake and then
screen through a 16 mesh sieve.
After
slaking and screening, but before using,
store and protect for not less than ten days.
c. Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust,
lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and
organic matter, and complying with ASTM
C144.
d. Do not use admixtures unless specifically
approved in advance by Architect.
e. Provide water free from deleterious amounts
of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.
5. Mortar mixing:
a. Provide mortar type "S" in accordance with
ASTM C270 with minimum compressive
strength of 1800 psi at 28 days, and in
proportions of one part portland cement to
1/2 part lime putty and 4 parts sand by
volume.
b. Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not
less than three minutes, using only sufficient
water to produce a mortar that is
spreadable and of a workable consistency.
c. Re-temper mortar with water as required to
maintain high plasticity.
(1) On mortar boards, re-temper only by
adding water within a basin formed with
mortar, and by working mortar into water.
(2) Discard and do not use mortar which is
unused after 1-1/2 hours following initial
mixing.
6. Grout ingredients:
a. Provide grout in accordance with ASTM
C476 with minimum compressive strength of
2000 psi at 28 days, and in proportions of
one part portland cement to 2 parts pea
gravel and 3 parts sand by volume.
b. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150,
type V.
c. Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate conforming to ASTM C33, free from
injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter.
d. Do not use admixtures unless specifically
10/18/11
04220-2
e. Provide water free from injurious amounts of
acids, alkalis, and organic materials.
7. Grout mixing:
a. Provide one part portland cement to three
parts maximum of damp loose sand to two
parts coarse aggregate, with sufficient water
to achieve fluid consistency.
b. "Fluid consistency" is interpreted as meaning
as fluid as possible for pouring intimately in
place without segregation.
6.
C. Execution:
7.
1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.
2. Protect masonry construction from direct
exposure to wind and sun when erected in
ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F in
shade, with relative humidity less than 50%.
3. General
a. Do not commence installation of work of this
Section until horizontal and vertical alignment of foundation is within 1" of plumb and
lines shown on Drawings.
b. Lay only dry masonry units.
c. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry
units.
d. Set units plumb, true to line, and with level
courses accurately spaced.
e. Clean top surface of foundation free from
dirt, debris, and laitance, and expose
aggregate prior to start of installing first
course.
f. Accurately fit units to plumbing, ducts,
openings, and other interfaces, neatly
patching all holes.
g. Keep walls continually clean, preventing
grout and mortar stains. If grout does run
over, clean immediately.
h. If work is stopped for one hour or longer,
provide horizontal construction joints by
stopping grout 1 1/2” below the top of the
block.
4. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, provide
running bond with vertical joints located at
center of masonry units in alternate course
below.
5. Do not use chipped or broken units. If such units
are discovered in finished wall, Architect may
require their immediate removal and replace-
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
ment with new units at no additional cost to
Owner.
Laying up:
a. Place units in mortar with full shoved bed
and head joints.
b. Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain
clear and unobstructed system of flues.
c. Hold racking to an absolute minimum.
d. Provide cleanouts at bottom of each cell of
hollow units for removing mortar droppings.
Do not close cleanouts until they have been
inspected and approved by Owner.
Reinforcement:
a. Provide reinforcement as shown on Drawings, fully embedded in grout and not in
mortar or mortar joints.
b. Provide required metal accessories to ensure
adequate alignment of steel during grout
filling operations.
c. Minimum lap for all steel is 40 bar diameters,
or 24 inches, whichever is greater.
d. Vertical cells containing reinforcement shall
be filled solidly with grout in lifts not
exceeding 48 inches.
Tooling:
a. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface.
b. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,
provide joints of "concave" pattern throughout.
Perform grouting in strict accordance with
provisions of governing building code.
a. Solidly fill vertical cells containing reinforcement, or as otherwise directed on the
Drawings.
b. Consolidate grout at time of pour by
puddling with a mechanical vibrator, filling
all
cells
of
masonry,
and
then
reconsolidating later by puddling before
plasticity is lost.
Inspection and adjustment:
a. Upon completion of work of this Section,
make a thorough inspection of installed
masonry and verify that units have been
installed in accordance with provisions of
this Section.
b. Make necessary adjustments.
Clean surfaces of masonry as required for
proper application of specified finishes.
Provide vertical construction joints at 20’ o.c.
and expansion joints at 100’ o.c.
10/18/11
04430-1
04430 SIMULATED STONE VENEER
A. General:
1. Prior to other work of this Section, prepare a
sample panel of work of this Section at a
location on site where approved by Architect.
2. Provide one mock-up panel for each
combination of stone and mortar used in
Work.
3. Make each mock-up panel approximately 3'0" x 4' -0".
4. Show method of bedding, grouting, cleaning,
and other aspects of work of this Section to
quality specified.
5. Make necessary adjustments in mock-up
panels and secure Architect's approval.
6. Mock-up
panels,
when approved
by
Architect, will be used as datum points for
comparison with remainder of installation of
work of this Section for purpose of
acceptance or rejection.
7. Upon approval of Architect, mock-ups may
be actual portions of finished work of Section.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B. Products:
1. Provide "Cultured Stone Veneer, Flat" and "Cultured Stone Veneer, Corners," in "Apache
Bronze" color, manufactured by Stucco Stone
Products, Inc., P. O. Box 237, Napa, California
94558 (707) 255-1727.
2. Other materials:
a. Portland cement:
Comply with ASTM
C150, type II, low alkali.
b. Sand: Comply with ASTM C144, with not
less than 5% passing the No. 100 sieve.
c. Water: Clean, potable, and free from
organic materials.
d. Hydrated lime: Comply with ASTM C207,
type S, unless otherwise specifically
e. Metal lath: Provide 3.4 lb self-furring metal
lath secured with galvanized furring nails.
f. Building paper: Provide 15 lb waterproof
felt under all metal lath, except building
paper may be omitted from substrates of
exterior portland cement plaster.
7.
C. Execution:
1. On unsealed and unpainted masonry and
concrete substrata, mortar may be applied
directly without a setting bed.
2. On wood, gypsumboard, and similar substrata, provide a setting bed consisting of
specified building paper, metal lath, and a
mixture of one part portland cement to three
8.
parts sand with 1/4 to 1/2 part lime, all solidly
anchored to structure as required by
Mortar:
a. Provide a mortar as specified for setting
bed above.
b. Mix with sufficient water to achieve a
mortar which, when first stone is applied,
will squeeze firmly out around all edges of
stone.
Spread mortar on back of stone, or on an
area of wall approximately two sq ft in size, or
on both.
a. If mortar is applied to back of stone, build
a cone with peak in approximate center.
b. Make sure that at least 1/2" of mortar exists
between stone and wall or setting bed.
Push stone firmly into place on wall, and
wiggle stone slightly to set bond. Push firmly
enough that mortar is squeezed out around
edges of stone.
General procedures:
a. Select stones by placing
in their
approximate arrangement on floor or
grade below wall surface to which they will
be applied, generally in areas of at least
eight sq ft.
b. When applying corners, apply corners first.
(1) Select corner pieces of varying
dimension.
(2) Alternate arrangement of "short side"
and "long side" of corner pieces.
c. When applying stone pieces with job-cut
edges, place cut edge down where below
eye level and up where above eye level.
d. Achieve uniform width of joints by
chipping and cutting stones to fit.
(1) In general, try to secure joints approximately 3/4" in width.
(2) Joints wider than 1-1/2" or narrower
than 1/2" will not be acceptable.
e. Achieve a uniform pattern of placement,
approximately balancing number of small
stones and large stones throughout exposed
area,
and
approximately
balancing dispersement of colors.
Tool joints between stones to a dense, smooth
surface which is completely weathertight and
in a uniform plane.
Upon completion of this portion of Work,
thoroughly hose down and clean all finished
surfaces, removing mortar, dirt, and other
foreign matter from surfaces upon which they
were not scheduled to be applied.
10/18/11
05120-1
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1. Except as may be modified on Drawings, comply with AISC "Specifications for Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings” and with Chapter 22 of the IBC.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide structural steel as shown on the
Drawings, specified herein, and needed for a
complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
include, but are not necessarily limited
to, General Conditions, Supplementary
2. Section 05500: Metal fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
01341.
B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the
Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to
Proceed, submit:
1. Producers' or manufacturers'
specifications and installation
recommendations for the following
products, including laboratory test
reports and other data required to
prove compliance with the specified
requirements.
a. Structural steel, including certified
copies of mill test reports covering
chemical and physical properties;
b. High strength bolts, including nuts
and washers;
c. Unfinished bolts and nuts;
d. Structural steel primer paint.
2. Shop Drawings including complete
details and schedules for fabrication
and shop assembly of members.
a. Include details of cuts, connections,
camber, holes, and other pertinent
data;
b. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and
show size, type, and length of weld;
c. Provide setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchor
bolts and other required anchors;
d. Identify details by reference to sheet
and detail number of the Drawings.
of this Section.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding
operators in accordance with AWS
"Standard Qualification Procedures."
01620.
B. Delivery and storage:
1. Deliver materials to the job site properly
marked to identify the location for which
they are intended.
2. Use markings corresponding to markings
shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
3. Store in a manner to maintain
identification and to prevent damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Rolled steel plates and bars: Comply with
ASTM A36.
B. Steel pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, type E or
S, grade B and, where applicable, API-5L,
grade B.
C. Steel tube: Comply with ASTM A501.
D. Anchor bolts: Comply with ASTM A307, nonheaded type with heavy hexagonal nuts
unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Unfinished threaded fasteners:
1. Comply with ASTM A307, grade A,
regular low carbon steel bolts and nuts.
2. Provide either hexagonal or square
heads and nuts; except use only
hexagonal units for exposed connections.
F.
High strength threaded fasteners: Provide
heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy
hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers, all
10/18/11
01421-2
from quenched and tempered medium
carbon steel complying with ASTM A325.
G. Primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer,"
"Rustoleum No. 5769 Primer," or equal
approved in advance by the Architect.
H. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS
Code, using AWS A5.l or A5.5 E70XX
electrodes.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabrication and assembly:
1. Fabricate items of structural steel in
accordance with AISC specifications,
and as indicated on the approved Shop
Drawings.
2. Properly mark and match-mark materials
for field assembly and for identification
as to location for which intended.
3. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will
expedite erection and minimize field
handling of materials.
4. Where finishing is required, complete the
assembly, including welding of units,
before start of finishing operations.
5. Provide finish surfaces of members
exposed in the final structure free from
markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections:
1. Provide bolts and washers of types and
sizes required for completion of field
erection.
2. High strength bolted construction:
a. Install high strength threaded
fasteners in accordance with AISC
"Specifications for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
b. Use A325N bolts unless noted
otherwise.
3. Welded construction: Comply with AWS
Code for procedures, appearance, and
quality of welds, and methods used in
correcting welded work.
4. Assemble and weld built-up sections by
methods which will produce true
alignment of axes without warp.
C. Holes for other work:
1. Provide holes required for securing other
work to structural steel framing, and for
passage of other work through steel
framing members, as shown on the
approved Shop Drawings.
2. Provide threaded nuts welded to
framing, and other specialty items as
shown, to receive other work.
3. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular
to metal surfaces.
4. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes
by burning.
5. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. General:
1. Shop paint structural steel work, except
those members or portions of members
to be embedded in concrete or mortar.
2. Paint embedded steel that is partially
exposed on the exposed portions, and
the initial 50 mm (2") of embedded
areas only.
3. Do not paint surfaces that are to be
welded or high-strength bolted with
friction type connections.
4. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces that
are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of the second
coat to distinguish it from the first.
B. Surface preparation:
1. After inspection and before shipping,
clean steelwork to be painted.
2. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and
spatter, slag, and flux deposits.
3. Clean steel in accordance with Steel
Structures Painting Council SP-3, "Power
Tool Cleaning."
C. Painting:
1. Immediately after surface preparation,
apply structural steel primer paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and at a rate to
provide a uniform dry film thickness.
2. Use painting methods that will result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
corrected.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Comply with AISC specifications and "Code
of Standard Practice," except as may be
modified herein.
B. Anchor bolts:
01421-3
1. Provide anchor bolts and other
connectors required for securing
structural steel to foundations and other
in-place work.
2. Provide templates and other devices
necessary for presetting bolts and
anchors to accurate locations.
2. Clean the bottom surface of base and
bearing plates.
3. Set loose and attached base plates and
bearing plates for structural members in
wedges or other adjusting devices.
4. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported
members have been positioned and
plumbed.
5. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with the edge of
the base or bearing plate prior to
packing with grout.
6. Pack grout solidly between bearing
surfaces and bases or plates to assure
that no voids remain.
7. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed
materials, and allow to cure in strict
compliance with the manufacturers'
recommendations.
C. Bases and bearing plates: Shop weld to
columns and members attached to
concrete.
D. Splicing:
1. Splice members only where indicated
unless, with the Architect's approval,
splices not indicated would result in
lower costs due to reduced shipping
expense.
2. For splices not indicated, submit
structural calculations prepared and
signed by a structural engineer licensed
to practice where the fabricator is
located.
E.
Gas cutting:
1. Do not use gas cutting torches for
correcting fabricating errors in the
structural framing.
2. Cutting will be permitted only in
secondary members as acceptable to
the Architect.
3. When gas cutting is permitted, finish the
gas cut section to a sheared
appearance acceptable to the Owner.
F.
Surveys:
1. Establish permanent benchmarks
necessary for accurate erection of
structural steel.
2. Check elevations of concrete surfaces,
and locations of anchor bolts and
similar items, before erection proceeds.
G. Temporary shoring and bracing:
1. Provide temporary shoring and bracing
members with connections of sufficient
strength to bear imposed loads.
2. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve
proper alignments of the structure as
erection proceeds.
3. Remove temporary connections and
members when permanent members are
in place and the final connections have
been made.
H. Setting bases and bearing plates:
1. Clean concrete bearing surfaces free
from bond-reducing materials, and then
roughen to improve bond to the surface.
I.
Field assembly:
1. Set structural frames accurately to the
lines and elevations indicated.
2. Align and adjust members forming part
of a complete frame or structure before
fastening permanently.
3. Clean the bearing surface, and other
surfaces that will be in permanent
contact, before assembly.
4. Adjust as required to compensate for
discrepancies in elevation and
alignment.
5. Level and plumb individual members of
the structure within specified AISC
tolerances.
6. Establish required leveling and plumbing
measurements on the mean operating
temperature of the structure, making
allowances for the difference between
temperature at time of erection and the
mean temperature at which the structure
will be when completed and in service.
7. Comply with AISC specifications for
bearing, adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and the
removal of paint on surfaces adjacent
to welds.
3.3 TESTING AND INSPECTING
A. Testing:
1. The Owner's selected testing laboratory
will pick up specimens and make
required tests.
2. Cost of procuring test specimens at
locations more than 50 miles from the
job site will be paid by the Owner and
back-charged to the Contractor.
3. Costs of tests of identified stock will be
paid by the Owner; except that if a test
fails to comply with the specified
01421-4
requirements, the cost of testing will be
paid by the Owner and back-charged
to the Contractor.
4. Costs of tests of unidentified stock will be
paid by the Owner and back-charged
to the Contractor.
2.
3.
B. Test specimens:
1. Test specimens shall be furnished by the
steel fabricator, and shall be taken
under the direction of the Owner's
selected testing laboratory.
2. Each specimen shall be machined by the
Owner's selected testing laboratory to
dimensions required by ASTM A370.
3. Cost of procuring, making, and
machining test specimens shall be
considered test costs as defined above.
C. Identification and tests:
1. If structural steel can be identified by
heat or melt numbers, and if
accompanied by mill analysis and test
reports, not less than one tension and
one bend test will be made for each
9000 kg (10 tons) or fractional part
thereof.
2. If structural steel cannot be identified, or
if its source is questionable, not less than
one tension test and one bend test will
be made for each 4500 kg (5 tons) or
fractional part thereof.
3. If steel pipe can be identified by heat or
melt numbers, or manufacturer's name,
not less than one tension test and one
bend test will be made for each ten tons
or fractional part thereof.
4. Additional tests may be required when
deemed necessary by the Architect.
D. Inspecting:
1. A complete four-sided inspection of steel
will be made when required by the
Architect.
2. Cost of inspection will be paid by the
Owner, subject to the same provisions
made above for tests.
3. If, after fabrication and inspection, the
work of this Section is found to be
defective and to require re-inspection,
cost of such re-inspection will be paid by
the Owner and back-charged to the
Contractor.
4. Provide labor, equipment, and facilities
needed to move and handle the
materials to be inspected.
E.
Welding inspection:
1. Unless otherwise specified, perform
welding under observation of a qualified
4.
5.
F.
inspector from a testing laboratory
approved by the Architect.
Inspect every layer of weld for quality,
penetration, and conformity with design
requirements.
Require the welding inspector to submit
a signed report to the Architect, verifying
that:
a. The welding is adequate and was
performed in conformity with the
specified requirements; and
b. Adequate methods have been used
to determine the quality of the
welding.
The welding inspector may use gamma
ray, magnaflux, trepanning, or any other
aid to visual inspection considered
necessary to assure adequacy of
welding, or may use ultrasonic testing
performed in accordance with pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies
Cost of welding inspection will be paid
by the Owner.
Access: Provide access for the testing
agencies and inspectors to places where
structural steel work is being fabricated or
produced, so that required testing and inspecting may be accomplished.
G. Erection inspecting:
1. The Owner's testing and inspecting
agency will inspect high strength bolted
connections, will visually inspect field
welded connections, will perform such
additional tests and inspections of field
work as are required by the Architect,
and will prepare test reports for the
Architect's review.
2. The testing agency will conduct and
interpret the tests, and will state in each
report whether the inspected work
complies with the requirements,
specifically stating all deviations therefrom.
H. Corrections:
1. Correct deficiencies in structural steel
work that inspections and test reports
indicate to be not in compliance with
the specified requirements.
2. Perform additional tests required to
reconfirm noncompliance of the original
work and to show compliance of
corrected work, all at no additional cost
to the Owner.
3.4 FIELD PAINTING
01421-5
A. General:
1. Prepare surfaces in a manner
appropriate to the condition, and as
2. Clean spots and surfaces where primer
coats have been removed, damaged,
or burned off, and clean field bolts and
other field connections not concealed in
the finished Work.
3. Remove dirt, oil, and grease.
4. Apply a spot coat of the approved
primer.
5. Do not apply paint to wet, damp, oily,
or improperly prepared surfaces.
B. Notify the Owner when the work of this
Section is ready to receive field painting.
1. Secure inspection and approval by the
Owner prior to field painting.
2. Using spray or brush, as recommended
by the manufacturer of the approved
paint material, fill all joints and corners
and cover the surfaces with a smooth
unbroken film of at least .037 dry mm
(1.5 dry mils) thickness.
END OF SECTION
05121-1
05121 WELDING REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Except as may be modified on Drawings,
comply with AISC "Specifications for Design,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings, and ANSI/AWS D1.1 “Structural
Welding Code – Steel."
2. Qualify welding processes and welding
operators in accordance with AWS “Structural
Welding Code – Steel”. All welding shall be
performed in accordance with a written
Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) as
required in ANSI/AWS D1.1 that is approved by
the Engineer.
3. Submit
producer’s
or
manufacturer’s
specifications and instructions for the following
products:
a. Welding electrodes (each type).
4. Submit copies of reports of tests conducted on
all shop and field welded connections.
Include data on type(s) of tests conducted
and test results.
5. Qualification Data:
a. Submit qualification data for firms and
persons performing the Work of this
Section to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience.
b. Submit Welding Procedure Specifications
(WPS) in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1
for all welded joints. Submit test reports
showing
successful
passage
of
qualification tests for all non-prequalified
WPS’s
c. Provide certification that welders to be
employed in work have satisfactorily
passed AWS qualification tests as specified
in Section 1.05-B.
B. Products:
1. Materials:
a. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with
AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code –
Steel” with a minimum Charpy V-notch
toughness of 20 ft-lbs at 0° F.
Electrodes
for
various
welding
processes shall be as specified below:
1. SMAW: E70XX low hydrogen
2. SAW: F7X-EXXX
3. GMAW: ER70S-X
4. FCAW: E7XT-X
b. Electrodes shall be compatible with
parent metal joined.
2. Welding:
a. Code: All shop and field welding shall
conform to all requirements in the
“Structural Welding Code – Steel”,
ANSI/AWS D1.1, as published by the
American Welding Society (AWS).
b. Welder Certification: All shop and field
welders shall be certified according to
AWS procedures for the welding
process and welding position used.
c. Welding Procedure Specification: All
welding
shall be performed in
accordance with a Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) as required in AWS
D1.1 and approved by the Owner’s
Testing
Laboratory
and
the
Architect/Engineer. The WPS variables
shall be within the parameters
established
by
the
filler-metal
manufacturer.
C. Execution:
1. Fabricate and erect in strict accordance with
approved Shop Drawings, referenced standards,
and
pertinent
requirements
of
2. Use fully welded joints for permanently
connecting structural components. Comply
with requirements for welded connections in
the WPS whether welding is performed in the
shop or in the field.
3. General Welding:
a. Weld corners and seams continuously
to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that
minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or
overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish
exposed welds and surfaces
smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and
contour
of
welded
surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
b. Form exposed work true to line and
level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges.
4. Steel Roof Deck Welding:
a. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for manual shielded metal
arc welding, appearance and quality
of welds, and methods used in
correcting welding work. Weld metal
10/18/11
shall penetrate all layers of deck
material at end laps and side joints
and shall have good fusion to the
supporting member. Welding washers
shall be used only when welding steel
deck less than 0.028” thickness. The
diameter of the puddle weld on the
supporting member shall be, at a
minimum, the diameter stated in the
specification but no less than 1/2 inch.
5. Testing:
a. The Testing Laboratory will be selected
by the Owner and approved by the
local jurisdiction. The laboratory will
meet ASTM E329-67T standards.
b. Cooperate
with
other
entities
performing quality control services.
c. Provide samples of materials and
design criteria as indicated and when
requested.
d. Provide other assistance, equipment,
tools,
and
storage facilities as
specified.
05500-1
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General:
1. Submit Shop Drawings showing fabrication,
installation, anchorage, and interface of work
of this Section with work of adjacent trades;
B. Products:
1. For items exposed to view, use materials which
are free from surface blemishes, pitting, rolled
trade names, and roughness.
2. Comply with following standards, as pertinent.
a. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36;
b. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed:
ASTM A283, grade C;
c. Steel tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A501;
d. Steel bars and bar-size shapes:
ASTM
A306, grade 65, or ASTM A36;
e. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108;
f. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets:
ASTM
A336;
g. Galvanized carbon steel sheets:
ASTM
A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525;
h. Stainless steel sheets: AISI type 302 or 304,
24 gage, with number 4 finish;
i. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10;
j. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47;
k. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule
40, black finish unless otherwise noted;
l. Concrete inserts:
(1) Threaded or wedge type galvanized
ferrous castings of malleable iron
complying with ASTM A27;
(2) Provide required bolts, shims, and
washers, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
3. Fasteners:
a. Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class
required for the particular use.
b. For exterior use and where built into
exterior walls, provide zinc-coated fasteners.
c. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head
regular type complying with ASTM A307,
grade A;
d. Lag bolts:
Provide square-head type
complying with Fed Spec FF-B-561;
e. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated
steel type complying with Fed Spec FF-S111;
f. Washers:
(1) Plain washers: Comply with Fed Spec FFW-92, round, carbon steel;
(2) Lock washers: Comply with Fed Spec FFW-84, helical spring type carbon steel;
g. Toggle bolts: Provide type, class, and style
needed but complying with Fed Spec FF-B588;
h. Anchorage devices: Provide expansion
shield complying with Fed Spec FF-S-325.
4. Shop paint:
a. Primer:
Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer" or
"Rustoleum Number 5769 Primer."
b. For repair of galvanizing, use high zinc-dust content paint complying with MIL-P21035.
5. Fabrication:
a. Except as otherwise shown on Drawings or
approved Shop Drawings, use materials of
size, thickness, and type required to
produce
reasonable
strength
and
durability in work of this Section.
b. Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces true to required lines and levels,
grinding exposed welds smooth and flush,
forming exposed connections with hairline
joints, and using concealed fasteners
wherever possible.
c. Prior to shop painting or priming, properly
clean metal surfaces as required for
applied finish and for proposed use of
item.
d. On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or
erection, apply two coats of specified
primer. Change color of second coat to
distinguish it from first.
C. Execution:
Section.
2. Installation:
a. Set work accurately into position, plumb,
level, true, and free from rack.
b. Anchor firmly into position.
c. Where field welding is required, comply
with AWS recommended procedures of
manual-shielded metal-arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and for
methods to be used in correcting welding
work.
d. Grind exposed welds smooth, and touchup shop prime coats.
e. Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces
which have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and which are intended for
bolted or screwed field connections.
f. Immediately after erection, clean field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
areas of shop priming. Paint exposed
areas with same material used for shop
priming.
3. Ladders:
a. Vertical steel ladders shall be fabricated
from 3/8"x 2 3/4" mild steel side rails with
3/4" round steel rungs with square ends
headed into rails, and the ends upset.
Rungs are to be spaced at not over 12"
on center. Ladders shall be anchored at
the bottom, top, and intermediate points
(not more than 5'-0" apart) with brackets
secured with 1/2" dia. bolts. Brackets are
to be of the same size as side rails and,
unless otherwise indicated hold the ladder
6" away from the wall. Ladders shall be a
minimum of 20" wide, and shall conform to
OSHA standards.
4. Handrails and Guardrails:
a. Handrails and guardrails shall be of
standard weight sizes and shapes as
indicated. Railings shall be flush type with
joints welded and ground smooth. Rails
are to be secured to concrete with flange
fittings and expansion bolts. Handrails
ends shall have the ends turned against
the adjacent walls. Vertical supports shall
be welded to specified channel stringers.
The bottom edges of vertical supports shall
be ground smooth and flush with top
flange of channel stringers. Include all
hangers, bolts, angles, brackets, and other
accessories
required
for
complete
assembly and installation. Metal pans for
stairs are to be 12 gauge.
06010-1
06010 LUMBER
A. General:
1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes
and regulations of governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically
directed or permitted by Architect, comply
with:
a. "Product Use Manual" of Western Wood
products Association for selection and use
of products included in that manual;
b. "Plywood Specification and Grade Guide"
of American Plywood Association;
c. "Standard Specifications for Grades of
California Redwood Lumber" of Redwood
Inspection Bureau for Redwood, when
used.
2. Protection:
a. Deliver materials to job site and store, in a
safe area, out of way of traffic, and
shored up off ground surface.
b. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and
store each grade separately from other
grades.
c. Protect metals with adequate waterproof
outer wrapping.
d. Use extreme care in off loading of lumber
to prevent damage, splitting, and
breaking of materials.
3. Grade stamps:
a. Identify framing lumber by grade stamp of
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, or
such other grade stamp as is approved in
advance by Architect.
b. Identify plywood as to species, grade, and
glue type by stamp of American Plywood
Association.
c. Identify other materials of this Section by
appropriate stamp of agency approved
B. Products:
1. Provide materials in quantities needed for
Work shown on Drawings, and meeting or
exceeding following standards of quality:
a. Horizontal framing members: Douglas Fir-Larch, per Section 06100.
b. Vertical framing members: Douglas FirLarch, per Section 06100.
c. Plywood:
(1) Sheathing: Structural II, C-C, exterior;
or standard sheathing with exterior
glue.
(2) Siding:
303 siding grade, exterior,
rough-sawn, 3/8" thick, Douglas Fir.
(3) Telephone backboard: 3/4" thick, A-D,
group 1, interior.
d. Closet shelving:
(1) Shelves 11-1/2" wide or less: Douglas
Fir-Hemlock, B and Better grade; or
Ponderosa Pine, B and Better grade.
(2) Shelves wider than 11-1/2": 3/4" thick,
A-D, group 1, interior plywood with
3/8" x 3/4" Douglas Fir or Pine bands
on visible edges.
e. Wood base:
Ponderosa Pine, "ranch
base," 9/16" x 3-1/4".
f. Building paper: Kraft paper complying
with Fed Spec UU-B-790a.
g. Wood preservative: Ammoniacal copper
arsenite, or 5% solution of pentachlorophenol.
h. Rough hardware:
(1) Steel items:
(a) Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36.
(b) Use galvanized at exterior locations.
(2) Machine bolts:
Comply with ASTM
A307.
(3) Lag bolts: Comply with Fed Spec FF-B561.
(4) Nails:
(a) Use common except as otherwise
noted;
(b) Comply with Fed Spec FF-N-l;
(c) Use
galvanized
at
exterior
locations.
(5) Joist hangers: Simpson, Teco, or equal
as approved by Architect.
C. Execution:
1. Stockpile materials sufficiently in advance of
need to assure their availability in a timely
manner for this Work.
2. Make as many trips to job site as are needed
to deliver materials of this Section in a timely
manner to ensure orderly progress of Work.
3. Compliance:
a. Do not permit materials not complying with
provisions of this Section to be brought
onto or to be stored at job site.
b. Promptly remove non-complying materials
from job site and replace with materials
meeting requirements of this Section.
10/18/11
06100-1
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. General
1. Work of this section is to include rough carpentry
and framing to complete the construction
according to the best practices of the trade.
Provide all necessary forms, shoring, bracing
and other temporary structural work to facilitate
the erection of both steel and wood framing
members. Provide all cutting and framing for
other trades, box around all flush wall and
ceiling fixtures, install all required wood cant
strips, gussets, saddles, crickets, nailing grounds
and all blocking required therefore, etc., in
connection with roofs and roofing: and furr
down all suspended ceilings for ducts as
indicated in the plans and framing sections;
provide blocking for wall mounted fixtures.
B. Products
1. All lumber shall be douglas fir No. 2 or better
unless noted otherwise, and shall be grade
marked in accordance with grading rules of the
West Coast Lumbermen's Association: Shall be
air dried at least 30 days, to a maximum
moisture content of 19% and, after delivery to
the job site, shall be piled off the ground in a
manner to insure drainage, ventilation and
protection from the weather, stacked to prevent
twisting. See also Section 06010.
2. Wood on concrete or masonry shall be pressure
treated douglas fir.
3. Unless otherwise noted all wall framing shall be
2x4 studs at 16" on center, but not to exceed 14'
high.
4. Any wall with plumbing fixture on one side to be
2x6 studs. Any wall with plumbing fixture on two
sides to be 2x8 stud.
5. All structural plywood and plywood sheathing
shall be as indicated on structural drawings.
Plywood shall conform to PS-1-74 and shall be
identified by a registered stamp or brand of the
"Teco" D.F.P.A. or Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory,
or APA. Moisture content shall not exceed 16%.
6. Builders rough hardware: All new materials, of
standard manufacturer. Made in U.S.A. Per
Section 06010
C. Execution:
1. Produce joints tight, true, and well nailed, with
members assembled in accordance with
Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.
2. Selection of lumber pieces:
a. Carefully select members.
b. Select individual pieces so that knots and
obvious defects will not interfere with placing
bolts or proper nailing, and will allow
making of proper connections.
c. Cut out and discard defects which render a
piece unable to serve its intended function.
d. Lumber may be rejected by Architect,
whether or not it has been installed, for
excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew,
fungus, or mold, and for improper cutting
and fitting.
3. Do not shim any framing component.
4. General framing:
a. In addition to framing operations normal to
fabrication and erection indicated on
Drawings, install wood blocking and
backing required for work of other trades.
b. Set horizontal and sloped members with
crown up.
c. Do not notch, cut, or bore members for
pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other
reasons except as shown on Drawings or as
specifically approved in advance by
Architect.
d. Window sills 8'-0" and over shall be doubled.
e. Lap all top plates 4'-0" minimum or as noted.
f. Install exterior door frames and jambs and
aluminum window frames, all to be plumb
and square.
g. All second story floor sheathing to be glued
and nailed to floor joists.
h. Run
all
roof
and
floor
sheathing
perpendicular to joists, stagger panel joints.
5. Bearings:
a. Make bearings full unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings. Headers may have 1 1/2"
bearing unless noted otherwise.
b. Finish bearing surfaces on which structural
members are to rest so as to give sure and
even support.
c. Where framing members slope, cut or notch
ends as required to give uniform bearing
surface.
6. Blocking and bridging:
a. Install blocking as required to support items
of finish and to cut off concealed draft
openings, both vertical and horizontal,
between ceiling and floor areas.
b. Fire blocks are required at the following
locations:
(1) In concealed spaces of stud walls and
partitions, including furred spaces at the
ceiling and floor levels and at 10’
intervals both vertically and horizontally.
(2) At
all
interconnections
between
concealed vertical and horizontal
10/18/11
06100-2
spaces such as occur at soffits, drop
ceilings and cove ceilings.
(3) In concealed spaces between stair
stringers at the top and bottom of the
run and between studs along and in line
with the run of stairs if the walls under the
stairs are unfinished.
(4) In openings around vents, pipes, ducts,
chimneys,
fireplaces
and
similar
openings which afford a passage for fire
at ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible materials.
b. Bridging:
(1) Install wood cross bridging (not less than
2" x 3" nominal), metal cross bridging of
equal strength, or solid blocking
between joists where span exceeds 8'-0".
(2) Provide maximum distance of 8'-0"
between line of bridging and bearing.
(3) Cross bridging may be omitted for roof
and ceiling joists where omission is
permitted by code, except where
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
(4) Install solid blocking between joists at
points of support and wherever
sheathing is discontinuous.
Blocking
may be omitted if joists are supported on
metal hangers.
7. On framing members to receive a finished
surface, align finish subsurface to vary not more
than 1/8" from plane of surfaces of adjacent
furring and framing members.
a. All exterior wood trim is to be finished on all
sides and ends prior to installation to
prevent wood rot, warping, cupping, etc.
8. Installation of plywood sheathing:
a. Place plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports and continuously over at
least two supports, except where otherwise
shown on Drawings.
b. Center joints accurately over supports, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
c. Protect plywood from moisture by use of
waterproof coverings until plywood in turn
has been covered with next succeeding
component or finish.
d. Each sheet of plywood shall contain a
minimum of 8 sq.ft. Stagger panel end joints
and allow 1/8" space at panels edges and
ends.
e. Provide edge nailing over all shear, bearing
and exterior walls, floor beams, struts, and
around all openings.
f. Shear walls are to run full height to underside
of floor or roof sheathing above.
9. Nailing:
a. Use only common wire nails or spikes of
dimension required by pertinent codes,
10.
11.
11.
12.
except where otherwise specifically noted on
Drawings.
b. For conditions not covered by codes, provide penetration into piece receiving point
of not less than 1/2 the length of nail or
spike, provided, however, that 16d nails
may be used to connect two pieces of 2"
(nominal) thickness.
c. Nail without splitting wood.
d. Prebore as required.
e. Remove split members and replace with
members complying with specified requirements.
Bolting:
a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than bolts
being used.
b. Drill straight and true from one side only.
c. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use
washers under head and nut where both
bear on wood, and use washers under all
nuts.
Screws:
a. For lag screws and wood screws, prebore
holes same diameter as root of threads,
enlarging holes to shank diameter for length
of shank.
b. Screw, do not drive, lag screws and wood
screws.
Soffits:
a. Provide soffits as required to conceal
sprinkler pipes, plumbing, electrical conduits,
ducts for heating system, and steel beams,
columns, and any projecting steel plates.
Trusses:
a. Each truss shall be legibly branded, marked,
or otherwise have permanently fixed thereto
the following information located within two
feet of the center of the span on the face of
the bottom chord:
(1) Identity of the company manufacturing
the truss.
(2) The design load.
(3) The spacing of the trusses.
10/18/11
06180-1
06180 GLUED-LAMINATED BEAMS
A. Products:
5. Cutting, notching, or drilling of glu-lams is to be
done only with the approval of the Structural
Engineer.
1. Deliver materials of this Section to job site in
unbroken wrappings with labels intact and
legible.
See
Section
01620
of
these
specifications.
B. Products:
1. Glu-lam members shall be fabricated by a
licensed fabricator per W.C.L.A., A.I.T.C., and
U.B.C. requirements.
2. Lumber species to be Douglas Fir 24F-V8
combination unless otherwise specified. Moisture
content to be per PS 56-73, finger-type scarf per
PS76-73, 1 1/2" laminations. Wet adhesive per
PS 56-73. Seal the ends of each beam.
3. Glued-laminated beams are to be inspected
during fabrication by an approved testing
laboratory. Each beam is to be stamped with
an identifying number. Beams are not to be
erected until Certification of Inspection from
testing lab has been approved by the building
department.
Fabricator shall provide a
certificate of inspection to the General
Contractor and the Architect.
4. Glu-lams shall be of Industrial appearance
where concealed, Architectural where exposed,
unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Do not
prime. See drawings for required camber.
Design of glu-lams shall conform to NER250.
5. Glu-lams shall be designed for dry conditions of
use - temperature of the timber in service is not
to exceed 150˚F.
6. Glu-lams to be exposed to the weather shall be
pressure-treated with an approved preservative
or be manufactured from wood with a natural
resistance to decay.
7. Design of exposed glu-lams shall conform to
UBC Sec. 2312. Each structural glued laminated beam shall be stamped with the AITC
quality control mark. Furnish AITC Certificate of
Conformance to the building department.
C. Execution:
with Shop Drawings and manufacturer's
recommendations as approved
by the
Architect.
2. Do not impose temporary construction loads
which cause stresses beyond design limits.
3. Erect bracing and bridging as required to
maintain units straight and plumb.
4. Assure adequate temporary lateral support until
finished design lateral support can be installed.
-
06195-1
06195 PREFABRICATED WOOD BEAMS AND JOISTS
A. General:
1. Deliver materials of this Section to job site in
bundles banded together for handling and
shipping.
B. Products:
1. Design is based on products of iLevel Trus
Joist, 101 Pacifica, Suite 300, Irvine, CA.
92618, (949) 743-1662, and nomenclature of
that manufacturer is used herein.
Equal
products of other manufacturers will be acceptable when approved by Architect.
2. Size and detail work of this Section to fit dimensions and loads indicated on Drawings.
3. Design in accordance with allowable values
and section properties assigned and approved by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
4. Provide "TJI" units, factory made with structural
grade plywood, "Micro=Lam" or machine
stress rated lumber flanges, and utilizing
waterproof type glues.
C. Execution:
with Shop Drawings and manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by Architect.
2. Do not impose temporary construction loads
which cause stresses beyond design limits.
3. Erect bracing and bridging as required to
maintain units straight and plumb.
4. Assure adequate lateral support until sheathing material has been applied.
10/18/11
06200-1
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
f.
A. General
1. Work of this Section is to include finish carpentry
and millwork, interior and exterior trim, doors,
cabinet work, finished openings and flashings.
Hang all doors including hardware, trim and
mouldings. Hand set at the building all trim,
cabinets, etc., and leave ready for painter's
work.
2. Comply with the manual of millwork, latest
edition, of the Woodwork Institute of California,
for the grades specified.
B. Products
1. See also Sections 06010 and 06400.
2. All interior finish woodwork shall be made of
thoroughly seasoned, straight-grained, kiln-dried
woods and shall be brought to the building in
perfectly dry conditions, free from imperfections,
and shall be adequately protected on the job.
All work shall be done by skilled mechanics in
the best and most workmanlike manner. All
finish hardware shall be mortised and fitted, then
removed until the painting has been completed,
at which time the hardware shall be reset and
adjusted.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C. Execution:
1. Produce joints that are true, tight, and well
nailed, with all members assembled in
accordance with Drawings.
2. Jointing and fastening:
a. Make joints to conceal shrinkage; miter
exterior joints; cope interior joints; miter or
scarf end-to-end joints.
b. Install trim in pieces as long as possible,
jointing only where solid support is obtained.
c. Install items straight, true, level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in place.
d. Where blocking or backing is required, coordinate as necessary with other trades to
ensure placement of required backing and
blocking in a timely manner.
e. Nail trim with finish nails of proper dimension
to hold member firmly in place without
splitting wood.
8.
Nail exterior trim with galvanized nails,
making joints to exclude water and setting in
waterproof glue or sealant described in
Section 07920 of these Specifications.
g. On exposed work, set nails for putty.
h. Screw, do not drive, wood screws; except
that screws may be started by driving and
then screwed home.
Install items in strict accordance with Drawings,
and recommended methods of manufacturer
as approved by Architect, anchoring firmly into
position at prescribed location, straight, plumb,
and level.
Sandpaper finished wood surfaces thoroughly
as required to produce uniformly smooth
surface, always sanding in direction of grain;
except do not sand wood which is designed to
be left rough.
No coarse grained sandpaper mark, hammer
mark, or other imperfection will be accepted.
Laminated plastic shall meet the standards of
the
National
Association
of
Electrical
Manufacturers, be .050" thick for horizontal
surfaces, and 1/32" thick for vertical surfaces. All
panels shall have backing sheets to assure
stability and moisture resistance.
Cleaning up:
a. Keep premises in a neat, safe, and orderly
condition at all times during execution of this
portion of Work, free from accumulation of
sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.
b. Sweeping:
(1) At end of each working day, and more
often if necessary, thoroughly sweep
surfaces where refuse from this portion of
Work has settled.
(2) Remove refuse to area of job site set
aside for its storage.
(3) Upon completion of this portion of Work,
thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.
Exterior trim
a. All exterior wood trim is to be finished on all
sides and ends prior to installation to
prevent wood rot, warping, cupping, etc.
10/18/11
06400-1
06400 ARCH. WOODWORK-"Laminated Plastic Cabinets"
A. General:
installation, anchorage, and interface of work
of this Section with work of adjacent trades, and
listing proposed finish hardware for cabinets;
2. Submit Samples of proposed materials.
having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent
recommendations of Woodwork Institute of
California or Architectural Woodwork Institute for
grades specified.
B. Products:
1. Fabricate architectural woodwork to "custom
grade" standards of referenced organization.
2. Finishes:
a. On exposed portions, provide Wilsonart
laminated plastic, or equal approved in
advance by Architect, in colors and patterns
selected by Architect from standard colors
and patterns of approved manufacturer.
b. On semi-exposed portions, provide manufacturer's
standard
cabinet
liner
as
approved by Architect. All shelves are to be
vinyl clad and edge banded.
3. Cabinets:
a. Fabricate cabinets in flush overlay design.
b. Provide finish hardware selected by Architect
from
standard
items
of
approved
subcontractor, and install at mill.
4. Countertops:
a. Types and sizes:
(1) Shop
fabricate
countertops
and
splashes to types and dimensions shown
on Drawings.
(2) Where splashes are called for, provide 4"
high coved splash and no-drip leading
edge.
b. Cover tops and splashes with Wilsonart
laminated plastic, or equal approved in
advance by Architect, in colors and patterns
and patterns of approved manufacturer.
5. Provide knob-type pulls and blume "hold-shut"
hinges.
3. Install
work
of
this
Section in strict accordance with approved Shop Drawings and
referenced standards, anchoring all items firmly
into position.
4. Compliance:
a. Owner reserves a right to request and pay
for an inspection to determine that work of
this Section has been performed in accordance with specified standards.
b. In event such inspection determines work of
this Section does not comply with specified
requirements, immediately remove noncomplying items and immediately replace
them with items complying with specified
requirements, all at no additional cost to
Owner, and reimburse Owner for cost of
inspections.
C. Execution:
1. Take necessary measurements in field to assure
proper dimensions for work of this Section.
2. Fabricate work of this Section in strict accordance with approved Shop Drawings and referenced standards.
-
07150-1
07150 Deck Surfacing
A. General:
1. Furnish and install deck surfacing as indicated
on the room finish schedule and as depicted on
the striping plan. Surfacing shall be Dex-O-Tex,
Mer-Kote, or other approved equal.
1.1 Scope: This specification covers the installation
of an decorative and durable, liquid applied,
abrasion resistant elastomeric urethane
waterproofing system suitable for surfaces
subject to pedestrian traffic.
1.2 Work Included: Install waterproofing consisting
of caulking and flashing for joints, Primer, Base
Coat, Intermediate Coat and Weather-Resistant
Top Coat. Apply in accordance with these
specifications and latest general instructions
supplied by the manufacturer.
1.3 Work Not Included: Work under this section shall
not include finishing and corrective work in
connection with surfaces to receive the liquid
applied coating systems. Nor does it include
furnishing and installation of metal flashing,
drains, vents, ducts, curbs or any other
penetration through the deck.
1.4 Condition of Concrete Surfaces:
a. Concrete surfaces shall be of sound structural
grade a minimum thickness of 2.5 inches, and
shall have a steel troweled followed by a fine
broom finish, free of fins, ridges, voids or air
entrained holes.
b. Concrete shall be cured by water curing
method. Curing compounds or chemical curing
agents of any type shall not be used unless they
will completely dissipate within 28 days.
c. Concrete shall be cured at least 28 days and
shall be sloped for proper drainage.
d. Saw-cut control joints and/or expansion joints
shall have been properly installed at strategic
points throughout the field of the deck to
control cracking caused by deflection and
shrinkage.
e. Any required crickets or drains should be
installed at the time the main deck is poured (i.e.
monolithic).
f. Voids, rock pockets and excessively rough
surfaces shall be repaired with Epoxy grout or
ground to match the un-repaired areas.
g. When metal decking is used as the concrete
form, it shall be of the “ventilating type”.
1.5 Condition of Plywood Surfaces:
a. The plywood shall be identified as
conforming to U.S. Product Standard PS-166
and shall be 3/4 inch minimum thickness ,
tongue and groove, exterior grade B/C, or
better.
b. Plywood panels shall be tightly butted with
1/16" spacing between adjoining panels.
c. Plywood shall be nailed with non-corroding
10d annular ring or twist shank nails spaced 6
inches on center along panel edges.
d. All decks shall be designed to eliminate
vertical deflection by the proper selection of
plywood thickness and the proper spacing and
thickness of the supporting joists.
e. All plywood edges must be supported on
blocking or primary framing with wood panels
continuous across two or more spans.
f. All adjacent metal flashing, scuppers, vents,
etc. shall be galvanized or non-ferrous metal
tightly screwed, or nailed with ring shank nails, at
intervals no greater than 4 inches on center.
g. The plywood deck shall be properly sloped
so as to drain freely.
1.6 Job Conditions:
a. Before any waterproofing work is started, the
waterproofing applicator shall thoroughly
examine all surfaces for any deficiencies. Should
any deficiencies exist, the architect, owner or
general contractor shall be notified in writing
and corrections made.
b. Do not proceed with application of materials
when deck temperature is less than 40°F or if
precipitation is imminent.
c. Warn personnel against breathing of vapors
and contact of material with skin or eyes. In
confined areas, workmen shall wear approved
respiratory protection gear and protective
clothing.
d. All gas flames and electrical apparatus shall
be shut down prior to the start of and during
coating applications.
e. Protect plants, vegetation and animals that
might be affected by the coating operation.
10/18/11
07150-2
B. Products:
5. Walking surfaces to comply with ASTM C1028; a
static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for level
surfaces and 0.8 for ramps.
2.1 Authorized Applicator:
C. Execution:
2.11 Shall be experienced in successfully
applying the same or similar materials and shall
be specifically approved as an authorized
applicator in writing by the manufacturer.
2.12 Shall be financially responsible and be
ready and able to submit performance bonds if
required.
2.13 Shall submit to the manufacturer and the
building owner the required certificates of
insurance prior to starting the project.
2.14 Samples Submittals: Submit samples not less
than 4" x 3" in size, showing approximate
applied thickness, texture and color. The
submittal shall also include this
application/specification sheet and a list of
materials by name and quantity to be used in
this project in order to demonstrate compliance
with these specifications
.
2.2. MATERIALS
Materials shall be delivered to the job site in the
original sealed containers bearing the product
name, color, manufacturer’s lot number, directions
for use and precautionary labels.
a. Caulking Compound shall be a compound
approved by the manufacturer.
b. Flashing shall be Neoprene sheet at 45-60 mils
thickness, non-woven reinforcing fabric, or as
recommended by coatings supplier.
c. Primer, membranes, slip sheet and top coat
shall be as per manufacturers standards.
d. Aggregate shall be equal to 16 and 20 mesh
flint shot silica, ground glass or silicon carbide.
Aggregate shall be hard and stable to
atmospheric conditions and shall be fresh water
washed, dried and sized.
3. Provide
other
materials
not
specifically
subject to approval of Owner.
4. Submit samples, meeting above specifications,
to owner for color selection.
4.1 Concrete Surfaces:
a. The concrete surface must be thoroughly
clean, dry and free from any surface
contaminants or cleaning residue. Acceptable
methods of cleaning are sandblasting, acid
etching, or mechanical grinding followed by the
complete and thorough removal of any residue.
b. All cracks over 1/16" in width and all moving
cracks under 1/16" in width shall be routed out
to 1/4" minimum in width and depth and filled
flush with polyurethane elastomeric sealant.
c. All cracks shall be stripe-coated with 30 mils of
Base Coat for a distance of 2 inches on either
side of the crack.
d. Apply a 2 inch face coat stripe of Base Coat
around all pipes, drains and vertical junctions.
e. All expansion and contraction joints shall be
cleaned, primed, fitted with a backing rod and
caulked with elastomeric polyurethane sealants.
Joints and all caulked cracks shall be stripecoated with a 30 mil preparatory coat Base
Coat.
f. Prior to commencing with the application, all
surfaces to be coated shall be dry and free from
any surface contaminants or cleaning residues.
4.2 Plywood Surfaces:
a. Sweep all plywood joints clean and free of
sawdust. Fill all separations over 1/16" in width
with polyurethane sealants. Apply joint
reinforcement consisting of a brush coat of
Intermediate Coat 30 mils thick, 5" wide
centered over all joints and transitions to metal
flashings, drip edges, etc. Imbed reinforcing
tape into the wet material. Allow to cure
overnight or until firm.
b. Damaged plywood panels shall be repaired
or replaced prior to coating.
4.3 Flashing:
a. All required metal, neoprene, and fabric
flashings shall be installed at this time.
10/18/11
07150-3
b. All shop-primed metal shall be primed prior to
coating with the flashing adhesive or base
membrane. (For metal or plastic surfaces which
may exhibit adhesion difficulties, use a zinc
chromate epoxy primer.
c. The flashing fabric shall be laid into the wet
base membrane with roller, brush or broad
blade knife. The fabric shall be laid relaxed,
smooth and wrinkle-free.
d. The wet imbedded tape shall be over-coated
with base membrane extending at least one
inch beyond the fabric edge. Allow to cure
overnight.
e. Flashing shall be coated (with base coats
and top coats) each time the deck is coated.
5. APPLICATION OF MEMBRANE
a. The waterproofing applicator shall have sole
right of access to the specified areas for the time
needed to complete the application and affect
an adequate cure.
b. Apply primer. Membranes and all other coats
per manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. CURING TIME
The completed coating system shall not be
subject to any light pedestrian traffic during the
first 24 hours after application is complete nor to
any heavy pedestrian traffic during the first four
days after application of the final coat. If the
work of the applicator has not been approved
by the prime contractor during the first four days
after application is complete, then there shall be
no traffic of any type allowed until such
acceptance and approval is given.
7. No other trades and/or personnel other than
those working on the installation of the deck
shall be permitted in the area of application
from the start of the work. Only a subcontractor
specifically trained and approved by the
manufacturer is to install this decking material.
8. In addition to cleaning requirements stated
elsewhere, thoroughly clean flooring and adjacent surfaces prior to final acceptance of
decking areas by Owner.
9. Provide a heavy non-staining paper or plastic
walkway as required over flooring in direction of
traffic, maintaining intact until decking has been
accepted by Owner.
10/18/11
07175-1
07175 WATER REPELLENT COATING
A. General:
a condition of its acceptance, deliver to Owner
two copies of a written warranty signed by
Contractor, water repellent coating application
subcontractor, and water repellent coating
manufacturer, under which:
a. The three parties mutually agree to maintain
water repellent coated surface free from
penetration of water for a period of two
years following Date of Substantial Completion; and
b. Water repellent coating manufacturer
agrees to provide water repellent coating
materials as required for that purpose for a
period of five years following Date of Substantial Completion; and
c. These warranty services will be provided at
no additional cost to Owner.
c. Run water onto wall at full available force
for not less than four hours.
d. Upon completion of four-hour period,
inspect interior surfaces of wall for evidence
of moisture penetration.
e. If moisture penetration evidence is discovered, apply additional coat of approved
water repellent to exterior surface in areas
directed by Owner, repeating application
and testing (at no additional cost to Owner)
until no evidence of moisture penetration is
found.
B. Products:
1. At masonry, stucco, and/or concrete walls
separating interior spaces from exterior, provide
one of the following products (or equal); clear
water repellent coating approved in advance
by Architect.
a. One coat of "Rainguard Blok-Lok" water
repellent
coating
manufactured
by
Rainguard Products Company, 3334 E.
Coast Hwy No. 201, Corona Del Mar, CA
92625 (888) 765-7070.
b. Other suitable products approved in
advance by the Architect.
C. Execution:
1. Apply sufficient coats of approved material to
achieve consistent and uniform appearance,
free from runs and sags, and with a uniformly
resistive surface which will prevent penetration of
water through walls for required period of
warranty.
2. Twenty days after completion of this portion of
Work, and as a condition of its acceptance,
demonstrate by running water test that work of
this Section will successfully repel water.
a. Notify Owner at least 72 hours in advance,
and conduct test in Owner's presence.
b. By means of an outrigger, or similar acceptable equipment, place nozzle of a 3/4"
garden hose at a point approximately 10'-0"
away from top of wall where approved by
Owner, aiming nozzle at a slight downward
angle to direct full stream of water onto wall.
10/18/11
07210-1
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
A. General:
1. Upon completion of this portion of Work,
complete and post a certificate of insulation
compliance in accordance with pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
B. Products:
1. Provide following building insulation where
shown on Drawings or otherwise needed to
achieve degree of insulation required under
pertinent regulations of governmental agencies
a. Type A: 6" thick glass fiber batts with vapor
barrier and an insulation-only value of R-19.
b. Type B: 14" thick glass fiber batts with vapor
barrier and an insulation-only value of R-38.
c. Type C: 3-1/2" thick unfaced glass fiber
sound isolating batts.
C. Execution:
1. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction framing that may damage or prevent
proper insulation.
with
original
design,
requirements
of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
manufacturer's
recommended
installation
procedures as approved by Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position.
3. Install insulating batts in stud spaces and
wherever else shown on drawings. Fit blankets
tightly against adjoining frames, avoid gaps or
bridges in insulation. Where necessary, cut and
fit snugly around pipes, conduits and outlet
boxes and ducts, taking care to maintain
continuous insulation over entire wall or ceiling
surface.
10/18/11
07241-1
07241 ARCHITECTURAL FOAM SHAPES
and supervision on job site to install
Pre-coated Foam Shapes System in
compliance with Contract
Documents and manufacturer's
specifications and
recommendations.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. System consists of adhesive and/or
mechanical attachment and premanufactured Pre-coated Foam Shapes
consisting of; precut foam insulation core
shapes; reinforcing mesh; and lightweight
polymer-modified flexible cementitious coating.
1.02 DESIGN LIMITATIONS
A. Maximum allowable substrate system
deflection, normal to plane of wall: L/240.
B. Details shall conform with manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall be consistent
with Project requirements. Consult with
manufacturer when special non-standard
shapes or conditions arise. Expansion and
control joints are required in system where
they exist in substrate, and where system
adjoins dissimilar construction. Specify
sealant in appropriate Section. Provide
control joints at 12.2 m (40 inches) o/c
maximum.
C. Terminate Pre-coated Foam Shapes System at
expansion joints. Sealant shall be detailed
and installed. Refer to typical details.
A. Pre-coated Foam Shapes System
Manufacturer Requirements:
1. Member in good standing of EIMA
(EIFS Industry Members Association)
and EIFS Council of Canada.
2. Pre-coated Foam Shapes System
manufacturer for a minimum of 3 years.
B. Contractor Requirements:
1. Be knowledgeable in proper
installation of Pre-coated Foam
Shapes System.
2. Provide proper equipment, workers
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials supplied by system
manufacturer in original, unopened and
undamaged packaging with legible
manufacturer's identification and labels
intact.
B. Store products supplied by system
manufacturer in a cool, dry place protected
from direct sunlight, weather and other
damage. Store all wet materials at a
temperature of not less than 4.4 degrees
Celsius (40 degrees F) at all times.
C. Make available material safety data sheets
(MSDS) for adhesives and joint compounds.
1.05 PROJECT
A. Weather and Environmental Conditions:
1. Do not apply adhesive and joint
compound materials during inclement
weather unless appropriate protection is
provided. Provide protection until fully
cured.
2. Install adhesive and joint compound
materials at an ambient temperature of
4.4 degrees Celsius (40 degrees F) and
rising and maintain for a minimum of 24
hours after application.
3. Provide supplemental heat for
applications when temperature is less
than 4.4 degrees Celsius (40 degrees F).
Provide sufficient ventilation and time to
ensure that materials have sufficiently
cured prior to removing supplemental
heat.
4. Provide flashings as necessary and
required.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Note: Work in this section requires close
10/18/11
07241-2
coordination with related Sections.
A. Cover Pre-coated Foam Shapes
immediately with Finish Coating to prevent
water infiltration behind system. Install Finish
Coating as soon as possible after Precoated Foam Shapes installation.
B. Install sealants in a timely manner. Protect
open joints from water intrusion during
construction with backer rod, or temporary
covering, until permanently sealed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Pre-coated Foam Shapes System:
Manufactured by VEFO INC., 3970 W. Valley
Boulevard, Unit D, Walnut, CA 91789-1529
Phone: (909) 598-3856, Fax: (909) 5981491., or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS - PRECOATED FOAM SHAPE SYSTEM
A. Adhesive (for use over cementitious systems
such as; EIFS systems (base coat); limestone,
pre-cast concrete, brick, and concrete
block): to be compatible with insulation
board, substrate, and reinforcing mesh.
B. Insulation core: Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)
conforming to physical properties of ASTM C
578. Type I
C. Reinforcing Mesh: balanced, open weave
glass fiber fabric.
D. COATING: lightweight polymer-modified
flexible cementitious coating, pressure
applied coating by extrusion process in a
climate-controlled factory.
E.
Mechanical fasteners: zinc plated, type as
recommended by system manufacturer.
F.
Galvanized steel - as specified in ASTM A 526
Z275 (G90) minimum coating classification.
G. Mitered Joint Compound: as approved by
manufacturer.
2.03 MATERIALS - OTHER MANUFACTURERS
A. Finish Coat: type, color, and texture as
selected by owner/consultant and
approved for use over Pre-coated Foam
Shapes by manufacturer.
B. Sealant: Comply with EIMA 300.01.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTRATE
A. Substrate shall be of a type approved by of
Pre-coated Foam Shapes System
manufacturer.
B. Substrate shall be dry and free of dust, dirt,
loose cement, any other non-cementitious
surface contamination, and compatible with
adhesive.
C. Substrate shall be free of planar irregularities
greater than 6.4 mm (1/4-in.) in 2.4 m (8
inch-0 inch) and shall be sound and free of
foreign substances.
D. Report unsatisfactory conditions to
Contractor for correction by substrate
installer before application of system.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Adhesive and joint compound: Re-mix as
received from manufacturer prior to
beginning application. Add clean potable
water and mix in accordance with package
instructions.
B. Pre-coated Foam Shapes System Backwrapping:
1. Back-wrapping installation procedure:
Peel mesh on back face of Pre-coated
Foam Shapes along entire length and
fold over on each side and extend
above and below Pre-coated Foam
Shape on to substrate.
2. Non-back-wrapping installation
procedure: Cut and remove mesh
completely from back face of Pre-coated
Foam Shapes along entire length.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Method of Attachment of Precoated Foam Shapes System: Adhesively
and/or mechanically fastened, as specified.
10/18/11
07241-3
B. Adhesive Method: Apply adhesive to entire
back surface of Pre-coated Foam Shapes
using a 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) notched trowel.
Immediately install Pre-coated Foam Shapes
while adhesive is wet. Larger Pre-coated
Foam Shapes require temporary support
systems or mechanical fasteners until
adhesive sets.
C. Adhesive and Mechanical Fastener Method:
1. Apply adhesive in accordance with
Section 3.03.B. 2. Install mechanical
fasteners in accordance with system
manufacturer's current published instructions.
D. At joints between Pre-coated Foam Shapes:
1. Miter joints for a proper tight fit, at 45
degree angle. 2. Apply mitered joint
compound to entire joint surface. After
Mitered Joint Compound has dried, cover
joint with reinforcing mesh and an mitered
joint adhesive and after adhesive has set,
sand down to achieve a smooth and even
finish. 3. Apply adhesive to entire joint
surface between Pre-coated Foam Shapes
using a 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) notched trowel.
Immediately butt together and install Precoated Foam Shapes while adhesive is wet.
Wipe away excess adhesive.
E.
APPLYING FINISH 1. After curing of Precoated Foam Shapes System, remove
temporary supports and begin treating Precoated Foam Shapes System with finish coat
systems in accordance with finish coat
system manufacturer's recommendations. 2.
Apply finish coat over coating in
accordance with finish manufacturer's
current published instructions. 3. Specify
texture and color of finish in accordance
with approved sample. All mechanics
applying and texturing finish shall utilize
same tools, equipment and techniques to
achieve uniformity.
END OF SECTION
10/18/11
07322 -1
07322 CONCRETE ROOFING TILES
A. Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide standard weight extruded concrete
roofing tiles with accessory tiles to match,
manufactured by Monier-Life-Tile Concrete Tile
Company, or an equal approved by Architect,
in color and style as specified on elevations.
Provide a good grade of mortar conforming to
recommendations of manufacturer of approved roofing tile, mixed with pigment to
produce color-matching color of approved
roofing tiles.
Batten boards:
Provide 1" x 2" (nominal)
Redwood or treated moisture-resistant Douglas
Fir.
Nails and fasteners:
a. For individual tile units, provide corrosion resistant galvanized, copper, or stainless
steel nails of sufficient length to hold tiles in
place and to penetrate roof sheathing at
least 3/4".
b. For ridge and hip tiles, provide corrosion resistant 14 gage wire laced through holes
and securely anchored to nail heads in
sheathing; or provide at least 6" long "straw"
nails.
Under entire roofing tiles installation, provide
two layers 40 lb. Organic felt, nailed where pitch
exceeds 3:12, hot mopped where pitch is less
than 3:12 to provide a permanent barrier to
passage of water.
B. Execution:
Coordinate schedule for installation of roofing
tiles with schedule for installation of roof deck so
lumber in roof deck will have minimum practicable exposure to weather.
2. Install membrane using cold-process roofing
cement specifically recommended for purpose
by manufacturer of membrane, and approved
by Architect.
3. Install batten boards spaced to provide 3"
headlap of the roofing tiles, adequately endspaced to allow drainage. Take special care to
prevent damage to membrane.
4. Install roofing tiles in strict compliance with
recommendations of manufacturer as approved by Architect.
Finish roofing tiles
installation as a completely weatherproof and
waterproof system requiring no further normal
maintenance.
1.
10/18/11
07521-1
07521 CAP SHEET ROOFING
A. General:
a condition of its acceptance, deliver to
Architect a letter signed by an authorized
representative of manufacturer of approved
roofing system stating that inspections required
under subparagraph 1.3 below were performed
and that materials and work of this Section meet
specified requirements.
2. Use a subcontractor approved in writing by
manufacturer of approved roofing system.
3. Arrange for, pay all costs for, and secure a
minimum of four physical inspections:
a. Conducted during and after installation of
work of this Section;
b. Performed by a designated and properly
qualified representative of manufacturer of
approved roofing system;
c. Verifying that materials and work of this
Section meet specified requirements.
B. Products:
1. Provide only such asphalt as meets or exceeds
requirements of ASTM D312, Type II, III, or IV as
appropriate to slope, and as approved by
manufacturer of roofing systems selected for this
Work.
2. Where cap sheet roofing over wood or
plywood deck is called for on Drawings,
provide I-0-3-M GAF system consisting of the
following per 100 sq. ft. of roof area (or equal):
a. One layer 25 lb. fiberglass base felt, nailed.
b. Two layers 11 lb. fiberglass building felts, hot
mopped.
c. One layer 75 lb. Fiberglass cap sheet.
3. Where shown on the Drawings or otherwise
required for access to roof-mounted equipment,
provide walkable panels (or equal), spot
cemented to roofing surface.
4. Provide perlite composition strips (or equal)
where indicated on Drawings and at other
locations
where
so
recommended
by
manufacturer.
5. Use nails, fasteners, 1” tin cap nails, and/or tape
and staple system as appropriate to deck and
in quantity and type approved by Factory
Mutual.
on methods, equipment, and personnel to be
used.
2. Verify that substrata are dry, smooth, clean, and
free from sharp projections and depressions,
properly graded to outlets, and that metal
fittings are in proper place prior to start of
roofing installation.
with pertinent requirements of governmental
agencies having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's recommendations as approved by
Architect.
a. Except under adverse weather conditions,
install not less than 6,000 sq. ft. of
completed roofing per working day.
b. Work only during predictably good dry
weather, and with minimum wind conditions.
c. Do not attempt to perform more work in one
day than can be sealed off that night using
“water stops.”
4. During progress of work of this Section, make
visual inspections as necessary, and verify that:
a. All materials used comply with specified
requirements;
b. All materials are properly stored and handled;
c. Bitumen kettles are maintained at proper
temperature;
d. Bitumens are applied uniformly, without
voids or skips, and in proper quantity;
e. Proper number and types of plies are installed, with specified overlaps;
f. Proper number, type, and spacing of
fasteners are used;
g. Associated flashings and sheet metal are
installed in a timely manner in accordance
with specified requirements;
h. All elements of work of this Section are
completed on same day and not installed in
phases.
C. Execution:
1. Prior to start of installation, conduct a preroofing
meeting
attended
by Architect,
Contractor, a qualified representative of
manufacturer of approved roofing system, and
roofing subcontractor, and reach agreement
10/18/11
07600-1
07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
A. General:
and
regulations,
comply
with
pertinent
recommendations contained in current edition
of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published
by Sheet Metal and Airconditioning Contractors
National Association (SMACNA).
2. Standard commercial items may be used for
flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposes
provided such items meet or exceed specified
quality standards.
5.
6.
B. Products:
1. Where sheet metal is required, and no material
or gage is indicated on Drawings, provide
highest quality and gage commensurate with
referenced standards.
2. Provide sheet metal or sheet iron of standard
brand of open-hearth copper-bearing steel,
copper-molybdenum iron, or pure iron sheets.
3. Galvanizing:
a. Where galvanizing is required, provide zinc
coating by hot-dip galvanize to all surfaces.
b. Provide not less than 1-1/4 oz per sq ft, nor
more than 1-1/2 oz per sq ft, to surfaces
required to be galvanized.
c. Comply with ASTM A123-84.
4. Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistive
coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium plated
screws and washers in connection with
galvanized iron and steel.
5. Where flux is required, use raw muriatic acid.
6. Where solder is required, comply with ASTM B32.
7.
8.
C. Execution:
1. Form sheet metal accurately and to dimensions
and shapes required, finishing molded and
broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight
lines and angles and, where intercepting other
members, coping to an accurate fit and
soldering securely.
2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by
Architect, turn exposed edges back 1/2".
3. Form, fabricate, and install sheet metal so as to
adequately provide for expansion and
contraction in the finished Work.
4. Weatherproofing:
a. Finish watertight and weathertight where so
required.
b. Make lock seam work flat and true to line,
sweating full of solder.
c. Make lock seams and lap seams, when
soldered, at least 1/2" wide.
9.
d. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap
according to pitch, but in no case less than
3".
e. Make flat and lap seams in direction of flow.
Joints:
a. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws
where necessary for strength and stiffness.
b. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints
for runs of more than 40'-0", except where
closer spacing is indicated on Drawings or
required for proper installation.
Nailing:
a. Whenever possible, secure metal by means
of clips or cleats, without nailing through
exterior metal.
b. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws
not more than 8" apart and, where exposed
to weather, use lead washers.
c. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing
nails 1-1/4" long by 11 gage.
d. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.
Embed metal in connection with roofs in a solid
bed of sealant, using materials and methods
described in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and methods
Soldering:
a. Thoroughly clean and tin joint materials prior
to soldering.
b. Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated
copper, in order to heat seams thoroughly
and to completely fill them with solder.
c. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering
copper of blunt design, properly tinned for
use.
d. Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces
neat, full flowing, and smooth.
e. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux
with a soda solution.
Upon request of Owner, demonstrate by hose or
standing water that flashing and sheet metal are
completely watertight.
-
07620-1
07620 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 — GENERAL
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated
with water-borne preservatives for above ground
use, complying with AWPB LP-2; not less than 1-1/2"
thick.
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work
of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers galvanized iron roofing
specialties and accessories of standard
manufactured components. It includes accessories
installed on and in roofing other than mechanical
and structural items, such as:
Factory-manufactured curbset wall flashing and
expansion joints.
B. Factory-manufactured gutters and downspouts
(rain drainage).
C. Factory-manufactured miscellaneous sheet metal
trim and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with
Conditions of Contract and Division-1 Specification
Sections.
1. Product data, Specialties, and Accessories:
Manufacturer's technical product data,
installation instructions and general
recommendations for each specified sheet
material and fabricated product.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing
and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance
and durability of work and protection of materials
and finishes.
B. Solder: As required by manufacturer.
C. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or
other non-corrosive metal as recommended by
sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads
with material being fastened.
D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type
bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur,
compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening,
non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.
F. Sheet metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal
clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work,
matching or compatible with material being
installed, noncorrosive, size and gauge required for
performance.
G. Gutter and Conductor-Head Guards: 20-gauge
bronze mesh or fabricated units, with selvaged
edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Select materials
for compatibility with gutters and downspouts.
H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
2.3 FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Sheet Metal Fabrication: Provide
materials of standard factory fabrication to greatest
extent possible. Comply with details shown and with
recognized industry practices. Fabricate for
waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with
expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage, or
deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates.
Comply with material manufacturer instructions and
recommendations for forming material. Form
exposed sheet metal work without excessive oilcanning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and
levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back
to form hems.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Galvanized iron sheet metal gutters and
downspouts where indicated on plans.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet
metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder. Rivet joints for additional
strength where required.
10/18/11
07620-2
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonettype expansion provisions in work cannot be used
or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic
sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion
type joints are indicated or required for proper
performance of work, form galvanized iron to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric
sealant, in compliance with CDA standard details.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from
non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by
coating concealed surfaces at locations of
contact, with bituminous coating or other
permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer/fabricator.
2.4 ELASTIC EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated units of size
and profile indicated, complete with prefabricated
corner units, intersection units, and splicing
materials. Provide complete with elastic sheet
flashing forming the primary joint membrane in a
supported, "bellows" arrangement designed for
securement to both sides of expansion joints.
Underside of bellows insulated with adhesively
applied, flexible, closed-cell rubber or plastic not
less than 3/8-inch thick.
B. Underlayment: Where units are to be installed
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a
slip sheet of red rosin paper on a course of asphalt
saturated felt.
C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous
roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
D. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb
nailers, at maximum spacing of 6" O.C. Fabricate
seams at joints between units with minimum 3"
overlap, to form a continuous, waterproof system.
E. Install continuous gutter guards on gutters,
arranged as hinged units to swing open for
cleaning gutters. Install "beehive"-type strainer-guard
at conductor heads, removable for cleaning
downspouts.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed galvanized iron surfaces,
removing substances that might cause corrosion or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required
procedures for surveillance and protection of
flashings and sheet metal work during construction
to ensure that work will be without damage or
deterioration other than natural weathering at time
of Substantial Completion.
B. Type: Plain sheet or encapsulated galvanized iron
flanged edges, for embedment in other
construction or nailing to substrates, 4-inches
minimum flange width.
C. Looped Bellows Width: 5" to 6", exclusive of
flanges.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply
with manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor
units of work securely in place by methods
indicated, providing for thermal expansion of sheet
metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and
set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weatherproof.
10/18/11
07920-1
07920 SEALANTS AND CALKING
A. General:
1. Seal all open joints between dissimilar
materials in the exterior walls to provide a
positive barrier against passage of air and
moisture.
2. Guarantee in writing against defect of
material and workmanship for a period of five
years after the date of the notice of
completion.
B. Products:
1. Provide following sealants, or equals approved in advance by Architect, where called
for on Drawings or otherwise required for a
complete and proper installation.
a. Sealant Type A (at joints subjected to horizontal traffic):
(1) Self-leveling, complying with ASTM
C920-79, grade P, class 25;
(2) Acceptable products:
(a) "Vulkem 45, one-part;"
(b) "Vulkem 245, two-part;"
b. Sealant Type B (at joints in precast concrete, masonry, and tilt-up concrete):
(1) Non-sag, complying with ASTM C92079, type S, grade NS, class 25;
(a) "Vulkem 116, one-part;"
(b) "Vulkem 921, one-part;"
c. Sealant Type C (at joints subject to extreme
movement):
(1) Non-sag, complying with ASTM C92079, type S,
grade NS, class 25, use
NT, T, M, A, and O;
(a) "Vulkem 227, two-part;"
(b) "Vulkem 922, two-part;"
d. Sealant Type D (at joints requiring acoustical separation):
(a) "W. W. Henry's 313";
(b) "W. W. Henry's 413."
e. Sealant Type E (at joints not listed above):
(1) Acrylic latex, comply with ASTM C83476;
(a) "Pecora AC 20";
2. For other services, provide products especially
formulated for proposed use and approved
3. Colors:
a. Colors for each sealant installation will be
normally available from specified manufacturer.
b. Should such standard color not be
available from an approved substitute
manufacturer
except
at
additional
charge, provide such colors at no
additional cost to Owner.
c. In concealed installations, and in partially
or fully exposed installations where so
approved by Architect, use standard gray
or black sealant.
4. Use only those primers which have been tested
for durability on surfaces to be sealed and
which are specifically recommended for this
installation by manufacturer of sealant used.
5. Use only those backup materials which are
nonabsorbent, non-staining, and specifically
recommended
for
this
installation
by
manufacturer of sealant used.
6. For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will effectively
prevent application of sealant on surfaces not
scheduled to receive it, and which is removable without damage to substrate.
C. Execution:
1. Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces:
a. Install only on surfaces which are sound,
dry, and well brushed, wiping free from
dust.
b. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so required.
c. To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.
d. Where surfaces have been treated,
remove surface treatment by sandblasting
or wire brushing.
e. Remove laitance and mortar from joint
cavities.
2. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant:
a. Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond.
b. If sandblasting is not practical, or would
damage adjacent finish, scrape metal or
wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.
c. Use solvent to remove oil and grease,
wiping surfaces with clean white rags only.
d. Remove protective coatings on steel by
sandblasting or by using a solvent which
leaves no residue.
3. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant:
a. Remove temporary protective coatings,
dirt, oil, and grease.
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
b. When masking tape is used for protective
cover, remove tape just prior to applying
sealant.
c. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for
that purpose by manufacturer of aluminum work, and which are non-staining.
Installation of backup materials:
a. When using backup of tube or rod stock,
avoid lengthwise stretching of material.
Do not twist or braid hose or rod backup
stock.
b. Installation tool:
(1) For installation of backup material,
provide a blunt surfaced tool of wood
or plastic, having shoulders designed
to ride on adjacent finished surface
and
a
protrusion
of
required
dimensions to assure uniform depth of
backup material below sealant.
(2) Do not, under any circumstance, use a
screwdriver or similar tool for this
purpose.
(3) Using approved tool, smoothly and
uniformly place backup material to
depth indicated on Drawings or otherwise required, compressing backup
material 25% to 50% and securing a
positive fit.
Use only the primer approved by Architect for
particular installation, applying in strict
accordance
with
manufacturer's
Provide an approved bond-breaker where
recommended by manufacturer of sealant,
and where directed by Architect, adhering
strictly
to
manufacturers'
installation
recommendations.
Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify
joint type according to details on Drawings, or
as otherwise directed by Architect, and verify
that required proportion of width of joint to
depth of joint has been secured.
Equipment:
a. Apply sealant under pressure with power
actuated hand gun or manually operated
hand gun, or by other appropriate means.
b. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and
providing sufficient pressure to completely
fill joints as designed.
Thoroughly and completely mask joints where
appearance of primer or sealant on adjacent
surfaces would be objectionable.
Install the sealant in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly
filling joints to recommended depth.
11. Tool joints to profile shown on Drawings, or as
otherwise required if such profiles are not
shown on Drawings.
a. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly
concave surface.
b. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically
so recommended in writing by manufacturer of sealant.
12. Cleaning up:
a. Remove masking tape immediately after
joints have been tooled.
b. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant
as installation progresses, using solvent or
cleaning
agent
recommended
by
manufacturer of sealant used.
08100-1
08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. General:
1. Unless specifically otherwise approved by
Architect, provide all products of this Section
from a single manufacturer.
2. Steel doors and frames shall conform to Steel
Door Institute 100 series.
B. Products:
1. Acceptable metal doors:
a. As manufactured by Dittco Products, Inc.,
739 East Francis, Ontario, California 91761
(714) 923-1517;
b. Equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance by Architect.
2. Type and design:
a. Provide full flush design, fabricated from
metal complying with ASTM A40, hot-dip
galvanized and prime painted, with a tightly
hemmed vertical seam on lock and hinge
edges, with top flush channel and beveled
lock edge, in dimensions and types shown
on Drawings, reinforced for finish hardware
being provided under Section 08710 of
these Specifications, and in following model
numbers and gages:
(1) H20-4 non-labelled (20 gage honeycomb core);
(2) P20-8 non-labelled (20 gage foamed
core);
(3) UH20-4 labelled (20 gage honeycomb
core);
(4) UM18-4 labelled (18 gage mineral core).
3. Where indicated on Drawings, provide louv-ers
of clear anodized aluminum fabricated in a
sightproof
arrangement,
complete
with
aluminum screen.
4. Pre-clean and shop prime each door for finish
painting which will be performed at job site
under Section 09900 of these Specifications.
5. Acceptable metal frames: See Paragraph A-1
above.
a. Provide frames in dimensions and types
shown on Drawings, non-labelled or labelled
as indicated on Drawings, in 18 gage for
interior frames and 16 gage for exterior
frames, properly reinforced for finish
hardware being provided under Section
08710 of these Specifications.
b. Contractor may, at his option, provide either
all welded or knock down construction.
c. Pre-clean and shop prime each frame for
finish painting which will be performed at job
site under Section 09900 of these Specifications.
6. Secure templates from finish hardware supplier,
and accurately install, or make provision for, all
finish hardware at factory.
C. Execution:
1. Placing frames:
a. Where practicable, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
b. Set frames
accurately into
position,
plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set.
c. After wall construction is completed, remove
temporary braces and spreaders, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
d. At in-place construction, set frames and
secure to adjacent construction with
machine screws and suitable anchorage
devices. Provide "Z" fillers at each screw
location.
e. When installed in prepared openings in
concrete construction, provide sealant
between frame and concrete in accordance with provisions of Section 07920 of
2. Final adjustments:
a. Check and readjust operating finish
hardware items in hollow metal work just
prior to final inspection.
b. Leave work in complete and proper
operating condition.
c. Remove defective work and replace with
work
complying
with
the
specified
requirements.
3. Doors that swing out from conditioned spaces
to the exterior or to unheated spaces shall be
provided with aluminum interlocking
or
aluminum and vinyl weatherstripping and
aluminum thresholds. Door bottoms shall have
wrap-around aluminum rain drip and neoprene
or vinyl insert to provide weather seal. Exterior
doors that swing in shall have interlocking
thresholds with drain pan to the exterior. Double
doors shall have aluminum T-astragals with
integral vinyl weather strip. 1/2" maximum
threshold height.
4. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all
rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and
apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
-
08110-1
08110 METAL DOOR FRAMES
A. General:
1. Unless specifically otherwise approved by
Architect, provide all products of this Section
from a single manufacturer.
B. Products:
1. Provide prefinished frames in dimensions and
types shown on Drawings, non-labelled or
labelled as indicated on Drawings, in 18
gage, properly reinforced for finish hardware
being provided under Section 08710 of these
Specifications.
2. Secure templates from finish hardware supplier, and accurately install, or make provision
for, all finish hardware at factory.
3. Acceptable metal door frames:
a. "Commercial Series C" as manufactured by
Timely Industries, Los Angeles, CA 913312275 (213) 875-0124;
b. Equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance by Architect.
C
Execution:
1. Install in strict accordance with pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies
having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by Architect,
anchoring all components firmly into position
for long life under hard use.
10/18/11
08200-1
08200 WOOD DOORS
A. General:
having jurisdiction, comply with:
a. "Manual of Millwork" of Woodwork Institute
of California, for grade or grades specified;
or
b. "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"
of Architectural Woodwork Institute, for
grade or grades specified.
c. Certification and stamps will not be required.
d. Provide two year guarantee against
delamination or warping.
2. Delivery:
a. Deliver doors to job site after plaster and
cement are dry, and after building has
reached average prevailing humidity of its
locality.
b. Deliver prefinished doors in manufacturers'
original containers, clearly marked with
manufacturer's name, brand name, size,
thickness, and identifying symbol on
covering.
c. Seal all four edges of unfinished doors when
delivered to job site.
d. Provide two year guarantee against
delamination warping.
3. Storage:
a. Stack flat on 2" x 4" lumber, laid 12" from
ends and across center.
b. Under bottom door and over top of stack,
provide plywood or corrugated cardboard
to protect door surfaces.
c. Store doors where there will be no great
variations in heat, dryness, and humidity.
4. Do not drag doors across one another; lift
doors and carry them into position.
B. Products:
1. Provide flush wood doors of types, designs, and
thicknesses shown on Door Schedule in Drawings, labeled or non-labeled as indicated and
required, and in solid core or hollow core as
shown on Door Schedule.
2. Except as may be shown otherwise on Drawings,
fabricate work of this Section to "custom grade"
standards of referenced organization.
3. For hollow core doors, provide core construction as needed to accommodate finish
hardware described in Section 08710 of these
Specifications.
4. Species:
a. Provide pre-finished wood-grain masonite
faced doors where specified.
5. Site finish or mill finish wood doors in accordance with provisions of Section 09900 of these
Specifications.
C. Execution:
1. Fitting and machining:
a. Unless doors are completely fitted and
machined at mill, fit them for width by
planing and fit them for height by sawing:
(1) Bottom: 1/2" clearance maximum.
(2) Top: 1/8" clearance maximum.
(3) Lock edge and hinge edge: Bevel 1/8"
in 2" maximum.
b. Machine doors for hardware in accordance
with
recommendations
of
hardware
manufacturers, as those recommendations
have been approved by Architect.
2. Receive and retain custody of finish hardware
furnished for work of this Section under Section
08710 of these Specifications and, except as
otherwise directed by Architect, install all such
finish hardware in strict accordance with
recommendations of its manufacturer.
3. Replace or rehang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely.
4. Doors that swing out from conditioned spaces
or
aluminum and vinyl weatherstripping and
threshold height.
5. Owner reserves a right to request and pay for
an inspection by a representative of referenced
organization to determine that work of this
Section has been performed in accordance with
specified standards.
6. If such inspection determines work of this Section
does not comply with specified requirements,
immediately remove the non-complying items
and replace them with items complying with
specified requirements, all at no additional cost
to Owner, and reimburse Owner for cost of
inspection.
-
08410-1
08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
A. General:
1. Upon completion of this portion of Work, and
as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to
Architect two copies of a written Warranty
agreeing to replace work of this Section that
fails due to defective materials or workmanship
within three years after Date of Substantial
Completion as that Date is determined in
accordance with General Conditions.
2. Failure
due
to
defective
materials
or
workmanship is deemed to include, but not to
be limited to:
a. Failures
in
operation
of
operating
component or components;
b. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of
specified standards;
c. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to
unaided eye;
d. Defects
that
contribute
to
unsightly
appearance, potential safety hazard, or
potential untimely failure of work of this
Section or Work as a whole.
B. Products:
1. Provide aluminum entrances and storefronts in
dimensions and arrangements shown on
Drawings, using stock units manufactured by
Kawneer or equal approved in advance by
Architect. Use the 500 series wide stile doors with
a 10” rail at bottom.
2. Flashing: 16 gage sheet metal complying with
Specifications.
3. Finish:
a. Provide Copper Penny Kynar finish.
4. Prepare for, receive, and install finish hardware
furnished under Section 08710 of these
Specifications.
5. Glaze throughout with Atlantica Sungate 100
dual-pane insulating glass by PPG (or equal)
providing spandrel panels of matching color to
approval of Owner.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
approved
by
Architect,
prefabricating
in
shop
to
maximum extent practicable.
Provide hairline fit at joints, with smooth
continuity of line and accurate relation of
planes and angles. Securely fasten.
Doors that swing out from conditioned spaces
or
aluminum and vinyl weather-stripping and
threshold height.
Coordinate as required with other trades to
Section.
Make measurements as required in the field to
assure proper fit.
Install work of this Section in strict accordance
with original design, approved Shop Drawings,
pertinent
requirements
of
governmental
agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's
recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly into position for
long life under hard use.
C. Execution:
1. Perform all fitting of finish hardware to doors
and frames at factory; except do not drill or tap
for surface mounted items until time of
installation at site.
2. Comply with finish hardware manufacturer's
instructions and template requirements.
3. Use concealed fasteners to maximum extent
practicable.
4. Fabricate in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications and Shop Drawings as
10/18/11
08520-1
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. General:
1. In addition to complying with pertinent
regulations of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction:
a. Comply with ANSI-AAMA 101-85 for designations specified;
b. On each unit, provide an AAMA sponsored
label certifying compliance with specified
requirements.
B. Products:
1. Provide aluminum windows of types and dimensions shown on Drawings, complete with
anchors of types needed for installation, and
complying with following standards where they
apply as defined in ANSI-AAMA 101-85:
a. Horizontal sliding: HS-C20
2. Provide architectural class I clear anodized finish
on window members and on frame members of
screens.
3. Factory glaze as per window schedule with
channel type vinyl gaskets and clear glass,
capable of withstanding a wind pressure per
local jurisdiction and in accordance with ANSI
A134.1.
4. Provide manufacturer's standard screen at
vents.
C. Execution:
with
manufacturer's
recommendations
as
approved by Architect, anchoring units firmly
into position square, plumb, straight, and true.
2. Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with
metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or white
bronze of small area, isolate aluminum by one
of following methods.
a. Paint dissimilar metal with a prime coat of
zinc-chromate primer, followed by two coats
of aluminum metal-and-masonry paint.
b. Paint dissimilar metal with a coating of
heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
c. Apply a good quality sealant material
between aluminum and dissimilar metal.
d. Isolate dissimilar metals with non-absorptive
tape or gaskets.
10/18/11
08710-1
08710 FINISH HARDWARE
A. General:
1. Furnish and deliver to the job site all finish
hardware required to complete the work as
indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein. See Hardware Schedule on Sheet A001
of the drawings.
B. Product:
1. Acceptable hardware manufacturers: Hager
Hinge Co., Norton, Von Duprin, Stanley,
Schlage, LCN, Trimco, Jacksojn, National Guard
Products, Inc.,
Pemko, Marks, Dorma,
International, or Adams Rite.
2. Provide all trim attachments and fastenings
specified or required for proper and complete
installation.
3. Furnish template hardware as required.
4. Furnish non-removable pin at out-swinging
exterior doors.
5. Steel hinges shall be primed for painting.
6 Hardware finish shall be oil-rubbed bronze unless
noted otherwise.
7. Provide closers as called for on the hardware
schedule.
8. Unless otherwise specified, all locksets, latchsets,
padlocks, cylinders, and component parts are
to be by one manufacturer.
C. Execution:
1. Distribute finish hardware components to other
trades as required, and provide proper
direction regarding correct installation and
adjustment of units.
2. Install finish hardware as part of Work of Contract.
3. Upon completion of installation of finish
hardware, and as a condition of its acceptance, make a complete inspection of in-stalled
items.
a. Verify proper installation and function.
b. Make required adjustments and achieve
optimum operation.
c. Tighten screws and fasteners as necessary.
d. Make scratches and abrasions invisible to
unaided eye from distance of five feet, or
completely replace such damaged item with
new identical item at no additional cost to
Owner.
10/18/11
08800-1
08800 GLASS & GLAZING
A. General
1. Provide all glass and glazing, complete, in
place as shown on the drawings, specified
herein or needed for a complete and proper
installation.
2. All glass shall conform with local building codes
and shall conform with federal specification DDG-451.
3. Labels:
a. Glass shall have an affixed label showing
the manufacturer's name and grade or
quality thereof.
b. Labels shall be intact before and after
installation.
4 Conform to the current glazing manual
published by the Flat Glass Marketing
Association, Topeka, Kansas.
B. Products
1. Glazing
a. Atlantica Sungate 100 dual-pane insulating
glass by PPG, or equal.
b. Glazing accessories as approved by
manufacturer of window frames.
C. Execution
1. Install glass in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended instructions, & A.N.S.I. Z97.1-1982
2. Make certain that glazing work is absolutely
watertight.
3. Clean-up and replacement
a. The contractor shall be responsible for all
glass breakage.
b. Remove broken, scratched, chipped or
otherwise defective glass or aluminum,
including any glass that has become
stained.
10/18/11
09200-1
09200 LATH AND PLASTER
A. General:
having jurisdiction, comply with materials
handling and workmanship provisions of the
specifications of the Plastering Contractor’s
Association
of
Southern
California
(www.plasteringcontractors.org).
B. Products:
1. Stucco to be provided by Omega Products or
equal, colors per building elevations.
2. Steel channels:
a. Comply with ASTM A109 or ASTM A303.
b. Hot-rolled or cold-rolled channels for
framing: Use galvanized.
c. Cold-rolled channels: Provide flanges not
less than 7/16" wide.
d. Provide channels with weights as required by
3. Metal plastering accessories:
a. Fabricate from 26 gage or heavier hot-dip
galvanized
steel,
prime-coated
unless
otherwise specifically approved by Architect.
b. Use
manufacturer's
standard
shapes
specifically designed for proposed use.
c. Provide protective coating to permit
removal of over-spray upon completion of
plastering.
4. Hangers supporting runner channels:
a. Provide soft annealed steel wire not smaller
than 8 gage and complying with Fed Spec
QQ-W-461, galvanized.
b. Flat iron or steel straps at least 3/32" x 7/8"
size, galvanized or coated with rust-inhibitive
paint, may be used in lieu of specified
hanger wire.
5. Lath:.
a. Vertical Surfaces: Provide Aqua K-Lath, by
K-Lath Division of Georgetown Wire Co.,
1801 South Mountain Ave., Monrovia, CA
91017, Phone No. (909) 360-8288.
b. Horizontal Surfaces: Provide 3/8” Rib Lath
by Amico West, 11093 Beech Avenue,
Fontana, CA 92337, Phone No. (909) 3509280.
6. Cement:
a. Comply with ASTM C150, type I.
7. Lime:
a. Provide dry hydrated lime complying with
ASTM C206.
b. Lime putty (if used): Weigh no more than 83
lbs per cu ft.
8. Sand: Comply with ASTM C144, clean and well
graded from coarse to fine.
9. Water:
Clean and free from deleterious
amounts of acid, alkali, and organic materials.
10. Waterproofing: Wrap around all exterior door
and window openings with Moiststop by
Fortifiber, or equal.
C. Execution:
1. Carefully coordinate with other trades to assure
proper provision in such work for installation of
work of this Section.
2. Provide embedded wire supports as necessary.
3. Install members and components in strict
accordance with arrangements shown on
Drawings
and
manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Alignment:
a. Align vertically within a tolerance of one in
1000.
b. Align horizontally within a tolerance of one in
500.
c. On framing members to receive a finished
plaster surface, align finish sub-surface to
vary not more than 1/8" from plane surfaces
of adjacent framing and furring members.
5. Install approved metal lath in strict accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations, and with
pertinent
requirements
of
governmental
6. Perform mixing, plastering, and plaster curing in
strict accordance with provisions of referenced
standards.
7. Scratch coat:
a. Apply with sufficient material and force to
form good keys, embedding and filling all
spaces of lath.
b. Score to receive brown coat.
8. Brown coat:
a. Do not apply brown coat sooner than 48
hours after installation of scratch coat.
b. Apply brown coat to scratch coat.
c. Bring out to grounds, straighten to a true
surface, and leave sufficiently rough to
assure adequate bond of finish coat.
9. Color coat:
a. Do not apply color coat sooner than seven
days after installation of brown coat.
b. Apply a color coat per elevations. Do not
provide plaster soffits under eaves unless
specifically detailed on the plans.
10. Finish plaster true and even within a tolerance of
one in 500, leaving finished surface free from
tool marks and other blemishes.
11. Wipe metal accessories clean after application
of each coat.
12. In addition to other protection, protect adjacent
surfaces from accidental application of plaster.
10/18/11
09200-2
13. In addition to other requirements for cleaning,
immediately upon completion of this portion of
Work visually inspect adjacent surfaces and
remove all traces of spilled and splashed
plaster.
10/18/11
09260-1
09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Provide
all
gypsum
wallboard
and
accessories in place as shown on the
Drawings, specified herein, and as needed for
a complete and proper installation.
B. Products:
1. Provide gypsum wallboard complying with
Fed Spec SS-L-30D, in 48" widths and in such
lengths as will result in a minimum of joints.
a. Regular wallboard: Provide type III, grade
R, class 1, 5/8" thick except as may be
shown otherwise on Drawings.
b. Fire-retardant wallboard: Provide type III,
grade X, class 1, 5/8" thick.
c. Water-resistant wallboard: Provide type
VII, grade W or X as required, class 2, 5/8"
thick except as may be shown otherwise
on Drawings.
2. Where so indicated on Drawings, provide
gypsum wallboard system specifically designed for encasing shafts of required fireresistivity, and complying with Fed Spec SS-L30D, type IV, grade R or X, class 1, in
dimensions shown or otherwise required.
3. Metal trim:
a. Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter
than 26 gage, complying with Fed Spec
QQ-S-775, type I, class d or e.
b. Casing beads: Provide channel-shapes
with an exposed wing, and with a concealed wing not less than 7/8" wide.
Exposed wing may be covered with paper
cemented to metal, but shall be suitable
for joint treatment.
c. Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with
wings not less than 7/8" wide and
perforated for nailing and joint treatment,
or with combination metal and paper
wings bonded together, not less than 11/4" wide and suitable for joint treatment.
d. Edge beads for use at perimeter of
ceilings: Provide angle shapes with wings
not less than 3/4" wide.
Provide
concealed wing perforated for nailing,
and exposed wing edge folded flat.
Exposed wing may be factory finished in
white color.
4. Jointing system:
a. Provide a jointing system, including
reinforcing
tape
and
compound,
designed as a system to be used together
and as recommended for this use by
manufacturer of gypsum wallboard
approved for use on Work.
b. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer.
5. Fastening devices:
a. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place
on metal studs and metal channels, use
flat head screws, shouldered, specially
designed for use with power-driven tools,
not less than 1" long, with self-tapping
threads and self-drilling points.
b. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place
on wood, use 1-1/4" type W bugle head
screws, or use annular ring type nails
complying with ASTM C514 and of length
required by governmental agencies
C. Execution:
1. General:
a. Install gypsum wallboard in accordance
with Drawings and with separate boards in
moderate contact but not forced in place.
b. At internal and external corners, conceal
cut edges of boards by overlapping
covered edges of abutting boards.
c. Stagger boards so that corners of any four
boards will not meet at a common point
except in vertical corners.
2. Ceilings:
a. Install gypsum wallboard to ceilings with
long dimension of wallboard at right
angles to supporting members.
b. Wallboard may be installed with long
dimension parallel to supporting members
that are spaced 16" on centers when
attachment members are provided at end
joints.
3. Walls:
a. Install gypsum wallboard to studs at right
angles to furring or framing members.
b. Make end joints, where required, over
framing or furring members.
4. Attaching:
a. Drive specified screws with clutch controlled power screwdrivers, spacing screws
12" on center at ceilings and 16" on
centers at walls.
b. Where framing members are spaced 24"
apart on walls, space screws 12" on
centers.
c. Attach double layers in accordance with
pertinent codes
and
manufacturer's
d. Attach to wood as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
5. Access doors: By careful coordination with
Drawings and with trades involved, install
access doors where required and as provided
under other Sections of these Specifications.
Anchor firmly into position, and align properly
to achieve an installation flush with finished
surface.
6. Joint treatment:
a. Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying
that gypsum wallboard fits snugly against
supporting framework.
b. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed,
maintain a temperature of not less than 55
degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing
treatment, and until joint and finishing
compounds have dried.
c. Apply joint treatment and finishing
compound by machine or hand tool.
d. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours
between coats, with additional drying time
in poorly ventilated areas.
7. Embedding compounds:
a. Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and
fastener heads in a thin uniform layer.
b. Spread compound not less than 3" wide at
joints, center reinforcing tape in joint, and
embed the tape in compound. Then
spread a thin layer of compound over
tape.
c. After this treatment has dried, apply a
second coat of embedding compound to
joints and fastener heads, spreading in a
thin uniform coat to not less than 6" wide
at joints, and feather edged.
d. Sandpaper between coats as required.
e. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to
eliminate ridges and high points.
8. Finishing compounds:
a. After embedding compound is thoroughly
dry and has been completely sanded,
apply a coat of finishing compound to
joints and fastener heads.
b. Feather finishing compound to not less
than 12" wide.
c. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to
obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking
care to not scuff paper surface of
wallboard.
9. Corner treatment:
a. Internal corners:
Treat as specified for
joints, except fold reinforcing tape
lengthwise through middle and fit neatly
into corner.
b. External corners:
(1) Install specified corner bead, fitting
neatly over corner and securing with
same type fasteners used for installing
wallboard.
(2) Space fasteners approximately 6" on
centers, and drive through wallboard
into framing or furring member.
(3) After corner bead has been secured
into position, treat corner with joint
compound and reinforcing tape as
specified for joints, feathering joint
compound out from 8" to 10" on each
side.
10. Other metal trim:
a. Drawings do not purport to show all
locations and requirements for metal trim.
b. Carefully study Drawings and installation,
and provide all metal trim normally
recommended
by
manufacturer
of
gypsum wallboard approved for use in
this Work.
11. In addition to other requirements for cleaning,
use necessary care to prevent scattering
gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to
prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing
compound onto floor surfaces.
12. At completion of each segment of installation
in a room or space, promptly pick up and
remove from working area all scrap, debris,
and surplus material of this Section.
09510-1
09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
A. General:
b. Equal products of other manufacturers when
1. Deliver to Owner for use in future modifications,
an extra stock of approximately 10% of each
type of acoustical material installed, packaging
each type of material separately, distinctly
marked, and adequately protected against
deterioration.
B. Products:
1. Provide a complete system of supporting
members, anchors, wall cornices, adapters for
light fixtures and grilles, and accessories of every
type required for a complete suspended "T" grid
system of arrangements shown on Drawings, in
color or colors selected by Owner from
standard colors of approved manufacturer,
and complying with pertinent requirements of
Underwriters
Laboratories,
Inc.,
and
2. Acceptable suspension system products:
a. Manufactured
Corporation
by:
Chicago
Metal
(1) Ceiling system: 1 hr rated, per UL Design
L202;
3. Acceptable panel products:
a. Manufactured
Corporation:
by
Chicago
Metal
(1) Ceiling system: fissured, 24" x 24" x 5/8";
with angled edges and recessed tee
throughout – selected by Owner within
the parameters of a 1 hr. ceiling
assembly
by
Chicago
Metal
Corporation..
C. Execution:
1. Except as modified by requirements of governmental
agencies
having
jurisdiction,
recommendations
of
manufacturer
as
approved by Architect, or specific directions of
Architect, install in accordance with ASTM C636
and pertinent UL design requirements.
2. Lateral bracing:
a. Provide lateral bracing as required
pertinent codes and regulations.
by
b. Secure lateral bracing to structural members.
Secure at right angles to direction of
partition and four ways in large ceiling
areas.
3. Provide hold-down clips for ceiling boards only
when so required by governmental agencies
4. Make all grid level within a tolerance of one in
1000 and straight within a tolerance of one in
1000.
5. Install acoustical ceiling boards in "T" grid system
so linearity of facing is as directed by Architect.
6. Set acoustical ceiling boards at sound walls in
four continuous beads of 1/4" diameter sealant,
one at top of each edge of gypsum drywall
and two on top of top metal runner track.
7. In addition to other stipulated requirements for
cleaning, completely remove finger prints and
traces of soil from surfaces of grid and
acoustical materials, using only those cleaning
materials recommended for purpose by
manufacturer of material being cleaned.
10/18/11
09650-1
09650 SHEET VINYL FLOORING
A. General:
1. Deliver to Owner for use in future modifications
an extra stock of approximately 10% of each
color and pattern in each material installed
under this Section, packaging each type of
material separately, distinctly marked, and
adequately protected against deterioration.
2.
3.
B. Products:
1. Provide colors and patterns as selected by
Owner from standard colors and patterns of
approved manufacturer in specified type.
2. Adhesives:
a. Provide waterproof and stabilized type
adhesive as recommended by manufacturer
of material being installed.
b. Asphalt emulsions and other non-waterproof
adhesives will not be acceptable.
3. Concrete slab primer: Provide non-staining type
as required and as recommended by manufacturer of material being installed.
4. Sheet Vinyl:
a. Dimension: Provide 72" rolls.
(1) Armstrong .085 gauge "Corlon", Fed.
Spec. SS-T-312 type III.
(2) Integral cove: Base, 6" high of same
material as the flooring, or heat-welded,
butt-to-base as recommended by the
manufacturer.
(3) Equal products of other manufacturers
when approved in advance by
Architect.
5. Vinyl base:
a. Where shown on Drawings, provide topset
base, drawings, 1/8" thick, of height noted
on drawings, of quality equal to "Kencove"
by Kentile or "Colorite" by Armstrong.
6. Wax:
a. Shall be water-resistant, scuff-resistant, nonyellowing finish.
7. Walking surfaces to comply with ASTM C1028; a
static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for level
surfaces and 0.8 for ramps.
C. Execution:
1. Subfloors:
a. Verify that substrate is smooth, level, at
required finish elevation, and without more
than 1/8" in 10'-0" variation from level or
slopes shown on Drawings.
4.
5.
6.
b. Prior to laying materials, broom clean or
vacuum surfaces to be covered, and
inspect subfloors.
Priming:
a. Apply concrete slab primer if so recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.
b. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's
Installation, general:
a. Install
materials
only
after
finishing
operations, including painting, have been
completed and after permanent heating
system is operating.
b. Verify that moisture content of concrete
slabs, building air temperature, and relative
humidity are within limits recommended by
manufacturers of materials used.
c. Maintain reference markers, holes, and
openings that are in place or plainly marked
for future cutting by repeating on finish
surface as marked in subfloor. Use chalk or
other non-permanent marking device.
Installing sheet vinyl flooring:
a. Place units with adhesive cement in strict
compliance
with
manufacturer's
recommendations.
(1) Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces,
nosings, edgings, and thresholds.
(2) Scribe as necessary around obstructions
and to produce neat joints.
(3) Extend flooring into toe spaces, door
reveals, and in closets and similar
spaces.
b. Lay flooring from center marks established
with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so that units at opposite edges of
room are of equal width.
(1) Lay flooring square to axes of room or
space.
c. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to
units and secured with adhesive, providing
at all unprotected edges unless otherwise
shown.
Installing base:
a. Install base where shown on Drawings.
b. Use factory-preformed exterior corners, and
factory-preformed or job-mitered interior
corners.
Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes
from exposed surfaces, using neutral cleaner
recommended by manufacturer of resilient
materials.
10/18/11
09680-1
09680 CARPETING
A. General:
1. Furnish and install carpet as indicated on the
room finish schedule.
2. Meet the requirements of ASTM-E-84 tunnel test
44 and have class I flame spread rating of 25
or less, Fed. Spec. DDD-C-0095A.
B. Products:
1. Carpet is to be of tufted, woven, fusionbonded, or knitted construction, of first quality
(free from visual blemishes, streaks, poorly
dyed areas, and other physical and/or
manufacturing defects), conforming to the
following:
a. Surface texture: Loop pile ASTM D1423
height variation 0.175".
b. Pile fiber: solution dyed Nylon filament, 15
denier, min. length 3 1/2", ASTM D2257.
c. Pile weight: 28 oz. per sq.yd. minimum.
d. Pile density: 5,500 minimum.
e. Width: 12 ft. minimum.
f. Delamination strength 18lb min.
g. Plied heat set yarn.
NOTE: If "Olifin" is used, increase the pile density
to 6,500.
2. Provide seam adhesive such as W. W. Henry
Company No. 246, Roberts Company No. 410502, or an equal recommended for purpose
by manufacturer of carpet.
3. At intersection of carpet and floor tile, provide
Mercer Plastics Company, Inc., "Custom Edge
Carpet Bar No. 90," vinyl, or equal, in color
selected by Owner.
4. Provide other materials, including tackless
strips, not specifically described but required
for a complete and proper installation, as
selected by Contractor subject to approval of
Owner.
5. Submit
samples,
meeting
above
specifications, to owner for color selection.
5. Where carpeting is used on walls, install as
directed by manufacturer, and trim top edge
and exposed vertical edges with a brass cap
approved by Owner.
6. Seams:
a. Locate seams only where shown on approved Shop Drawings, or where specifically otherwise approved by Architect.
b. Locate seams to maximum extent practicable out of way of traffic. Do not seam at
doorways perpendicular to door.
c. Fabricate
seams
to
be
uniform,
unnoticeable, and permanent by any of
the methods specified below, except when
the carpet manufacturer specifies the
seaming method. Regardless of seaming
method, treat all joining edges with a
seam adhesive. Seams shall have a
minimum breaking strength of 100 pounds
per inch and be capable of withstanding
all carpet cleaning processes.
(1) Sewn seams: Hand sew with a suitable
carpet thread such as linen No. 18.
(2) Taped seams: Minimum 4" wide carpet
seaming tape.
(3) Hot melt tape seams: Minimum 4" wide.
d. Make seams as inconspicuous as possible,
flat, unpuckered, and completely free from
glue on exposed surfaces.
e. Do not stretch seams.
7. In addition to cleaning requirements stated
elsewhere, thoroughly clean carpet and adjacent surfaces prior to final acceptance of
carpeted areas by Owner.
8. Provide a heavy non-staining paper or plastic
walkway as required over carpeting in
direction of traffic, maintaining intact until
carpeted space is accepted by Owner.
9. Allow Owner to inspect and select from scrap
carpet remaining after installation. Bundle,
wrap in burlap, and deliver to Owner carpet
scraps selected by him.
C. Execution:
1. Make substrate level and free from irregularities. Assure one constant floor height after
carpet is installed, filling low spots and
grinding high spots as required.
2. Install approved pad in strict accordance with
manufacturer's
recommendations,
lightly
butting joints, and providing a smooth
underlayment.
3. Scribe carpet accurately to vertical surfaces.
4. Align lines of carpet, as woven, using no fill
strips less than 6" wide, laying all carpet in
same direction unless specifically directed
otherwise by Architect.
10/18/11
09900-1
09900 PAINTING
A. General:
1. Following selection of colors and glosses by
Owner, submit Samples for Owner's review.
a. Provide three Samples of each color and
each gloss for each material on which finish
is specified to be applied.
b. Except as otherwise directed by Owner,
make Samples approximately 8" x 10" in size.
c. If so directed by owner, submit Samples
during progress of Work in form of actual
application of approved materials on
actual surfaces to be painted.
2. Revise and re-submit each Sample as requested
until required gloss, color, and texture is
achieved. Such Samples, when approved, will
become standards of color and finish for
accepting or rejecting work of this Section.
3. Do not commence finish painting until approved Samples are on file at job site.
a. Exterior work: A maximum of five different
colors will be used, with variations for trim,
doors, miscellaneous work, and metal work.
b. Interior work: A maximum of five different
pigmented colors will be used, with
variations for trim and wall surfaces and
wainscots.
c. Dark tones: A maximum of two dark tones
will be used as accent colors for interior.
C. Execution:
1. For application of approved paint, use only
equipment as is recommended for application
of particular paint by manufacturer of particular
paint.
2. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that
proposed equipment is actually compatible with
material to be applied, and that integrity of
finish will not be jeopardized by use of proposed
equipment.
4. Upon completion of work of this Section, deliver
to Owner an extra stock equaling 10% of each
color, type, and gloss of paint used in Work,
tightly sealing each container, and clearly
labeling with contents and location where used.
3. Mix and prepare paint materials
accordance
with
manufacturers'
mendations.
B. Products:
5. Remove removable items which are in place
and are not scheduled to receive paint finish; or
provide surface applied protection prior to
surface preparation and painting operations.
1. Painting Schedule at end of this Section is
based, in general, on products of Frazee Paint
Company. Equal products of Sinclair, DunnEdwards, or other manufacturers approved in
advance by Architect may be substituted in
accordance with provisions of Contract.
2. Where products are proposed other than those
specified by name and number in Painting
Schedule, submit a new painting schedule
compiled in same format used for Painting
Schedule included in this Section.
3. Undercoats and thinners:
a. Provide undercoat paint produced by same
manufacturer as finish coat.
b. Use only thinners recommended by paint
manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits.
c. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish
coat, and thinner material as parts of a
unified system of paint finish.
4. Owner will prepare a color schedule with
samples for guidance in painting. Owner may
select, allocate, and vary colors on different
surfaces throughout Work, subject to following.
in strict
recom-
4. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures
in strict accordance with paint manufacturers'
recommendations.
6. Following completion of painting in each space
or area, reinstall removed items by using
workmen who are skilled in necessary trades.
7. Slightly vary color of succeeding coats.
a. Do not apply additional coats until
completed coat has been inspected and
approved.
b. Only inspected and approved coats of
paint will be considered in determining
number of coats applied.
c. Sand and dust between coats to remove
defects visible to unaided eye from a
distance of five feet.
d. On removable panels and hinged panels,
paint back sides to match exposed sides.
8. Brush out and work brush coats onto surface in
an even film.
9. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
10. Except as specifically otherwise approved by
Owner, confine spray application to metal
10/18/11
09900-2
framework and similar surfaces where hand
brush work would be inferior.
a. Where spray application is used, apply each
coat to provide hiding equivalent of brush
coats.
b. Do not double back with spray equipment
to build up film thickness of two coats in one
pass.
11. For completed work, match approved Samples
as to texture, color, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with
specified requirements.
12. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures:
a. Exposed mechanical items:
(1) Finish electric panels, access doors,
conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers,
vents, and items of similar nature to
match adjacent wall and ceiling
surfaces, or as directed.
(2) Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents,
registers, and grilles flat black.
(3) Wash metal with solvent, prime, and
apply two coats of alkyd enamel.
b. Exposed pipe and duct insulation:
(1) Apply one coat of latex paint on
insulation which has been sized or
primed under other Sections; apply two
coats
on
such
surfaces
when
unprepared.
(2) Match color of adjacent surfaces.
(3) Remove band before painting, and
replace after painting.
c. Hardware:
(1) Paint prime coated hardware to match
adjacent surfaces;
(2) Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb
seals, and astragal seals to match color
of door frame unless otherwise directed
by Owner.
d. Wet areas:
(1) In toilet rooms and contiguous areas,
add an approved fungicide to paints.
(2) For oil base paints, use 1% phenolmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol.
(3) For water emulsion and
surfaces, use 4% sodium
ophenate.
glue size
tetrachlor-
e. Interior: Use "stipple" finish where enamel is
specified.
f.
Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat
resistant paint approved by Owner.
13. Provide following paint finishes.
a. Exterior metal, ferrous (except doors, door
frames, and handrails):
(1) First coat:
BLOC-RUST
PREMIUM
BRPR00-1-WH (white) or BRPR00-1-RO
(red oxide)
(2) Second coat: EVERSHIELD
(EVSH50)
Semi-Gloss
(3) Third coat:
(EVSH50)
Semi-Gloss
EVERSHIELD
b. Exterior metal doors, door frames, and
handrails:
(1) First coat:
BLOC-RUST PREMIUM
BRPR00-1-WH (white) or BRPR00-1-RO
(red oxide)
(2) Second coat:
(W10)
WB SYNLUSTRO Gloss
(3) Third coat:
(W10)
WB SYNLUSTRO Gloss
c. Exterior metal, galvanized:
Pretreatment:
Supreme
Metal Etch (SCME 01)
Chemical
(1) First coat:
(GAPR00)
GALV-ALUM PREMIUM
(2) Second coat:
(EVSH50)
EVERSHIELD Semi-Gloss
(3) Third coat:
(EVSH50)
EVERSHIELD Semi-Gloss
d. Exterior wood: NOTE: All exterior wood trim is
to be finished on all sides and ends prior to
installation to prevent wood rot, warping,
cupping, etc.
(1) (Paint finish):
(a)
First coat:
PREMIUM (EZPR00)
EZPRIME
(b)
Second coat:
EVERSHIELD
Semi-Gloss (EVSH50)
(c)
Third coat:
EVERSHIELD
Semi-Gloss (EVSH50)
(2) (Stain finish, semi-transparent):
(a)
First coat:
Series
CABOT
4300
(3) (Stain finish, heavy bodied, opaque):
10/18/11
09900-3
(a)
First coat:
Flat (SSHL10)
SPARTASHIELD
e. Exterior concrete unit masonry:
(1) First coat:
SMOOTH
BLOCFIL PREMIUM (SBPR00)
(2) Second coat:
f.
(a)
First coat:
EFFSTOP
PREMIUM (ESPROO)
(b)
Second coat:
GLOSS (SPMA50)
SUPREMA SEMI-
(c)
Third coat:
GLOSS (SPMA50)
SUPREMA SEMI-
203 Duratec
(2) On ferrous metal, use:
Exterior concrete:
(1) First coat:
EFFSTOP
PREMIUM
(ESPROO) or SMOOTH BLOCFIL PREMIUM
(SBPR00)
(2) Second coat:
(EVSH10)
(1) On concrete, use:
EVERSHIELD
Flat
(a)
First coat:
BLOC-RUST PREMIUM
BRPR00-1-WH (white) or BRPR00-1RO (red oxide)
(b)
Second coat:
WB
SYNLUSTRO Semi-Gloss (W9)
(c)
Third coat:
WB
g. Interior flat wall paint ("F"):
(1) On concrete, use:
(a)
First coat:
EFFSTOP
PREMIUM (ESPROO)
(b)
Second coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(c)
Third coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(2) On gypsum drywall, use:
(3) On gypsum drywall, use:
(a)
First coat:
VINYLASTIC
PREMIUM (VNPR00)
(b)
Second coat:
GLOSS (SPMA50)
SUPREMA SEMI-
(c)
Third coat:
GLOSS (SPMA50)
SUPREMA SEMI-
(4) On galvanized metal (except stairs,
stringers, handrails, metal doors, metal
door frames, and ladders) use:
(a)
First coat:
VINYLASTIC
PREMIUM (VNPR00)
(b)
Second coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
Pretreatment:
Supreme
Chemical Metal Etch (SCME 01)
(c)
Third coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(a)
First coat:
ULTRAGRIP
PREMIUM (UGPR00)
(b)
Second coat:
WB
(c)
Third coat:
WB
(3) On Plaster, use:
(a)
First coat:
EFFSTOP
PREMIUM (ESPROO) or INTERKOTE
PREMIUM (IKPR00)
(b)
Second coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(c)
Third coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(4) On concrete unit masonry, use:
(a)
First coat:
SMOOTH
BLOCFIL PREMIUM (SBPR00)
(b)
Second coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(c)
Third coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
(5) On galvanized stairs, stringers, handrails,
metal doors, metal door frames, and
ladders, use:
Pretreatment:
Supreme
Chemical Metal Etch (SCME 01)
(a)
First coat:
ULTRAGRIP
PREMIUM (UGPR00)
(b)
Second coat:
WB
(c)
Third coat:
WB
h. Interior semi-gloss enamel ("SGE"):
10/18/11
09900-4
(6) On wood (paint finish), use:
(a)
First coat:
PREMIUM (IKPR00)
INTERKOTE
(b)
Second coat:
GLOSS (SPMA50)
SUPREMA SEMI-
(c)
Third coat:
GLOSS (SPMA50)
SUPREMA SEMI-
(7) On wood (stain finish, semi-trans parent),
use:
(a)
First coat:
Cabots 8120
(8) On wood (opaque
bodied), use:
finish,
(a)
First coat:
Based Wiping
scheduled)
Zenith
Water
Stain (color as
(b)
Second coat
Zenith
Precatalyzed Lacquer Satin from
Valspar *
(c)
Third coat:
Zenith
Valspar *
(d)
Fourth coat:
Zenith
Valspar *
heavy
(a)
First coat:
PREMIUM (IKPR00)
INTERKOTE
(b)
Second coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
©
Third coat:
(SPMA10)
SUPREMA FLAT
* Note: Valspar Zenith Waterborne Precatalyzed
Lacquer is self sealing and Sanding Sealer is not
necessary—use 3 coat finish system.
2. Apply Valspar VSP 0109 Paste Wood Filler on
open grain wood (9) On wood (transparent finish, stain and
lacquer), use:
10/18/11
09972-1
09972 PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS
A – General:
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Provide plastic coated wall panels where
shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete
and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this
Section include, but are not
necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and Sections in Division
l of these Specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
01341.
B.
C.
Product data: Within 45 calendar days
after the Contractor has received the
Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
Materials list of items proposed to
be provided under this Section;
2.
Manufacturer's specifications and
other data needed to prove
compliance with the specified
requirements;
3.
Manufacturer's recommended
installation procedures that will
become the basis for accepting or
rejecting actual installation
Accompanying the product data, submit
200 mm x 250 mm (8" x 10") or larger
Samples of the full range of colors and
patterns available in the plastic coated
wall panels, plus 300 mm (12") or longer
Samples of colors and patterns available
in the moldings.
B – Products:
2.1 WALL PANELS
A.
Where "Marlite" is shown on the Drawings,
provide the appropriate following components manufactured by the Marlite
Company, or equals approved in
advance by the Owner:
1.
integrally colored FRP high-gloss
pebbled surface panels, (3/32")
thick by (4'-0") wide;
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Provide other materials, not specifically
described but required for a complete
and proper installation.
C – Execution:
A.
Examine the areas and conditions under
performed. Correct conditions detrimental
to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Securely install the approved products in
accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, setting all items straight,
plumb, level, and true to the lines and
levels shown on the Drawings.
B. Promptly upon completion of installation,
clean all exposed surfaces with methods
and materials recommended by the manufacturer of the panels.
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
with the specified requirements and
methods needed for proper performance
of the work of this Section.
01620.
10/18/11
10165-1
10165 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
A. Products:
1. Provide floor supported powder coated metal
toilet partitions by Global Steel Products
Corporation, 6830 East Washington Blvd., City
of Commerce, CA 90040 (213) 724-5232 in
dimensions and arrangements shown on
drawings, and in colors and finishes selected by
Owner from standard colors and finishes.
2. Provide urinal screens in dimensions and
arrangements
shown
on
Drawings,
manufactured by Global Steel Products-see
above.
3. Provide manufacturers standard heavy-duty
type 304 18-8 satin finish stainless steel hardware
throughout, including screw and 1 1/8" coat
hook on inside of stall door. If directed by
Owner, provide vandal-resistant Institutional
Hardware.
4. Provide threaded steel inserts behind each door
hinge to receive one-way stainless steel screw; Tnuts behind each latch track.
5. All doors shall be equipped to open by lifting
bottom edge for emergency purposes.
B. Execution:
Section.
with original design, pertinent requirements of
manufacturer's
recommended
installation
procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
3. Adjust doors, except doors to handicapped
compartments, to remain at a uniformly open
position when unlocked.
10/18/11
10400-1
10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
A – General:
B – Products:
1.1 SUMMARY
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide identifying devices where shown on
the Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper
installation including, but not necessarily
limited to:
1. Building identification;
2. Building directory;
3. Door signs.
B. Related work:
General
Conditions,
Supplementary
Conditions, and Sections in Division l of these
Specifications.
A. Design is based on use of standard products
manufactured by ASI Sign Systems, 5849
Uplander Way, Culver City, California 90230,
(310) 645-1400, and trade names of that
manufacturer are used herein.
B. Provide the products upon which design is
based, or provide equal products of another
manufacturer approved in advance by the
Owner.
C. Except as otherwise approved by the Owner,
provide all products of this Section from a
single manufacturer.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Consult the Owner in advance and secure the
official street address number.
B. Provide one set of raised hollow brass street
address numbers with the following attributes.
1. 300 mm (12") high by 38 mm (1-1/2")
deep;
2. All seams solder sealed, sanded, and
finished so no exposed edges are visible.
3. Light patina finish and protective coating.
01341.
B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after
the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other
data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
3. Details of installation and anchorage
sufficient to enable proper interface of the
work of this Section with the work of other
trades.
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation
procedures which will become the basis for
accepting or rejecting actual installation
2.2 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION
4. Use "Helvetica Medium" style.
C. Provide the manufacturer's standard mounting
system as appropriate for the surfaces shown
on the Drawings.
2.3 BUILDING DIRECTORY
of this Section.
A. Provide ASI illuminated directory type 530, with
the following attributes:
1. 738 mm (29-1/2") high by 933 mm (375/16") wide;
2. Recess mounted, with low light transmission
laminated bronze glass cover;
3. Provide strip capacity of 150 strips at 13
mm x 175 mm (1/2" x 7"), with removable and
interchangeable graphic insert holders and
blank film inserts.
4. Finish:
Duranodic black on exposed
surfaces of metal.
2.4 DOOR SIGNS
01620.
A. Provide ASI series "SPB" door sign plaques with
the following attributes.
1. Size: 225 mm x 225 mm (9" x 9").
10/18/11
2. Type style: "Helvetica Medium"; 13 mm
(1/2") for message and 16 mm (5/8") for suite
number.
3. Plaque color: Black.
4. Type color: White.
5. Frame: Black, series 390.
6. Margins:
a. For message, 20 mm (3/4") bottom left;
b. For suite number: 20 mm (3/4") top left.
7. Mounting: Double-sided .53 mm (1/32")
thick vinyl tape, silastic adhesive, or screw
mounting, depending on mounting surface.
B. Messages:
Text will be provided by the
Owner.
C. Provide ASI series "SPC" toilet room door sign
plaques with the following attributes:
1. Size: 300 mm (12") triangle and 300 mm
(12") circle complying with pertinent requirements of Title 24 of California Administrative Code.
2. Type style: "Helvetica Medium."
3. Plaque color: Black.
4. Type color: White.
5. Frame finish: Black.
6. Margins: Center/center.
7. Mounting: Same as for other door signs.
8. Messages: MEN and WOMEN.
C – Execution:
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict
accordance
with
the
manufacturers'
recommendations, using only the approved
mounting
materials,
and
locating
all
components firmly into position, level and
plumb.
10520-1
10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
A. Products:
1. Where Directed by Fire Marshall during job
walk during rough framing, provide J. L.
Industries "Panorama 1037 and 1038 C-70"
factory prefinished steel cabinets, or equal
products of other manufacturers approved in
advance by Owner. Solid block all around
recessed cabinets.
2. At each fire extinguisher cabinet, provide one
multipurpose chemical fire extinguisher with UL
rating of 2A-10B;C, J. L. Industries Model
"Cosmic 5-E" or equal and as approved in
advance by Fire Marshall.
3. At each additional fire extinguisher location,
provide J. L. Industries Model "Cosmic 5-E"
extinguisher with J. L. Industries "MB 821"
bracket.
4. Service, charge, and tag each fire extinguisher
not more than five calendar days prior to
Date of Substantial Completion of Work.
B. Execution:
Section.
and manufacturer's recommended installation
procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
3. Locate bracket-mounted extinguishers where
directed by Fire Department official.
10/18/11
10650-1
10650 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
A. Products:
1. Provide
operable
partitions
of
types,
dimensions, and arrangements shown on
Drawings.
a. "Operable Partitions" – Model Gamma
STC46 gwb faced “M” panels manufactured
by Advanced Equipment Corporation, 2401
West Commonwealth Ave., Fullerton, CA
92833, Phone: (714) 635-5350. Website:
(www.advancedequipment.com)
B. Execution:
Section.
with original design, approved Shop Drawings,
pertinent
requirements
of
governmental
agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer's
recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly into position for
3. Upon completion of installation, put each
operating component through at least ten
operating cycles.
a. Adjust to achieve optimum operation.
b. Visually inspect all exposed surfaces, and
touchup all scratches and abrasions to be
completely invisible to unaided eye from a
distance of five feet.
10/18/11
10800-1
10800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. General
1. Work specified: Provide toilet room accessories
in types and locations specified herein and as
shown on drawings.
2. Provide a 10 year silver spoilage warranty on
mirror.
B. Products
2. Each grab bar in the water closet compartment
for handicapped shall be capable to support a
250 pound load.
Section.
4. Install each item in its proper location, firmly
anchored into position, level and plumb, and in
accordance
with
manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Private toilet room , provide the following items
by V & G Sales, ph: (909) 444-9553 (or equal),
one per room:
a. Soap dispenser: Model 6324
b. Paper towel dispenser: Model 250-15
c. Toilet tissue dispenser: Model 15241
d. Mirror-shelf: Model 7815
e. Waste receptacle: Model 359
f. Napkin disposal: Model 4781-15
g. Seat cover dispenser: Model 5831
2. Public toilet room :
a. Soap dispenser: Model 6324 (one each
lavatory)
b. Toilet tissue dispenser: Model 5241-50 (one
each water closet compartment)
c. Toilet seat cover dispenser: Model 5831 use
Model 584 for handicapped compartment
(one each water closet compartment)
d. Coat hook: Model 9135 (1 ea. W.C.
compartment, mounted @ 48" in H.C. toilet)
e. Feminine napkin disposal: Model 4781-15
(one
each
female
water
closet
compartment, mounted @ 48")
f. Grab bars: Model 832-001/36 and Model
832-001/42
(one
each
for
each
handicapped toilet compartment)
g. Mirror: .5mm x 48" high x full length, Model
781 framed (one each room)
h. Paper
towel
dispenser
and
waste
receptacle: Model 234 (one each room)
j. Feminine napkin-tampon vendors: Model
426 (one each women's toilet room)
3. Janitor's room :
a. Mop holder: Model 9954 (one each room)
4. Where indicated :
a. Mirror: .5mm x 48" x full length Model 781
framed
C. Execution
1. Installation shall be in accordance
manufacturer's
specifications
recommendations.
with
and
10/18/11
14420 -1
14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFT
A. Products:
1. Use components produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in business of manufacturing,
installing, and servicing wheelchair lifts of types
required by this Section of these Specifications,
and with a history of successful production
acceptable to Architect.
B. Products:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Design is based on use of equipment
manufactured and installed by National
Wheel-O-Vator Company, and terminology
used may include reference to proprietary
products of that company. Construe such
reference as establishing only quality of
workmanship and materials to be provided
under this Section, and not as limiting
competition.
b. Provide products upon which design is
based, or provide equal products of:
(1) Other
manufacturer
approved
in
advance by Architect.
2. Except as otherwise approved by Architect,
provide Wheel-O-Vator platform lift - model as
selected by Owner – make submittal to Architect
prior to delivery.
C. Execution:
Section.
manufacturer's
recommended
installation
procedures
as
approved
by
Architect,
anchoring all components firmly into position for
3. Upon
completion
of
installation,
make
arrangements
for
and
secure
required
inspections, tests, and approvals of completed
wheelchair lifts.
Make all changes and
adjustments required at no additional cost to
Owner.
4. Unit shall have a one (l) year warranty on the
basic unit and electrical system components
with a two (2) year limited warranty on drive
components.
10/18/11
15000-1
15000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
A
General:
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general provisions
applicable to Division 15 Mechanical.
1.02
REFERENCES
c.
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the
Contract, including General and Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1 section apply
to work in Division 15.
1.03
d.
GENERAL:
A. Submittals:
1. Submittals will be reviewed by the
Engineer to determine that the materials,
equipment, and installation methods are
in accordance with the project design
concepts.
The Contractor shall be
responsible for space requirements,
configurations,
performance,
bases,
supports, and other apparatus that may
be affected by the material, equipment
or installation.
2. Include current published catalog and
specification
sheets
pertaining
to
proposed material and equipment.
3. Identify each item with identification
symbols identical to those used on the
drawings and/or in the specifications.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1. Submit one copy of the manual to the
Engineer for preliminary review prior to
production of the final manuals.
2. Following review of the preliminary
manual by the Engineer prepare and
submit final copies of the manual
complying with the Engineer’s comments
noted on the preliminary manual.
3. Include the following information:
a. Alphabetical list of all system
components with the name, address,
and 24-hour phone number of the
company responsible for servicing
each item during the first year of
operation.
b. Manufacturer’s
data
that
are
applicable
to
the
installed
equipment such as the following:
e.
f.
g.
h.
1. Shop drawings (reviewed and
accepted).
2. Product and performance data
(reviewed and accepted).
3. Installation instructions.
4. Lubrication instructions.
5. Wiring and temperature control
diagrams.
6. Parts list.
7. Copies of warranties.
A simplified description of the
operation of each system including
the function of each piece of
equipment within the system.
Emergency
procedures
for
equipment operation during a fire or
following the failure of major
equipment. Describe procedures for
normal
starting,
operating,
shutdown, and long-term shutdown.
Complete maintenance instructions
for all equipment.
System balancing report.
Temperature controls, cut sheets, and
record drawings.
Equipment certifications.
1.04
DEFINITIONS: Not used
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. General: Refer to DIVISION 1 for construction
phasing and time increments.
B. Installer qualifications:
1. Workmanship shall conform to the
highest industry standard for each
specific type of work.
2. Perform work in accordance with
standard commercial practices.
1.06
WARRANTY:
A. All
mechanical
equipment,
materials,
workmanship warranties shall be provided in
accordance with the following:
1. Warranty all equipment, materials,
workmanship, and proper operation of
equipment and apparatus for a period
of one year from date of final
acceptance. Extended warranty periods
may be identified elsewhere.
2. Compile and assemble the warranties
specified into the operating and
maintenance manuals.
10/18/11
3. Provide complete warranty information
for each item to include date or
beginning of warranty or bond; duration
of warranty or bond; and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers and
procedures for filing a claim and
obtaining warranty services.
B
Products:
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
A. As specified in individual sections.
2.02
MATERIALS:
A. Provide material and equipment new and
free from defects.
B. Install all equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer’s
current
published
recommendations.
C. Where no manufacturer is listed, provide a
standard product meeting the requirements
of the drawings and specifications, and
manufactured by a firm regularly engaged
in the manufacture of such products.
C
Execution:
3.01
EXAMINATION:
A. Visit site and ascertain existing conditions
prior to submitting bid. Include in bid all
considerations necessary to accomplish the
work under the existing conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION:
A. Permits and inspections:
1. Secure and pay for all required permits
and licenses.
2. Pay all applicable royalties, inspection
fees, and taxes.
B. Scaffolding, Rigging, and Hoisting:
1. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, and
hoisting necessary to safely accomplish
the work following OSHA requirements.
a. Remove from premises when no
longer needed.
2. Provide necessary services to deliver,
erect, place, and install all equipment
and apparatus furnished.
C. Damaged Surfaces:
1. At completion of the work, all
mechanical material and equipment
furnished shall be inspected for damage.
a. Repair damaged factory finishes to
match adjacent, undamaged areas.
b. Replace deformed metal cabinets,
jackets, and enclosures with new
items.
Finish shall match similar
undamaged items.
3.03
TESTING, CLEANING AND CERTIFICATION:
A. Cleanup:
1. At completion of the work, check and
thoroughly clean all equipment.
a. Clean coils and plenums.
b. Clean in, under, and around
equipment.
c. Clean exposed surfaces of piping,
ducts, and hangers.
d. Clean equipment cabinets and
enclosures.
e. Provide and install new filters for
equipment.
B. Project Closeout:
1. Verify that all work has been completed
prior to requesting final walkthrough,
including Contractor’s preliminary review
of mechanical system start-up and
acceptance checklists.
3.04
COMMISSIONING:
A. Training and Demonstration: Schedule
instructional meetings for the project’s
facilities and maintenance personnel on the
proper operation and maintenance of
mechanical systems. Provide the project
manager a minimum of 5 days notice prior
to any training, demonstration, or testing.
15010-1
15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A
General:
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically
applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to
Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The
uniform
general
conditions,
supplementary general conditions, and Division
1 of the Specifications apply to the work
specified in this Section.
B. All work covered by this Section of these
Specifications shall be accomplished in
accordance with all applicable provisions of
the Contract Documents and any addenda or
directives which may be issued herewith, or
otherwise.
1.03
GENERAL:
A. The Contractor shall execute all work
hereinafter
specified
or
indicated
on
accompanying Drawings.
Contractor shall
provide all equipment necessary and usually
furnished in connection with such work and
systems whether or not mentioned specifically
herein or on the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting
his material and apparatus into the building
and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to
conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all
obstructions, to conform to the details of the
installation and thereby to provide an
integrated satisfactory operating installation.
C. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated
Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their
nature, and are not intended to show every
connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in
its exact location. These details are subject to
the requirements of standards referenced
elsewhere in these specifications, and structural
and architectural conditions. The Contractor
shall carefully investigate structural and finish
conditions and shall coordinate the separate
trades in order to avoid interference between
the various phases of work. Work shall be
organized and laid out so that it will be
concealed in furred chases and suspended
ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building,
unless specifically noted to be exposed. All
exposed work shall be installed parallel or
perpendicular to the lines of the building unless
otherwise noted.
1.04
DEFINITIONS: Not used
1.05
PERMITS,
INSPECTIONS:
UTILITY
CONNECTIONS
AND
A. General: Refer to DIVISION 1 for construction
phasing and time increments.
B. Fees and Costs: If, during the course of the
construction, a need arises to buy utilities, the
Contractor shall pay all fees attendant thereto.
If City or privately owned utility piping or
electrical cable needs to be extended,
relocated, or terminated, the Contractor will pay
all permits and construction/inspection fees
associated with that particular work.
C. If inspections by City personnel are
specifically required, then the Contractor is
responsible for any fees or permits in connection
to those requirements.
D. Compliance: The Contractor shall comply in
every respect with all requirements of National
Fire
Protection
Association,
local
Fire
Department regulations and utility company
requirements. In no case does this relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility of complying
with these Specifications and Drawings where
specified conditions are of higher quality than
the requirements of the above-specified
authorities.
Where requirements of the
Specifications and Drawings are more lenient
than the requirements of the above authorities
having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make
installations in compliance with the requirements
of the above authorities with no extra
compensation.
1.06
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. All dimensional information related to new
structures shall be taken from the appropriate
Drawings. All dimensional information related to
existing facilities shall be taken from actual
measurements made by the Contractor on the
site.
B. The interrelation of the Specifications, the
Drawings, and the schedules are as follows: The
Specifications determine the nature and setting
10/18/11
of the several materials, the Drawings establish
the quantities, dimensions and details, and the
schedules give the performance characteristics.
If the Contractor requires additional clarification,
he shall request it in writing, following the
contractually prescribed
information
flow
requirements.
C. Should the Drawings or Specifications
conflict within themselves, or with each other,
the better quality, or greater size or quantity of
work or materials shall be performed or
furnished.
1.07
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall
be new, free from all defects, suitable for the
intended use, and of the best quality of their
respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall
be
installed
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturer's recommendations and the best
standard practice for the type of work involved.
All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled
in their respective trades, and the installations
shall provide a neat, precise appearance.
Materials and/or equipment damaged in
shipment or otherwise damaged prior to
installation shall not be repaired at the job site
but shall be replaced with new materials and/or
equipment.
1.08
7. NFPA No. 54, Gas Appliances, Piping,
National Fuel Gas Code
8. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code
9. NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Signaling Systems
10. NFPA No. 78, Lightning Protection Code
11. NFPA No. 88A, Standard for Parking
Structures
12. NFPA No. 90A, Air Conditioning Systems
13. NFPA No. 91, Blower & Exhaust Systems
14. NFPA No. 99, Health Care Facilities
15 NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code
16. NFPA No. 200, Series, Building Construction
17. NFPA No. 211, Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vent
Systems
18. NFPA No. 241, Standard for Safeguarding
Construction,
Alteration
and
Demolition
Operations
19. NFPA No. 255, Method of Test of Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
20. NFPA No. 258, Standard Research Test
Method for Determining Smoke Generation of
Solid Materials
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. A40.8, National Plumbing Code
2. B31.1, Power Piping
3. B9.1,
Safety
Code
for
Mechanical
Refrigeration
D. American Gas Association Publications
(AGA): Directory of Approved Gas Appliances
and Tested Accessories
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The "Authority Having Jurisdiction" over the
project described by these documents is the
Owner. As such, it is required that the installation
shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in
the latest editions of the all relevant codes and
standards, which are made a part of these
Specifications. All referenced codes and
standards shall be those current at the date of
issue of the design documents.
B. National
Fire
Standards (NFPA):
Protection
Association
1. NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler System, Installation
2. NFPA No. 14, Standpipes and Hose Systems
3. NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps
4. NFPA No. 37, Stationary Combustion Engines
& Gas Turbines
5. NFPA No. 45, Fire Protection for Laboratories
Using Chemicals
6. NFPA No.
51,
Welding
&
Cutting,
Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems
E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes
F. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
Standards (ARI):
All standards related to
refrigeration and air conditioning equipment
and piping furnished under these Specifications.
G. Sheet
Metal
and
Air
Conditioning
Contractors
National
Association,
Inc.
(SMACNA): All current editions of applicable
manuals and standards (See Sections 15890
and 15910).
H. Air Moving and Conditioning Association
(AMCA):
All current editions of applicable
manuals and standards.
I. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):
All current editions of applicable manuals and
standards.
J. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
All current editions of applicable manuals and
standards.
K. National
Electrical
Manufacturers'
Association (NEMA):
All current editions of
applicable manuals and standards.
L. International Building Code, (Includes the
International Mechanical and International
Plumbing Codes)
M. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
N. ADA and ANSI Standards.
protect equipment from rust, drip, humidity, and
dust damage.
B. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor
shall be responsible for the coordination and
proper relation of his work to the building
structure and to the work of all trades. The
Contractor shall visit the premises and become
thoroughly familiar with all details of the work
and working conditions, to verify all dimensions
in the field, and to advise the Architect/Engineer
of any discrepancy before performing any work.
Adjustments to the work required in order to
facilitate a coordinated installation shall be
made at no additional cost to the Owner or the
Architect/Engineer.
Q. Refer to Specification Sections hereinafter
bound for additional Codes and Standards.
1.09
COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES AND WITH
OTHER CONTRACTORS:
R. All materials and workmanship shall comply
with all applicable state and national codes,
Specifications, and industry standards. In all
cases where Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
have established standards for a particular type
material, such material shall comply with these
standards. Evidence of compliance shall be the
UL "label" or "listing" under Re-Examination
Service.
A. Each
trade,
subcontractor,
and/or
Contractor must work in harmony with the
various other trades, subcontractors and/or
Contractors on the job as may be required to
facilitate the progress to the best advantage of
the job as a whole. Each trade, subcontractor,
and/or Contractor must pursue its work promptly
and carefully so as not to delay the general
progress of the job. This Contractor shall work in
harmony with Contractors working under other
contracts on the premises.
S. The Contract Documents are intended to
comply with the aforementioned rules and
regulations; however, some discrepancies may
occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the
Contractor
shall
immediately
notify
the
Architect/Engineer
in
writing
of
said
discrepancies and apply for an interpretation.
Should the discovery and notification occur
after the execution of a contract, any additional
work required for compliance with said
regulations shall be paid for as covered by
Division 1 of these Contract Documents,
providing no work of fabrication of materials
has been accomplished in a manner of
noncompliance.
Should
the
Contractor
fabricate and/or install materials and/or
workmanship in such a manner that does not
comply with the applicable codes, rules and
regulations, the Contractor who performed such
work shall bear all costs arising in correcting
these deficiencies to comply with said rules and
regulations.
1.08
GENERAL
MATERIALS
REQUIREMENTS:
AND
EQUIPMENT
A. Storage at Site: The Contractor shall not
receive material or equipment at the job site
until there is suitable space provided to properly
1.10
SUPERVISION:
A. Each Contractor and subcontractor shall
keep a competent superintendent or foreman
on the job at all times. (Refer to the Uniform
General Conditions for additional information
concerning supervision.)
B. It shall be the responsibility of each
superintendent to study all Drawings and
familiarize himself with the work to be done by
other trades. He shall coordinate his work with
other trades and before material is fabricated or
installed, make sure that his work will not cause
an interference with another trade.
Where
interferences are encountered, they shall be
resolved at the job site by the superintendents
involved.
Where interferences cannot be
resolved without major changes to the
Drawings, the matter shall be referred to the A/E
for ruling.
1.11
SITE OBSERVATION:
A. Site observation by the Architect/Engineer is
for the express purpose of verifying compliance
by the Contractor with the Contract Documents,
and shall not be construed as construction
supervision or indication of approval of the
manner or location in which the work is being
performed as being a safe practice or place.
1.12
PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS
A. The specifications determine the nature and
setting of materials and equipment.
The
drawings establish quantities, dimensions and
details.
1.13
RECORDS FOR OWNER:
A. The Contractor shall maintain a set of
"blueline" prints in the Field Office for the sole
purpose of recording "installed" conditions.
Daily note all changes made in these Drawings
in connection with the final installation including
exact dimensioned locations of all new
underground utilities, services and systems and
all uncovered existing active and inactive
piping outside the building.
B. At Contract completion the Contractor shall
provide a set of reproducible photographic
mylar drawings, plus the photo negatives of the
revised drawings. The contractor shall transfer
the information from the "blueline" prints
maintained as described above, and turn over
this neatly marked set of reproducible Drawings
representing the "as installed" work to the
Architect/Engineers
for
verification
and
subsequent transmittal to the Owner.
The
Contractor shall refer to Division 1 of these
Specifications, and to the Uniform General
Conditions, for additional information. These
Drawings shall include as a minimum:
1. Addendum written drawing changes.
2. Addendum supplementary drawings.
3. Accurate, dimensioned locations of all
underground utilities, services and systems.
4. Identification of equipment work shown on
Alternates as to whether alternates were
accepted and work actually installed.
5. Change Order written drawing changes.
6. Change Order supplementary drawings.
C. Electronic Media:
1. In lieu of the drawings described above in
1.33B, it is preferred the contractor submit one
set of blueline prints, one set of vellum
reproduciables, and one set of discs containing
all the drawings in AUTOCAD 14 format.
D. "As installed" mylars shall bear a stamp, "stick
on decal", or lettered title block generally
located in lower right hand corner of Drawing
entitled "AS INSTALLED DRAWING" with Company
name of the installing trade Subcontractor and
with a place for the date and the name of the
responsible company representative.
E. In addition to the above, the Contractor
shall accumulate during the progress of the job
the following data, in duplicate, prepared in a
neat brochure or packet folder and turn over to
the
Architect/Engineer
for
review,
and
subsequent delivery to the Owner.
1. All
warranties
and
guarantees
and
manufacturers' directions on equipment and
material covered by the Contract.
2. Two sets of operating instructions for heating
and cooling and other mechanical and
electrical systems. Operating instructions shall
also
include
recommended
preventative
maintenance
and
seasonal
changeover
procedures.
3. Valve tag charts and diagrams specified
herein.
4. Approved wiring diagrams and control
diagrams representing "as installed" conditions.
5. Copies of approved Shop Drawings.
6. Any and all other data and/or drawings
required as submittals during construction.
7. Repair parts list of all major items and
equipment including name, address and
telephone number of local supplier or agent.
F. All of the above data shall be submitted to
the Architect/Engineer for approval, and shall
be
corrected
as
instructed
by
the
Architect/Engineer prior to submission of the final
request for payment.
1.14
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. General: Cut and patch walls, floors, etc.,
resulting from work in existing construction or by
failure to provide proper openings or recesses in
new construction.
B. Methods of cutting: Openings cut through
concrete and masonry shall be made with
masonry saws and/or core drills and at such
locations acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
Impact-type equipment shall not be used except
where
specifically
acceptable
to
the
Architect/Engineer.
Openings in pre-cast
concrete slabs for pipes, conduits, outlet boxes,
etc., shall be core drilled to exact size.
C. Restoration: All openings shall be restored
to "as-new" condition under the appropriate
Specification Section for the materials involved,
and shall match remaining
materials and/or finishes.
1.15
surrounding
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL:
A. Excavation (See Divisions 0 and 1 for special
requirements related to excavation and
trenching.):
1. The
Mechanical
and
Electrical
subcontractors shall perform all excavations of
every description, for their particular installations
and of whatever substances encountered, to
the depths indicated on the Drawings and/or
required for the installation of piping, conduit,
utility systems, etc. All exterior lines shall be
installed with a minimum cover of 24", unless
otherwise indicated.
Generally, more cover
shall be provided if grade will permit.
All
excavation materials not required for backfill or
fill shall be removed and wasted as acceptable
to the Construction Inspector. All excavations
shall be made only by open cut. The banks of
trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as
possible and where required, shall be properly
sheeted and braced. Trenches shall be not less
than 12" wider nor more than 16" wider than the
outside edges of the pipe to be laid therein,
and shall be excavated true to line so that a
clear space not less than 6" nor more than 8" in
width is provided on each side of the pipe. For
sewers, the maximum width of trench specified
applies to the width at and below the level may
be made as wide as necessary for sheeting and
bracing, and the proper installation of the work.
2. All grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be
controlled to prevent surface ground water from
flowing into the excavations.
Any water
accumulated in the excavations shall be
removed by pumping or other acceptable
method. During excavation, material suitable
for back-filling shall be stacked in an orderly
manner a sufficient distance back from edges of
trenches to avoid overloading and prevent
slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted and removed from the job
site as directed by the Construction Inspector.
3. All shoring and sheeting required to perform
and protect the excavations and to safeguard
employees and/or adjacent structures shall be
provided.
4. All surplus materials removed in these trenching
operations becomes the property of the
contractor, and shall be disposed of at the
expense of the contractor, at a legal disposal
site, off of the campus.
B. Back-filling:
1. Trenches shall not be back-filled until all
required tests are performed and until the
piping, utilities systems, etc., as installed are
certified by the Owner's inspector to conform to
the requirements specified hereinafter.
The
trenches shall be carefully back-filled with sand
to a depth of 12 inches above the top of the
pipe. The next layer and subsequent layers of
backfill may be excavated materials approved
for back-filling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy
clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other
approved materials free from large clods of
earth or stones larger than 1 1/2" in diameter,
flooded until the pipe has cover of not less than
one foot. The remainder of the backfill material
shall then be thrown into the trenches,
moistened, and tamped or flooded in one foot
layers.
Blasted rock, broken concrete or
pavement, and large boulders shall not be used
as backfill material. Any trenches improperly
back-filled, or where settlement occurs, shall be
reopened to the depth required for proper
compaction, then refilled and mounded over,
and smoothed off.
2. Backfill under concrete slabs-on-fill shall be
as specified above, shall be gravel, or shall be
other such materials more suitable for the
application. Installation and compaction shall
be as required for compatibility with adjacent
materials.
C. Opening and Reclosing Pavement and
Lawns: Where excavation requires the opening
of existing walks, streets, drives, other existing
pavement, or lawns, such surfaces shall be cut
as required to install new lines and to make new
connections to existing lines. The sizes of the cut
shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the
work to be accomplished. After the installation
of the new work is completed and the
excavation has been back-filled and flooded,
the area shall be patched, using materials to
match those cut out.
The patches shall
thoroughly bond with the original surfaces and
shall be level with them, and shall meet all the
requirements established by the authorities
having jurisdiction over such areas.
Excavation in Vicinity of Trees: All trees including low
hanging limbs within the immediate area of
construction shall be adequately protected to a
height of at least 5 ft. to prevent damage from
the construction operations and/or equipment.
All excavation within the outermost limb radius
of all trees shall be accomplished with extreme
care. All roots located within this outermost limb
radius shall be brought to the attention of the
Construction Inspector before they are cut or
damaged in any way.
The Construction
Inspector will give immediate instructions for the
disposition of same.
All stumps and roots
encountered in the excavation, which are not
within the outermost limb radius of existing trees,
shall be cut back to a distance of not less than
18" from the outside of any concrete structure or
pipeline. No chips, parts of stumps, or loose
rock shall be left in the excavation. Where
stumps and roots have been cut out of the
excavation, clean compacted dry bank sand
shall be back-filled and tamped.
1.16
EXISTING FACILITIES
The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or
damage to the existing facilities caused by the
Contractor and the Contractor’s workers, and
shall be responsible for replacing or repairing
such loss or damage. The Contractor shall send
proper notices, make necessary arrangements,
and perform other services required for the care,
protection and in service maintenance of all
plumbing, heating, air conditioning and
ventilating services for existing facilities. The
Contractor shall erect temporary barricades,
with necessary safety devices, as required to
protect from injury, removing all such temporary
protection upon completion of the work.
The Contractor shall provide temporary or new
services to all existing facilities to remain as
required to maintain their proper operation
when normal services are disrupted as a result of
the work being accomplished under this project.
1.17
DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION
The Contractor shall modify, remove and/or
relocate all materials and items so indicated on
the Drawings or required by the installation of
new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling
shall be conducted in a manner as to produce
maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall
remain the property of the Owner, and shall be
delivered to such destination or otherwise
disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials
and/or items scheduled for relocation and
which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and
restored to good operative condition. The
Contractor may at his/her discretion, and upon
the approval of the Owner, substitute new
materials and/or items of like design and quality
in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated.
All items which are to be relocated shall be
carefully removed in reverse to original assembly
or placement and protected until relocated. The
Contractor shall clean and repair and provide
all new materials, fittings and appurtenances
required to complete the relocations and to
restore to good operative order. All relocations
shall be performed by workers skilled in the work
and in accordance with standard practice of
the trades involved.
When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse
are found to be in a damaged condition
before work has been started on dismantling,
the Contractor shall call the attention of the
Owner to such items and receive further
instructions before removal. Items damaged in
repositioning operations are the Contractors
responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced
by the Contractor as approved by the Owner,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
Service lines and wiring items to be removed,
salvaged or relocated shall be removed to
points indicated on the Drawing specified or
acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and
wiring not schedules for reuse shall be removed
to the points at which reuse is to be continued
or service is to remain. Such services shall be
sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or
disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to
the Owner. All disconnections or connections
into the existing facilities shall be done in such a
manner as to result in minimum interruption of
services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to
existing areas or facilities, which must remain in
operation during the construction period, shall
not be interrupted without prior specific
approval of the Owner as hereinbefore
specified.
1.18
TESTS:
A. The Contractor shall make, at no additional
cost to the Owner, any tests deemed necessary
by
the
inspection
departments
having
jurisdiction, and in the National Fire Protection
Association, ASTM, etc. Standards listed. The
Contractor shall provide all equipment,
materials, and labor for making such tests.
Reasonable amounts of fuel and electrical
energy costs for system tests will be paid by the
Owner. Fuel and electrical energy costs for
system adjustment and tests which follow
beneficial occupancy by the Owner will be
borne by the Owner.
B. Additional tests specified hereinafter under
the various Specification Sections shall be
made.
C. The Construction Inspector shall be notified
in writing at least 10 working days prior to each
test and other Specification requirements
requiring action on the part of the Construction
Inspector. All equipment shall be placed in
operation and tested for proper automatic
control requirements before
agency starts their work.
the
balancing
D. Maintain
specified.
as
hereinafter
Log
of
Tests
E. See Specifications hereinafter for additional
tests and requirements.
1.19
LOG OF TESTS:
A. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by
the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall
include date, time, personnel, description, and
extent of system tested, test conditions, test
results, specified results, and other pertinent
data.
Data shall be delivered to the
Architect/Engineer
as
specified
under
"Requirements for Final Acceptance". All Test
Log entries shall be legibly signed by the Project
Contractor or his authorized job superintendent.
1.20
COOPERATION AND CLEANUP:
A. It shall be the responsibility of each trade to
cooperate fully with the other trades on the job
to help keep the job site in a clean and safe
condition. At the end of each day's work, each
trade shall properly store all of his tools,
equipment and materials and shall clean his
debris from the job. Upon the completion of the
job, each trade shall immediately remove all of
his tools, equipment, any surplus materials and
all debris caused by that portion of the work.
B
Products:
Not Used
C
Execution:
Not Used
15050-1
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. – General:
9. Steel butt welding fittings: ANSI B16.9; ASTM
A234 Class B.
10. Cast iron threaded fittings: ANSI B16.4; ASTM
A126-66 Class B.
11. Malleable iron threaded fittings: ANSI B16.3
or ANSI B16.39; ASTM A197.
12. Mechanical grooved joints:
a. Couplings (malleable):
ASTM A47,
Grade II.
b. Gaskets: Molded synthetic rubber, ASTM
D735, Grade No. R615BZ.
c. Bolts and nuts: Provide oval neck track
head type bolts with hexagonal heavy
nuts, ASTM A183.
d. Fittings (malleable): ASTM A47, Grade II.
13. Seamless copper water tube: ASTM B88.
14. Wrought copper or bronze solder-joint
pressure fittings: ANSI B16.22.
15. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure
fittings: ANSI B16.18.
16. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper
tubes: ANSI B16.26.
17. Red brass pipe: ANSI H26.1; ASTM B43.
18. Cast bronze threaded fittings: ANSI B16.15.
19. Bronze flanges and flanged fittings: ANSI
B16.24.
20. Weldolets, threadolets and sockolets: ANSI
B16.9 and ANSI B31.1; ASTM A105G2.
21. Wrought copper and wrought copper alloy
solder-joint drainage fittings: ANSI B16.29.
22. Plastic pipe: Virgin PVC 1120 2120; Dept. of
Commerce Standard No. 256-63 and 20760; ASTM D1785-64T; or CPVC; approved by
National Sanitation Foundation Laboratories, Inc. for potable water.
23. Plastic pipe fittings: Virgin PVC, Type I or
Type II, Grade I injection molded; ASTM
D1784-60T; or CPVC; approved by National
Sanitation Foundation Laboratories, Inc. for
potable water.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Except as otherwise approved in advance by
the Architect, or called for elsewhere, provide
labor and materials for the work of Division 15
as described in this Section or otherwise required
for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
General
Conditions,
Supplementary
1.2 SUBMITTALS
01340 of these Specifications, and make
submittals required in other Sections of these
Specifications.
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed
for proper performance of the work.
B – Products:
A. Provide items complying with the current issue of
the following standards:
1. Copper drainage tube (DWV): ASTM B306.
2. Cast bronze solder joint drainage fittings
(DWV): ANSI 16.23.
3. Steel pipe: ANSI B36.20; ASTM A120; ASTM
A53, Grade "B", Schedule 40 or 80 as
specified.
4. Cast iron threaded drainage fittings: ANSI
B16.12.
5. Cast iron flanged joint fittings: ANSI B16.1 or
B16b; AWWA C100; ASTM A126 Class B.
6. Ductile cast iron flanged joint fittings: ANSI
B16.1 or B16.5; ASTM A395.
7. Ductile cast iron threaded fittings: ASTM
A395.
8. Steel flanged joint fittings: ANSI B16.5; ASTM
A105, ASTM A181.
2.2
UNIONS
A. Required on inlet and outlet of all apparatus or
equipment having screwed and/or soldered
connections 50 mm (2") and smaller.
1. Steel pipe:
a. Malleable iron, 300 pound AAR railroad
type; brass to iron seat, ground joint;
b. Stockham Fig. 895 or Fig. 896 or equal,
or ductile iron, 300 pound; brass to iron
seat, ground joint; Stockham Fig. D-694,
or equal.
2. Copper tubing:
10/18/11
01421-2
a. Ground joint, cast bronze;
b. Mueller Type C-107, Nibco No. 633 or
equal, except for refrigeration.
3. Grooved pipe couplings:
a. Where specified elsewhere, or shown on
Drawings, provide Victaulic No. 75 or 77,
Stockham, or equal couplings.
b. Provide couplings of cast malleable iron
ASTM A47, or ductile iron ASTM A536,
with elastomer type ASTM C2000 gasket
used for water service to 109.8 degrees
C (230 oF), and with bolts and nuts
conforming to ASTM A183.
2.3 FLANGES AND GASKETS
A. Required on inlet and outlet of all apparatus or
equipment having screwed, welded and/or
soldered connection 63 mm (2-1/2") and larger.
1. Welded steel pipe:
a. Class 68 or 136 kg (150 or 300 pound)
ANSI forged steel welding type.
b. Provide flat face when used with
companion flat face cast iron flange
and raised face when used with
companion raised face flange.
2. Threaded steel pipe: Class 150 ductile cast
iron or 113.4 kg (250 pound) ANSI threaded
cast iron type.
3. Copper tubing: Class 68 or 136 kg (150 or
300 pound) ANSI bronze companion
flanges, except for refrigeration piping.
4. Gaskets:
a. 1.6 mm (1/16"), suitable for service
intended; factory cut for 57 kg (125 lb)
(SWP), 68 kg (150 lb) (WWP) or 113 kg
(250 lb) or 136 kg (300 lb) flange size.
b. Provide gasket of full flange width with bolt
holes when flat face flanges are used, and
provide ring type gasket when raised face
flanges are used.
2.4 DIELECTRIC UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Sizes 13 mm through 50 mm (1/2" through 2"):
1. Ferrous pipe to copper tubing: Epco Model
FX, or equal.
2. Ferrous pipe to brass pipe: Epco Model EA,
or equal.
B. Sizes 63 mm (2-1/2") and larger:
1. Ferrous pipe to copper tubing: Epco Model
GX, or equal.
2. Ferrous pipe to brass pipe: Epco Model GA.
2.5 NIPPLES
A. Comply with requirements of U.S. Dept. of
Commerce Commercial Standard CS-5, "Pipe
Nipples: Brass, Copper, Steel".
1. Use nipples from packages which bear
manufacturer's label or tag reading:
"Guaranteed pipe nipples conforming to CS5 made from new pipe" or other words to
this effect.
2. Provide nipples of same material and weight
as connecting piping system.
3. The use of close nipples is prohibited.
2.6 VALVES
A. Identification: Manufacturer's name and model,
figure or drawing number specified are for
identification of types, quality, and construction.
B. Working pressures:
1. Provide valves for not less than specified
ANSI classification.
2. Provide higher working pressure where
called for in this Specification or on the
Drawings.
3. Provide valves designed for the service in
which installed.
C. Connections:
1. Valves 50 mm (2") and smaller shall have
threaded end connections or solder end
connections where copper tube is permitted.
2. Valves 63 mm (2-1/2") and larger shall have
flange or steel butt weld end construction,
where applicable.
D. Hot water supply and return:
1. Ball valves 50 mm (2") and smaller:
a. Provide Class 150 bronze valves (600 psi
WOG) with TFE seats, bronze trim and
threaded ends.
b. Valves shall be 3 piece.
c. Nibco T-595Y, Apollo 82, Powell 4201T,
or equal.
2. Gate valves 63 mm (2-1/2") and larger:
a. Provide class 125 iron body, bronze
mounted,
non-rising
stem,
bolted
bonnet, solid wedge disc, flange end,
furnish complete with needle and slot
indicator;
b. Stockham Fig. No. G-612, Nibco F-619 or
equal.
3. O.S.&Y. valves 63 mm (2-1/2") and larger:
mounted, outside screw and yoke, rising
stem, bolted bonnet, solid wedge disc,
flange end;
b. Stockham Fig. No. G-623, Nibco F-617-0
or equal.
4. Globe and angle valves 50 mm (2") and
smaller:
10/18/11
01421-3
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
a. Provide class 150 bronze, inside screw,
rising stem, union bonnet, renewable
and regrindable stainless steel disc and
seat ring, heat treated to 500 Brinell
hardness, screw end;
b. Stockham Fig. No. B-22T, Nibco Fig. No.
T-235Y, Stockham B222, Nibco T-335Y or
equal.
Globe and angle valves 63 mm (2-1/2")
and larger:
mounted, outside screw, rising stem,
bolted
bonnet,
renewable
and
regrindable disc and seat ring, flange
end;
b. Stockham Fig. No. G-512, Nibco F-718B
or equal.
Butterfly valves shall have drilled and
tapped lugs to permit operation as an
effective shutoff valve when connecting
piping or equipment is removed.
a. Wafer type butterfly valves shall not be
used.
b. For butterfly valves 63 mm (2-1/2") and
larger,
provide
150
psi
positive
bubbletight shutoff, class 125 cast iron or
ductile iron construction with aluminum
bronze disc, Type 316 stainless steel stem,
self-lubricating bushings, resilient seat
suitable for at least 250 oF.
c. Valves 63 mm through 150 mm (2-1/2"
through 6") used for shutoff:
(1) Provide Stockham LG762, Nibco LD
2000, Centerline Series LT or equal.
Lubricated plug valves 50 mm (2") and
smaller:
a. Provide 90 kg (200 lb) WOG, iron body,
lubricated tapered plug, screwed gland,
regular pattern, wrench operated,
screwed end;
b. Nordstrom Fig. No. 114 or equal;
c. Balancing valves shall have indicator
arc and adjustable stop.
Lubricated plug valves 63 mm (2-1/2") and
larger:
lubricated tapered plug, screwed or
bolted gland, regular pattern, wrench
operated, flange end; Nordstrom Fig.
No. 115 or Fig. No. 165 or equal;
b. For valves 200 mm (8") and larger,
provide gear operation; Nordstrom Fig.
No. 169 or equal;
Nonlubricated plug valves 50 mm (2") and
smaller:
a. Provide eccentric action, 80 kg (175 lb)
WOG, iron body, wrench operated,
permanently
lubricated
bearings,
screwed end, viton resilient seat and
stem seal;
b. De Zurik Series 400 or equal;
10. Check valves, swing type, 50 mm (2") and
smaller:
a. Provide class 200 bronze, Y-pattern,
renewable and regrindable disc, screw
end;
b. Stockham Fig. No. B-345, Nibco T-473 or
equal.
11. Check valves, swing type, 63 mm (2-1/2")
and larger:
mounted, bolted cap, renewable and
regrindable
bronze
seat
ring,
composition disc, flange end; Stockham
Fig. No. G-931, Nibco F-918 or equal.
12. Check valves, non-slam type:
bronze trim, spring loaded, center
guided flange end.
b. Size 63 mm (2-1/2") and smaller: WilliamsHager Fig. No. 329, Miller 162 or equal;
c. Sizes 75 mm (3") and larger: WilliamsHager Fig. No. 636, Miller 162 or equal.
2.7 HANGERS
A. Manufacturer's name and figure number
specified are for identification of types, equality
and construction.
B. Except as otherwise indicated or shown on the
Drawings, provide hangers for horizontal pipe
sizes 250 mm (10") and smaller as follows:
1. Steel pipe over 75 mm (3") pipe size:
Carbon steel, black, clevis type, PHD No.
450, Grinnell 269 or equal; except that
adjustable carbon steel band hanger, PHD
No. 180, Grinnell 269 or equal may be used
for pipe sizes 75 mm (3") and smaller.
2. Uninsulated copper tubing over 75 mm (3")
pipe size:
a. Copper plated or plastic coated carbon
steel, clevis type, PHD No. 442 or 453,
Grinnell CT-65 or equal.
b. PHD No. 182 or 183, Grinnell CT-269 or
equal may be used for pipe sizes 75 mm
(3") and smaller.
3. Plastic pipe and tubing: Carbon
steel,
black,
clevis
type
in
conjunction with 2.4 m (8'-0") long
plastic pipe channel.
4. Use trapeze hangers for all pipe sizes
300 mm (12") and larger.
10/18/11
01421-4
2.8 ATTACHMENTS TO BUILDING STRUCTURE
A. Concrete slabs:
1. Inserts set in forms before concrete is poured.
2. Phillips "Red Head", Hilti-Kwik Bolt, or equal,
self drilling anchors as approved by the
Architect.
B. Structural steel members:
1. Bottom flanges of beams:
a. Grinnell Figure 228, Elcen 95/207P or
equal carbon steel adjustable beam
clamp, size as required by beam flange.
b. Rod tapping as required by hanger or
support.
2. Bottom flanges of channel iron:
a. Grinnell Figure 226 or equal, malleable
iron clamp and hook rod adapter plate,
Figure 157 extension, carbon steel rod
and nut;
b. Size as required for flange, rod size as
required by hanger or support.
C. Structural wood members:
1. Hangers supported by wood structure shall
be attached by manufactured steel or
malleable iron side beam brackets or
connectors.
2. Secure bracket to wood structural member
by wood screws or lagscrew of size and
quantity
as
recommended
by
the
manufacturer for the load to be carried.
3. Thread hanger rods into angle bracket and
secure with lock nut or provide nut top and
bottom of the angle bracket.
2.9 SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING
A. Where piping or equipment is to be supported
and no structural support member is available
to fasten to, provide supplementary structural
framing to accommodate supports.
1. All
supplementary
framing
shall
be
approved
by
the
Architect
before
installation.
2. Contractor shall provide information as to
load to be carried and method of fastening
the supplementary framing to the primary
structural framing.
C – Execution:
3.1 GENERAL
A. All materials and installation shall be in
accordance with the ANSI B31.1 Code for
Pressure Piping for the particular field of service
intended.
B. Threaded joints for steel pipe:
1. Threaded ends shall conform to the ANSI
Standard for Pipe Threads B2.1.
2. Ream each piece of pipe carefully prior to
erection, and cut threads with new, clean
dies.
3. Carefully inspect each piece of pipe or
fitting before installing.
4. Piping compound shall be compatible with
fluid to be contained within pipe; use red
lead or teflon unless otherwise required to
meet criterion.
5. Apply compound smoothly and uniformly
over male pipe threads; female pipe threads
in fittings and valves shall not have
compound applied.
6. After jointing, not more than two threads
shall remain exposed.
C. Threaded joints for brass pipe:
1. Same as for threaded steel and wrought iron
pipe, except use friction clamps and friction
wrenches to minimize marring of pipe.
D. Solder joints for copper tubing:
1. Solder ends shall conform to ANSI Standard
for Solder Joint Fittings B16.18.
2. Surfaces to be joined shall be free of oil,
grease and oxides.
3. Suitably clean socket end of fittings and end
of piping with emery cloth to remove oxides.
4. Carefully measure male and female ends to
be jointed to assure proper fit for capillary
action.
5. Use flux compatible with and recommended
by the solder manufacturer for the solder to
be used.
6. Sparingly apply flux in an even coat to the
inside of the socket and the outside of the
tube.
7. Insert tubing into socket to shoulder, and
slightly rotate to ensure even distribution of
flux.
8. Open valves during soldering, and remove
portions of valves and appurtenances
which could be damaged by heat during
soldering.
3.2 WELDED JOINTS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. Perform all welding in accordance with
American
Welding
Society
(AWS)
and
governing codes and regulations for pressure
piping conforming to ASME Code.
1. Quality and appearance of welds shall be
subject to the approval of the Architect.
2. Only employ welders who have current
certification from an independent testing
laboratory stating that they have passed the
qualification test in reference to the type of
welding to be utilized and the material to be
10/18/11
01421-5
welded and in accordance with ASME
Section 9.
3. Present the certification to the Architect upon
demand.
4. Butt welds shall be of the single "V" type with
ends of pipe and fittings beveled
approximately 37-1/2 degrees.
5. Carefully line up piping before welding is
started and maintain the alignment during
welding.
6. Welds for flanges and socket fittings shall be
of the fillet type with a throat dimension not
less than the pipe wall thickness.
7. Where slip-on flanges are called for, they
shall be welded inside and out.
8. Welding carbon steel pipe 63 mm (2-1/2")
and larger by the coated metallic arc
welding process using electrodes.
9. Make the hot pass immediately following the
cleaning of the stringer bead.
10. Keep welding generators in first-class
condition so they will supply welding current
having satisfactory characteristics.
11. Welding on carbon steel pipe 50 mm (2")
and smaller may be done with the
oxyacetylene process.
12. Keep welding rod in sealed containers,
protected from moisture.
B. Make joints in welded pipe by the oxyacetylene
or electric arc process as described below; all
welding shall be continuous around the pipe.
C. Make repair of welds either from the inside or the
outside of the pipe, whichever method is most
accessible.
1. Remove defects and prepare the pipe for
rewelding by chipping or by torch gouging.
2. If the pipe is chipped, the bead shall first be
chipped flush with the pipe wall; then the
defect shall be completely removed by
chipping with a sharp nosed tool; the
diameter of the chipping edge shall not
exceed 9.5 mm (3/8").
3. Maintain all chipping tools in the best
condition.
4. Immediately prior to rewelding any cutout
defect, preheat the pipe to at least 93
degrees C (200 o F), but not in excess of 204
degrees C (400 o F).
5. Use tempil sticks to determine the proper
preheating temperature.
6. Perform all repair welding using an electrode
not exceeding 4 mm (5/32") in diameter.
7. Make the junctions of the final bead or
repair welds with the pipe wall or with old
weld material smooth and free of any
abrupt change in contour.
3.3 MECHANICAL GROOVED JOINT
A. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications contained in latest
published literature.
1. Before assembly of couplings. lightly coat
pipe ends with cup grease or graphite paste
to facilitate installation.
2. Perform the entire coupling installation in
accordance
with
the
manufacturer's
published literature.
3. Ream each piece of pipe carefully prior to
erection.
4. Carefully inspect each piece of pipe or
fitting before installing.
3.4 PVC PLASTIC PIPING JOINTS
A. All fittings shall be socket type for solvent
welding, except as specifically indicated
otherwise below.
1. Cut and square the pipe to exact lengths;
use sandpaper, file or a sharp knife to
remove burrs and saw marks.
2. Clean both joining surfaces with acetone,
methyl, ethyl, ketone, or a cleaner supplied
by the pipe manufacturer.
3. Solvent shall be Industrial Polychemical
Service #711, Manville Blue Solvent or equal,
and applied to outside of end of pipe and
to inside of fitting, uniformly covering the
entire area to be joined, plus a slight
overlap.
4. Use a natural bristle brush for applying the
cement.
5. Insert piping into socket to shoulder, giving a
half turn as it is being seated into the socket.
6. Allow 48 hours or more to dry before
pressure testing.
B. Use molded threaded fittings where a transition
from socket to N.P.T. thread is required.
1. Do not cut pipe threads into the plastic pipe.
2. Use teflon tape as thread lubricant on all
threaded joints, manufactured by Saunders
Engineering, pipe thread lube #783-B,
manufactured by Industrial Polychemical
Service, or equal.
C. On plastic to ferrous connections, work the
ferrous connection first; on plastic to copper
connections, work the copper connection first.
D. Do not use pipe wrenches in assembling plastic
pipe or fittings; where light wrench pressure is
required, use a strap wrench only.
3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General:
10/18/11
01421-6
1. Hold piping firmly in place by approved
hangers, supports and anchors.
2. All hangers and supports shall be of design
which will support the weight of pipe, fluid
and insulation.
3. Perforated steel band straps or hangers shall
not be permitted.
B. Hanger spacing: Support all horizontal mains
and pipes at maximum center distances as
indicated hereafter:
C. Locate supports or hangers adjacent to fittings
and, in addition to above hangers, support
piping at each offset or change of direction, at
ends of branches, at the base of riser pipes, and
along piping as required to prevent sags, bends
or vibration.
D. Hanger Rods:
1. Provide hanger rod of sizes not less than
those indicated below:
Pipe Size
Minimum Rod Diameter
20 mm to 50 mm (3/4" to 2")
9.5 mm (3/8")
63 mm to 88 mm (2-1/2" to 3-1/2") 13 mm (1/2")
100 mm and 125 mm (4" and 5") 16 mm (5/8")
150 mm (6")
20 mm (3/4")
200 mm and 250 mm (8" and 10")
22 mm or two 20 mm (7/8" or two 3/4")
300 mm (12")
Two 20 mm (Two 3/4")
350 mm and 400 mm (14" and 16")
22 mm (Two 7/8")
450 mm (18")
Two 25 mm (Two 1")
500 mm and 600 mm (20" and 24")
Two 31 mm (Two 1-1/4")
2. Fabricate hanger rods from threaded hot
rolled steel conforming to ASTM A107. Use
copper plated hanger rod and bolts when
connecting to copper plated hangers.
3. Increase hanger rods supporting trapeze
hangers in size as required to handle added
weight of multiple pipes.
When trapeze
hangers are used for multiple pipes, individually clamp or guide each pipe at each
trapeze hanger. Loading per hanger rod
shall never exceed the following:
Rod Diameter
lb)
lb)
9.5 mm (3/8 in)
13 mm (1/2 in)
16 mm (5/8 in)
20 mm (3/4 in)
25 mm (1 in)
31 mm (1-1/4 in)
38 mm (1-1/2 in)
227 kg (500 lb)
454 kg (1000 lb)
770 kg (1700 lb)
1180 kg (2600 lb)
2175 kg (4800 lb)
3630 kg (8000 lb)
4990 kg (11000
45 mm (1-3/4 in)
6800 kg (15000
50 mm (2 in)
E.
9100 kg (20000 lb)
4. Where spring hangers are required, support
only one pipe from a hanger or trapeze
hanger.
Inserts and beam clamps:
1. Support and guide all pipes from building
structural construction.
2. Furnish approved inserts or anchor bolts in
poured concrete.
3. Weight on any insert shall not exceed
maximum value recommended by the
manufacturer.
4. Where the load on the insert exceeds the
maximum
recommended
by
the
manufacturer, install multiple inserts and
fasten adequate structural steel tee or other
adequate structural member to the underside of concrete by use of bolts or studs and
nuts attached to the inserts.
5. Attach hanger rod to the structural steel
member using a fitting adequate for the
load.
6. In no case shall the load on the insert be
greater than the maximum recommended
by the manufacturer.
7. Pipe hangers supported from structural steel
shall utilize beam and channel clamps. In
no case shall the load on the clamp be
greater than the maximum recommended
by the manufacturer.
3.6 SUPPORT SHIELD FOR INSULATED PIPING AND
TUBING
A. Provide a support shield at each hanger and
support location for all insulated chilled water
and refrigeration piping and all insulated
copper tubing.
3.7 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION SADDLE
A. Provide a pipe covering protection saddle at
each hanger and support location for all
insulated steel warm and hot pipes, except
where "Support Shields" are otherwise called for.
Maximum Load
10/18/11
01421-7
3.8 PIPE ANCHORS, GUIDES AND EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Provide pipe anchors and guides where shown
on drawings and where they are otherwise
needed to prevent excessive movement of
piping and/or excessive strain on piping and
equipment connections.
1. Provide expansion loops and offsets in
piping as required to prevent excessive
strain or pipe displacement between
anchors, at piping take-offs, and at
equipment connections.
2. Provide spring hangers and guides where
shown on Drawings to prevent excessive
forces from being transmitted to building
structure.
3.9 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Slope steam and steam condensate piping in
the direction of flow.
B. Pipe steam relief valves without restrictions (full
size outlet area or greater) to discharge above
roof. Provide a cast iron drip pan elbow at
each steam relief valve.
C. Pipe water relief valves without restrictions (full
size outlet area or greater) and without traps to
an approved below-roof disposal area which is
remote from traffic patterns.
1. If an approved below-roof disposal area is
not available, pipe discharge from relief
valve without elbows to a steam blowdown
separator.
2. The vent from the steam separator shall
discharge above the roof, and the drain
shall discharge to an approved alternate
disposal area.
D. Pump piping and fittings:
1. Run line size piping to pumps as close as
possible to pump connections.
2. Run line size pump shutoff valves, strainers
and flexible connections, when required.
3. Provide eccentric reducer, flat on top, at
pump suction to reduce from line size to
pump suction connection size.
4. Provide concentric increaser at pump
discharge to increase from pump discharge
connection to line size.
5. Long radius reducing elbows may be
substituted for reducers and increasers
specified above if radius of turn is in the
vertical plane.
E. Removable piping connections:
1. Make all connections to apparatus and
equipment with flanges, unions, etc., for
easy removal.
2. Where equipment or heads must be
removed for maintenance or inspection
purposes, arrange connecting pipe so that
a minimum amount of this piping must be
disconnected or removed to permit the
maintenance or inspection.
3. Use double flanges, unions, etc., if required.
4. In no case shall the removal of piping
greater than six feet measured along the
center line be required for access, removal
of tubes, etc.
5. Where marine water boxes are specified or
called for on Drawings, no disconnecting or
removal of piping shall be required for
inspection or tube removal.
3.10
SLEEVES
A. For concrete construction, set sleeves in forms
before concrete is poured.
1. For insulated pipes, allow for insulation in
sleeves, and size for full insulation plus 38
mm (1-1/2") clearance.
2. Provide 13 mm (1/2") clearance between
sleeves and non-insulated piping.
3. In slab construction:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40.
b. Sleeves shall extend 50 mm (2") above
finished floor and upper surface shall be
sealed with mastic.
c. For floor with membrane and wearing
surface, provide approved clamping
ring.
d. For other type waterproofed floors,
provide waterproofing.
4. In concrete walls:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40.
b. For sleeves set in fire walls, caulk space
between pipe and sleeve with Pipe
Shields Incorporated "Cerablanket".
c. For sleeves set in outside walls, caulk
space between pipe and sleeve with
approved caulking material and seal
outer surfaces with mastic.
5. In lath and plaster partitions and ceilings,
and in metal stud and gypsum board
partitions, use 26-gage galvanized steel.
6. Machine Room floors:
Sleeve through
machine room area floors shall have space
between pipe and sleeve caulked with
approved material with upper surface
sealed with approved mastic.
7. Waterproofing:
Pipe or sleeve passing
through any waterproofed floor, deck, wall
or bulkhead shall be waterproofed.
3.11
ROOF FLASHINGS
10/18/11
01421-8
A. Furnish to the roofer for his installation, the
following roof flashings for pipes passing
through roof.
1. Cold pipes: Four pound, one-piece lead
flashing assembly with 200 mm (8") skirt and
cast iron counterflashing.
2. Hot pipes, steam and hot water boiler relief
valve discharge pipes and vents to have
galvanized steel flashing with at least 25 mm
(1") air space between roof construction
and exterior of pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Galvanized steel counterflashing shall have
adjustable clamp to provide tight closure.
10/18/11
15330-1
15330 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Design, fabricate, install, and secure required
approvals of a complete fire protection
automatic sprinkler system where shown on
Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed
for a complete and proper installation in
accordance with pertinent requirements of Fire
Rating Bureau and governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, comply with:
a. Recommendations of Fire Rating Bureau
having jurisdiction;
b. Pertinent recommendations contained in
NFPA Pamphlet No. 13, "Standards for
Sprinkler System Installations."
3. Certified plans and hydraulic calculations shall
be submitted to the Architect for review and to
the local Fire Marshal for approval. Approval
from the Fire Marshal and from any local
authorities having jurisdiction over this project
shall be secured by the contractor before any
fabrication
or
construction
work
is
commenced.
4. Buildings not approved for high-piled
combustible storage. Materials in closely
packed piles shall not exceed 15 feet in
height, 12 feet on pallets or in racks, and 6
feet for tires, plastics, and some flammable
liquids.
5. Fire sprinkler system(s) per UBC std. 38-I and
NFPA Std 13 shall be provided to protect the
entire structure.
6. Fire sprinkler system(s) and all control valves,
including exterior, shall be supervised by AUL
listed central alarm station or per UFC, art.10.
7. Private fire hydrants, sprinkler control and post
indicator valves, and risers to fire department
connections shall be painted safety red.
8. Automatic extinguishing system(s) shall be
installed per UFC, art. 10 and NFPA std. 96 to
protect cooking equipment and exhaust
system.
9. Hydrants and fire service line with detector
check valve are a part of this contract.
B. Products:
1. Provide a design which is complete in all
regards including, but not necessarily limited
to:
a. Underground piping pertaining to the
work of this Section including required
pipe, valves, trenching, backfilling, and
similar items;
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
b. Connection to utility main including
required valves, fittings, and similar
items;
c. Overhead sprinkler system.
Arrangement:
a. In areas having ceilings, conceal all pipes.
b. In storage and service areas, pipe may be
exposed but hold to minimum practicable
distance below ceiling.
c. Pipe shall be black steel with black cast
iron or other approved fittings in
accordance with NFPA 13.
Sprinkler heads:
a. Provide 1/2" automatic closed type
sprinkler heads of "ordinary degree"
temperature rating, complying with NFPA
Pamphlet No. 13.
b. Above ceilings, provide standard upright
type.
c. In finished ceilings, provide semirecessed
type, as selected by Owner.
d. In ground floor Lobby, provide type as
selected by Owner.
e. Do not locate sprinkler heads in any
luminous ceiling. Devise methods for
sprinklering such areas as approved by
Fire Rating Bureau and governmental
Valve seals, tags, and charts:
a. Seals: Provide brass cross-link chain, all
brass padlock, and two keys for each
manually operated shutoff valve required
to be sealed in open position.
b. Signs:
Provide identification signs of
standard design, fastened securely at
designated locations in accordance with
NFPA Pamphlet No. 13.
c. Tags.
Provide 2" diameter brass tags,
stamped
with designation numbers,
secured with 12 gage copper wire to
spindle of control valves.
d. Charts:
(1) Provide two copies of approved "AsBuilt" sprinkler system diagram and
valve
chart,
giving
designated
number, function, and location of
each valve;
(2) Mount in painted glass frames, and
locate where directed by Architect.
Water motor alarm:
a. Provide motor alarm valve complete with
alarm and alarm gong valves, pressure
gages, and fittings.
b. Locate and install in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide supports, hangers, inserts, and
associated items to properly support sprinkler
10/18/11
01421-2
10/18/11
piping in accordance with pertinent provisions
of NFPA Pamphlet No. 13.
7. Provide control valve, detector check, post
indicator valve, vault, and associated items,
and connect to water main.
8. Provide flush type Fire Department connection,
with all exposed parts brush chrome plated
where located on wall of building.
9. A sprinkler cabinet with an assortment of
twelve sprinkler heads of the type and
temperature installed throughout the building
shall be provided. Two wrenches for the
Owner's use shall be located in the cabinet.
Cabinet shall be minimum 18 gauge steel with
hinged door and latch, surface mounted
painted red. Locate according to owner's
direction.
C. Execution:
1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to
Section.
2. Perform trenching and backfilling required for
work of this Section in strict accordance with
Specifications.
with
approved
design
drawings
and
requirements of Fire Marshal, governmental
agencies, and Fire Rating Bureau having
jurisdiction.
4. Upon completion of installation, provide
necessary personnel and equipment and test
and retest complete system, making adjustments as required, and secure all necessary
approvals as required by NFPA 13.
5. When system has been completely approved,
secure a letter of final acceptance from Fire
Rating Bureau having jurisdiction, and forward
two copies of letter to Architect.
15400-1
15400 PLUMBING
A. General:
1. Provide complete design, secure all needed
permits and approvals, and provide a complete plumbing system for services shown on
Drawings, operating, tested, and approved.
furnish all labor, materials, equipment and
appliances required for all plumbing in
buildings, as shown and described on plans.
Furnish and install all fixtures, except cooking,
refrigerator and freezer. Obtain and pay for all
permits and licenses, give all notices and
comply with all rules, regulations of the
applicable plumbing code and all ordinances
in effect at site of construction. Dig all trenches
for plumbing work and backfill as required and
supervised by soils engineer. make connection
to sewer per plans, as closely as possible to
plumbing layout. Make water connection to
service per plans, make gas connection to
service per plans.
2. Location of equipment and appliances as
indicated on the drawings is approximate and
may be changed to suit the conditions of the
building. Locate all items as nearly as possible,
as extras will not be allowed for change in
location unless such equipment and appliance
have been set and connected before a change
is ordered.
Cooperate with the general
contractor in obtaining all openings required
through walls and slab floors for pipe lines, etc.
General contractor shall furnish any and all
forms required for such openings and shall
provide lintels, sleeves and other indicated
supports.
B. Products:
1. Except as may otherwise be called for on
Drawings or in this Section, provide only such
materials and methods as are required to
comply
with
pertinent
requirements
of
2. Prior to proceeding with installation of work of
this Section, submit design drawings and
specifications to Architect for approval.
a. Fully describe materials and methods
proposed to be used.
b. Include catalog cuts of plumbing fixtures.
c. Show on data that design has been
approved by all governmental agencies
3. Provide all personnel and equipment, pay all
fees necessary, fully and completely install, test,
and adjust all work of this Section, and secure
necessary
approvals
from
governmental
agencies having jurisdiction, all at no additional
cost to Owner.
4. Soil, waste and vent pipe lines above ground
floor are to be no hub cast iron pipe, standard
weight.
5. Underground sewer lines in building area and six
feet outside of exterior walls are to be standard
weight no hub cast iron pipe, or ABS if
approved by the agency having jurisdiction.
6. Water pipes are to be type M copper above
slab and type L below slab.
7. Gas pipe is to be standard weight, black steel
screw pipe.
8. Propane pipe is to be standard weight,
galvanized steel screw pipe.
9. Steel piping in the ground shall have a shop
coat of asphalt and wrapped.
10. Galvanized pipe laid underground to be
machine wrapped. Fittings shall be coated with
same materials.
11. Hot water piping in the ground shall be installed
in fiberglass pre-sealed insulation.
12. Fittings on water pipe shall be beaded,
malleable iron, standard weight, galvanized;
fitting on gas pipe shall be similar except black
iron.
13. All fittings in the soil, waste and vent piping shall
be of the same weight and type of materials as
pipe on which they are installed.
14. Provide sleeves for plumbing.
15. Provide trenching, backfilling and compaction
report of backfill acceptable to soils engineer.
16. Provide all access doors necessary to service
fixtures, appliances, equipment and trap
primers.
17. 16. Provide all roof drains, deck drains,
overflows, sumps, scuppers, piping and flashing
as necessary for a complete installation.
18. Hot water delivered from public-use lavatories
shall be limited to a maximum temperature of
120° F. The water heater thermostat shall NOT
be considered a control for meeting this
provision – lavatories are to be equipped with
thermostatic
mixing
valves
capable
of
maintaining water discharge temperatures at
not to exceed 120° F.
C. Execution
1. All work shall be performed in a competent,
workmanlike manner by licensed contractor and
shall be approved by a local building official.
2. All materials, workmanship and equipment
furnished or installed shall be guaranteed to be
new, free from all defects, left in perfect
condition when accepted by owner, and shall
be guaranteed in writing for a period of one
year.
3. Offset all plumbing out of building wall footings.
4. See notes under heating & A/C RE: Plumbing.
10/18/11
15400-2
5. All space heating and hot water piping and
supply air ducts shall be insulated in
accordance with the State of California Energy
Conservation Standards.
6. Service hot water piping shall be insulated in
accordance with Section 150J & 118d table 2-4
of
the
California
Energy
Conservation
Standards.
7. Shower heads and faucets shall have flow
control devices to limit flow to a maximum of .5
gpm.
8. Electrical contractor
a. Is to provide the proper electric circuits,
including disconnect switches at equipment
locations, and any other protective devices.
b. Is to also furnish and install all conduits and
terminal boxes for low voltage control wiring
and low voltage 6 conductor wire.
9. Plumbing contractor
a. To provide proper size gas main to supply
specified number and sizes of gas outlets.
Each outlet under the heating and air
conditioning contractor's direction is to be
left within six inches of each furnace location
and as indicated on the heating and/or air
conditioning layout.
b. To also provide condensate outlet adjacent
to the air conditioning equipment as
required by local codes.
10. Heating and air conditioning contractor
a. Coordinate work of plumbing and electrical
contractor.
b. Schedule three service calls during the first
year of operation to assure proper
performance of the engineered heating and
air conditioning system.
c. Furnish all manufacturer's written warranties
and to replace without charge any
defective parts during the first year of
operation starting with the day of final
completion.
11. All dimensions are approximate and are given
for estimating purposes only. Carefully check
and verify all dimensions and sizes, and assume
all responsibility for the fitting of materials and
equipment to other parts of the equipment and
to any structures involved. the drawings are
essentially diagrammatic and locations shall be
adjusted in field as required. provide a written
warrantee and attach any manufacturers
warrantee. contractor warrantee shall be for 2
years and start with final acceptance of the
work (not completion).
10/18/11
15440-1
15440 FIXTURES & TRIM
A. General
1. Fixtures shall be American Standard, or equal,
unless noted otherwise, white, with chrome trim
and fittings. Any substitutions must prove to be
equivalent. State reason for substitution.
2. Cut sheets in Appendix A (at end of
specifications).
10.
B. Products
j.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
Urinals-Stallbrook 6400.014 top spud with sensor
activated automatic flush valve siphon jet
flushing action.
Water Closet - 2234.013 Madera Elongated
flush valve toilet 1.6 gpf.
H.C. Water Closet 3043.102 Cadet Elongated
flush valve toilet 1.6 gpf (Note: in H.C.
compartment install W.C. with flush control on
the access side of the W.C.) Note: Provide this
toilet only in handicapped stalls and single
accommodation toilet rooms.
Toilet accessories:
a. Seat-Olsonite No 126-CC open-front less
cover
b. Valve: Sloan #158-DC
c. Supply & stop - Brasscraft.
Lavatories (Countertop) - 0475.047 Aqualyn
self-rimming vitreous china.
a. Faucet - 1340.000 metering faucet and grid
drain.
b. Supply pipes - Brasscraft.
Lavatories (Wall-hung) – 0356.066 Lucerne
11.
11.
12.
14.
15.
16.
a. Faucet - 1340.000 metering faucet and grid
drain.
b. Supply pipes - Brasscraft.
Janitor's sink – Floor Well by Commercial
Enameling #871 or equal by CECO – submit
catalog info.
a. Rim guard – 7745.811 by CECO or equal –
submit catalog info.
b. Faucet – 8344.002 by CECO or equal –
submit catalog info.
c. Drain – 7721.038 by CECO or equal – submit
catalog info.
Drinking fountainsModel HRFE ADA Bi-Level (Hi-Lo) barrier free
cooler by Halsey Taylor.
Trap Primer – PPP Model ULP-500LP.
Hose Bibb: Arrowhead Brass model 353LKBCLD
¾” FPT.
Water heater: A.O. Smith model PEC-66 electric.
Water heater shall have a recovery efficiency of
not less than 75% and a standby loss not to
exceed 2.3 + 67/rated volume as required by
the State of California Energy Conservation
Standards.
Contractor shall submit mfr's.
compliance
certification
w/equipment
submittals.
Classroom sink - Elkay model PSDKR-2517, with
LK20888, LK1141A, and LK35. Glass filler to
have hot and cold faucet.C.
Execution
Contractor to verify that all plumbing fixtures
meet all local codes.
10/18/11
15500-1
15500 HVAC
A. General:
1. Secure all needed permits and approvals,
and provide a complete heating, ventilating,
and air conditioning system for areas shown
on
Drawings,
operating,
tested,
and
approved.
B. Products:
1. Except as may otherwise be called for on
Drawings or in this Section, provide only such
materials and methods as are required to
comply with pertinent requirements of
2. Prior to proceeding with installation of work of
this Section, submit design drawings and
specifications to Architect for approval.
a. Fully describe materials and methods
proposed to be used.
b. Show on data that design has been
approved by all governmental agencies
C. Execution:
1. Provide all personnel and equipment, pay all
fees necessary, fully and completely install,
test, and adjust all work of this Section, and
secure
necessary
approvals
from
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, all
at no additional cost to Owner.
10/18/11
15880-1
15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION
A. General
1. Supply all equipment as listed on contract
documents. Equipment and duct work as
noted on the plans with allowances made for
the construction where necessary. Provide all
rigging and/or hoist to set equipment in place.
Hoist to be used at the option of the Heating.
& A/C contractor.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the heating and
air conditioning contractor to guarantee
adequate heating and air conditioning for the
building. Bring to the attention of the owner
anything that would not be in compliance
with good heating and air conditioning
practice or code requirements. Guarantee
heating and air conditioning system for a
period of one year from the date of
acceptance.
B. Products
1. Honeywell automatic change-over thermostat
model #T872 with model #Q6720 - 1025 sub
base unless noted otherwise on plans.
2. Vibration isolation mounting of equipment as
follows: Spring isolation system engineered by
manufacturer for weight. (submit to architect)
3. Filters of standard glass fiber throwaway type.
4. All supply and return air plenums and ducts
are to be of galvanized iron material.
Weights, gauges, and size are according to
local codes.
Flex duct and fiberglass
ductboard plenums are allowed if permitted
by local jurisdiction.
5. All branch ducts to have volume control
dampers for proper balancing of system.
throat dampers will be used where ducts are
inaccessible.
It is the responsibility of the
contractor to provide a balanced system.
6. To minimize transmission of equipment noise
through metal duct system connections of
duct to equipment are made with a flexible
neoprene cloth. (Not required if flex duct is
used)
7. Room thermostats shall be capable of being
set to space temperature set points from 55F
to 85 F and shall be capable of operating the
heating
and
cooling
in
sequence.
Thermostats shall be adjustable to provide a
temperature range of up to 10F between full
heating and full cooling being supplied and
have the capability of terminating all heating
at a temperature no more than 70F and
cooling at a temperature of not less than 78F.
8. A maintenance label shall be affixed to
mechanical equipment, and a maintenance
manual shall be provided for the owner's use.
The label shall clearly indicate the routine
maintenance
actions
which
must
be
performed to maintain the equipment in
efficient operating condition, or indicate by
number which maintenance or operational
manuals
explain
the
maintenance
requirements in greater detail.
9. All equipment shall comply with the state of
California energy conservation standards.
Equipment manufacturers and suppliers shall
provide all necessary data for compliance.
Data shall include full and partial capacity
inputs and performance data under all modes
of operations and ambient conditions.
Provide
compliance
certificates
with
equipment submittals.
10. All duct work shall be constructed, erected
and tested in accordance with the standards
adopted by SMACNA and shall comply with
the State of California Energy Conservation
Standards.
11. All space heating and hot water piping and
supply air ducts shall be insulated in
accordance with the State of California
Energy Conservation Standards.
12. Service hot water piping shall be insulated in
accordance with section T20-1521(c) of the
California Energy Conservation Standards.
13. All registers to be "ADP" or approved equal.
Sidewall ADPK135, R.A. KR 300 ceiling: use "V"
series. Stamped registers not acceptable.
14 All duct work above roof shall be water tight
at the transverse and longitudinal seams. Use
only canvas and Arabol or equal at these
seams and paint ducts to match stucco color.
Where ducts penetrate roofing use pitch
pockets and counter flashing. Solder counter
flashing to the duct. Use pitch packets at all
roof top duct supports.
10/18/11
C. Execution
1. Electrical contractor is to provide the proper
electric circuits, including disconnect switches
at equipment locations, and other protective
devices external to unit required by code and
to make a connection to the equipment, but is
not to start equipment. Guarantee will be null
and void if equipment is started without
supervision of heating and air conditioning
contractor. Electrical contractor is to also
furnish and install all conduits and terminal
boxes for low voltage control wiring and low
voltage 6 conductor wire. Heating and air
conditioning
contractor
to
make
all
connections of low voltage wiring to
equipment thermostats.
2. Plumbing contractor
a. To provide proper size gas main to supply
specified number and sizes of gas outlets.
Each outlet under the heating and air
conditioning contractor's direction is to be
left within six inches of each furnace
location and as indicated on the heating
and/or
air
conditioning
layout or
designer's plans.
b. To provide the proper gas supply in
accordance with the code and locate the
required gas outlet within 2' of the furnace
gas connection.
Provide & install the
flexible connector after furnace is installed.
Provide and install the flexible connector
after the furnace or boiler installed.
c. To also provide condensate outlet
adjacent
to
the
air
conditioning
equipment as required by local codes.
3. Heating and air conditioning contractor
a. Coordinate work of plumbing and
electrical contractor.
b. Schedule three service calls during the first
year of operation to assure proper
performance of the engineered heating
and air conditioning system.
c. Furnish all manufacturer's written warranties
and to replace without charge any
defective parts during the first year of
operation starting with the day of final
completion.
01421-2
10/18/11
4. All sealed and figured dimensions are
approximate and are given for estimating
purposes only. Carefully check and verify all
dimensions and sizes, and assume all
responsibility for the fitting of materials and
equipment to other parts of the equipment
and to any structures involved. The drawings
are essentially diagrammatic and locations
shall be changed as required to meet physical
requirement. Obtain written permission from
architect to cut any structural member. No
crimping or sharp bends in ductwork will be
accepted.
Submit for approval all
equipment, valves, diffusers, grilles, access
panels.
Obtain approval of solutions to
interference problems prior to installation or
covering of work by other trades.
All
equipment to be installed with allowance for
means to access the equipment for service.
5. Work in other sections
a. See notes in Division 15 regarding
electrical work. Electrical contractor is to
provide and install conduit for sound
system. See sound engineering plans for
these sizes and locations and Section
16700.
15950 - 1
15950 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. General:
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Provide temperature controls meeting the
requirements contained herein and as
indicated on drawing schedule.
1.02
WARRANTY:
A. Provide a minimum of 3 years parts and
labor warranty from the date of
acceptance.
B. Products:
2.01
GENERAL:
A. Unit shall be UL listed.
B. The unit shall have a dedicated terminal
block for all external inputs and outputs.
C Coordinate power requirements with the
electrical engineer.
C. Execution:
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. Unit installation, including mounting and
supports, and wiring to motor shall be by
the Electrical Contractor, in compliance
with Division 16. Coordinate with the
Electrical Trades and Control Trades as
required.
3.02
TESTING:
A. Provide the services of a factory-trained
technician to supervise check, test and
start. Technician shall check and test all
controls, interlocks, safeties and control
parameters, and submit written start-up
report. Notify Owner’s representative 5
days in advance of the start-up.
3.03
TRAINING:
A. Conduct training for maintenance staff on
operation, programming and service of
temperature controls. Training shall be
conducted by factory trained service
technician.
B. Training shall not be performed until system
is operational and functional and two (2)
weeks after receiving approved job
specific technical manuals.
16010-1
16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. General:
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The electrical work described by these
drawings and specifications shall include all
labor, materials, tools, equipment, services
and facilities for the complete and operating
installation of the electrical power, and control
systems for two water pumping stations.
B. Electrical system layout indicated on the
drawings is diagrammatic and locations of
outlets and equipment are approximate unless
dimensioned. The exact locations and routing
of conduit shall be done in a neat
arrangement and shall overcome local
difficulties of structural nature. No change in
the work shall be done without the written
approval of the engineer.
1.02 RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. All work shall be done in accordance with the
latest revisions of the State of California
Administrative Code, Title 8, Chapter 4;
National Electric Code, IEEE, NEMA, ANSI and
local ordinances. All permits and inspections
shall be obtained by this Contractor and
certificates of all inspections shall be delivered
to the City. No inspection fee will be charged
for this project.
1.03 APPROVALS
A. All material listed as "or approved equal" must
be furnished as specified unless written
approval from the engineer is obtained for
use of a substitute material. If contractor
desires to furnish material other than specified
material for items specified "or equal", this
contractor must demonstrate that the material
furnished is equal to specified material in all
respects.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 30 days after award of contract, the
contractor shall submit in six copies the
following items to the engineer for approval
with complete descriptive literature, outline
drawings, fabrication details, wiring diagrams,
external connection diagrams or any other
information that is helpful to the engineer in
determining that the items meet the
requirements of the specifications:
1. Automatic Transfer Switch
2. Conduit and Wire
3. Junction and Splice Boxes.
B. If contractor wishes to submit equipment other
than as specified and submittal or equipment
is found to be not acceptable, the specified
equipment shall be furnished at no change in
contract price. The decision of the engineer on
acceptability shall be final.
1.05 SITE INSPECTION
A. Contractor
shall
be
responsible
for
examination of the sites prior to submission of
bid to note existing conditions and take all
necessary measurements. No allowance or
payment will be subsequently made for any
site condition that would have been
ascertainable by making this site inspection.
1.07 SEISMIC PROTECTION
A. The Contractor and equipment supplier shall
provide seismic analysis of automatic transfer
switch for design, bracing and anchors to
resist seismic forces in accordance the
requirements of the latest UBC for Seismic Zone
4 with an importance factor of 1.5.
B. Seismic calculations shall be submitted for
review by the Engineer to show compliance
with the seismic requirements. Calculations
shall be signed by a registered civil or
structural engineer in California.
B. Products:
2.01 CONDUIT
A. All conduit shall be code size per N.E.C. Table
3c, 3/4" minimum or larger as noted on the
drawings and shall be of types listed below:
B. Location or Use Type
1. Underground outside building - Schedule
40 PVC or PVC concrete encased
2. Conduit turn-ups at Grade
Rigid
galvanized steel wrapped w/20mil x 2"PVC
tape half lapped
3. Exposed outdoors Rigid galvanized steel
4. Equipment
connections
Weatherproof flexible metallic conduit
2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND OUTLET BOXES.
A. All exposed conduit fittings and outlet boxes
shall be corrosion resistant cast metal with
neoprene gaskets and metal covers.
2.03 CONDUCTORS.
A. All conductors shall be copper of the AWG
(American Wire Gauge) noted on the plans.
Conductors #8 AWG or larger shall be
stranded. Minimum size conductors shall be
10/18/11
#14 AWG and shall be color coded by phase
and voltage. Neutrals shall be white and
equipment grounds shall be green.
B. All conductors shall be type THHN/THWN or
XHHW, 600 volt insulated.
2.04 TERMINALS AND SPLICING DEVICES
A. Only
compression
type
terminals
or
mechanical splicing devices shall be used.
Mechanical lugs shall be as provided with
equipment. All equipment grounding terminals
shall be made with mechanical lugs.
2.05 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. If and where required on the drawings an
automatic transfer switch shall be installed for
connection of the existing Motor Control
Center to the standby engine-generator under
conditions of normal power failure. The
transfer
switch shall
be double-throw,
mechanically held, inductive rated with
interrupting capacity six times rated current
with thermal capacity 29 times rated current.
Main switch contact shall have a spring
loaded arcing contact in addition to heavy
load contact. Operation shall be with a single
solenoid momentarily energized. The switch
shall be mechanically locked without use of
hooks, latches, semi-permanent magnets or
springs.
B. The automatic transfer switch shall be
equipped by the manufacturer of the transfer
switch with the following features:
1. Normal voltage sensing relays (3 required)
to be easily adjustable for drop-out at
approximately 90% rated voltage. Pickup
shall be at least 95% rated voltage.
2. In-phase monitor for transfer from normal
power to emergency power. Programmed
transition
providing
time
delay
disconnection from both power sources
may be used in place of in-phase monitor.
3. In-phase monitor
for
transfer
from
emergency power to normal power.
Programmed transition providing time
delay disconnection from both power
sources may be used in place of in-phase
monitor.
4. Control transformers for operation of
sensing relays from 480 volts normal
service.
5. Test switch to simulate normal power
failure.
6. Adjustable non-thermal time delay transfer
normal to standby, 0-3 minutes maximum.
7. Adjustable non-thermal time delay transfer
emergency to normal, 0-30 minutes
maximum.
8. Adjustable non-thermal time delay engine
cool down after transfer back to normal
power after power failure, 0-30 minutes
maximum.
9. Auxiliary normally open dry contact to
signal engine start circuit upon normal
source failure; adjustable non-thermal time
delay, 0-6 seconds maximum.
10. Auxiliary single pole double-throw dry
contact.
11. Heavy duty weatherproof Nema 12
enclosure with inner panel for operator
controls, hinged door with hasp for
shackle padlock.
C. Auxiliary contacts shall be rated at least 10
amperes at 120 volts, 60 hertz.
D. Transfer Switch Prototype Models Tests
1. Prototype samples, representative of the
production transfer switches supplied, shall
have been tested as defined in UL 1008,
including but not limited to:
2. Overload tests for the capability to make
and break six (6) times the transfer switch
rated current at low power factor without
any electrical or mechanical malfunction.
3. Temperature rise test at 100% of rated
current without exceeding temperature rise
limits as established by UL. Transfer
switches incorporating integral overcurrent
devices in the main power circuit and
tested at 80% of rating shall not be
permitted.
4. Endurance tests for a minimum of 3,000
mechanical operation cycles.
5. A dielectric voltage withstand test of 1000
volts plus twice rated for one minute.
6. Withstand and Closing Tests with specific
overcurrent devices. All withstand and
closing tests shall be performed with the
overcurrent protective devices located
external to the transfer switch. Tests
conducted with overcurrent protective
devices internal to the switch, in such a
manner that the transfer switch interrupts
the current rather than withstanding the
current, are not acceptable under this
definition of withstand.
7. The entire transfer switch shall be
performance tested per the requirements
of IEEE-587-1980, for voltage surge
withstand capability.
E. Automatic transfer switches manufactured by
Asco, Kohler or Onan are acceptable.
C. Execution:
3.01 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Corrections and changes made during the
progress of the work shall be recorded on a
set of blue-line prints of the Contract Drawings
which shall finally show all work as actually
installed. Two sets of prints showing this
information shall be furnished to the Owner at
completion. Prints for this purpose will be
furnished by the Owner upon request and at
the cost of reproduction.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The contractor shall not do any cutting and
patching unless obtaining previous approval
of the engineer; and should approval be
given, the contractor shall patch, repair and
replace such work altered so that it is equal to
its original state.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for setting
of necessary sleeves for electrical work and
locating where chases are to be left for
conduits, junction boxes, panels, switchgear
and underground services.
3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. The contractor shall do all excavation and
backfill required for the electrical work.
Trenches shall be straight and true of the
proper depths to obtain the minimum cover
required by the utility companies and the
N.E.C. except shall not be less than that shown
on the drawings. Trenches shall have smooth
bottoms. Trenches in paved areas shall be
saw cut. Trenching shall be in accordance
with Section 02202 - Trenching and Backfill
specification.
B. Backfill materials shall be approved material
free of rocks and organic matter. Backfill shall
be in accordance with Section 02202 Trenching and Backfill specification. Trenches
shall
be backfilled
immediately upon
approval.
C. Resurfacing of trenches in paved areas shall
be in accordance with Section 02500 Asphalt Paving and Surfacing specification.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. All metallic conduit,
cabinets,
fixtures,
equipment and services shall be grounded in
accordance with the latest edition of the
applicable codes. All ground clamps shall be
mechanical pressure type. The use of strap
type ground clamps will not be approved.
Ground wire connections in concealed
locations shall be made by the use of a
thermalweld process such as "Cadweld" or
approved equal.
3.05 CONDUIT
A. All steel conduit in contact with ground shall
be wrapped with Scotch No. 51 plastic tape,
20 mil, half lapped. All conduit turn-ups shall
be made with steel elbows.
B. Top of duct banks shall be 24 inches below
grade except, to avoid obstructions, may be
18 inches below grade if concrete encased 3"
all around.
C. A code size copper ground conductor shall
be installed in each non-metallic conduit. All
plastic conduits or ducts shall be joined with
solvent-weld couplings by coating both the
inside of the coupling and the conduit or duct
end with solvent and joining with a single firm
twisting stroke.
D. Total conduit bends in one run shall not
exceed 270°. Conduit which has been
crushed or deformed in any way shall not be
used.
E. Conduits shall be exposed and be secured by
means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry
units, expansion shields in concrete or
machine screws on metal surfaces. All conduit
fasteners, bolts, washers, screws, etc., shall be
rust proof. All conduit fasteners and supports
shall be as manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut
or approved equal. The type of support shall
be selected to provide proper strength and
neatest appearance. All supports shall be
subject to approval by the engineer.
F. The contractor shall exercise the necessary
precautions to prevent the lodgement of dirt,
moisture or trash in conduit, fittings and boxes
during the course of construction. A run of
conduit, which has been clogged shall be
entirely free from these accumulations or shall
be replaced.
3.06 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Automatic transfer switch shall be bolted to
unistrut supports mounted on wall of existing
pump station.
16111-1
Section 16111
CONDUIT AND WIRE
Part 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Scope
A.
Work included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities,
transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all
operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of
this Section, complete as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work
includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
2.
Examine all other sections for work related to those other sections and required to
be included as work under this section.
General provisions and requirements for electrical work.
1.2
Submittals (Additional Requirements)
A.
Submit product data sheets for all wire, supports, conduit, fittings and splicing
materials.
Submit material list for all conduit and conduit fittings.
Submit details and structural engineering calculations for conduit support systems.
B.
C.
Part 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Conduit
A.
General
1.
The interior surfaces of conduits and fittings shall be continuous and smooth, with
a constant interior diameter. Conduits and conduit fittings shall provide
conductor raceways of fully enclosed circular cross section. The interior surfaces
of conduits and fittings shall be without ridges, burrs irregularities or obstructions.
Conduits and fittings of the same type shall be of the same uniform weight and
thickness.
2.
Type of conduit, type of conduit fittings and conduit supports shall be suitable for
the conditions of use and the conditions of locations of installation, based on the
manufacturer’s recommendations and based on applicable codes.
3.
All fittings for metal conduit shall be suitable for use as a grounding means,
pursuant to the applicable code requirements. All metal conduit and metal
conduit fittings shall provide 3 second duration ground fault current carrying
ratings, when installed and connected to the respective conduit as follows:
A.
RMC and EMT conduit fittings
B.
Rigid metal conduit (RMC)
1. Rigid metal, round tubing, machine threaded at both ends.
·
·
The conduit and conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements
for an equipment grounding conductor, pursuant to applicable
codes.
The conduit shall be watertight and airtight without cracks and
pinholes.
10/18/11
16111-2
C.
For RMC to RMC conduit-to-conduit coupling.
·
·
·
Erickson – 674 (threaded) Series
OZ/Gedney Type 4 (threaded) Series
Threaded RMC conduit couplings, product of the same manufacturer as
the RMC conduit.
D.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rigid metal round tubing, “thin wall” steel construction, with nonthreaded ends.
·
The conduit and conduit fittings shall comply with the
requirements for a equipment grounding conductor
pursuant to applicable codes.
·
The conduit shall be watertight and airtight without cracks
and pinholes.
EMT shall be allowed for conduit size ranges from 0.5 Inch
through 4.0 inch
Comply with ANSI C80.3, C80.4, and ANSI C33.98 (latest
revisions); UL 94 and UL 797 (latest revisions); CEC Section
12500 (latest revision).
EMT Fittings
·
Connectors and couplings for terminating, connecting and
coupling to EMT conduit shall be non-threaded steel
fabrication.
·
EMT termination connector fittings shall be as follows:
1.
5.
E.
Set screw type “concrete tight” when installed in dry interior
locations.
2.
Compression types “raintight” and “concrete tight” when
installed in wet or damp locations, outdoors and in
concrete or masonry construction.
·
Fittings shall comply with ANSI C33.84 (latest
revision); UL 514 (latest revision); NEMA FB-1
a. For EMT to EMT conduit-to-conduit coupling:
·
Thomas & Betts-TK121 (set screw type) Series (with locknut)
·
OZ/GEDNEY-5000 (set screw type) Series (with locknut)
·
Thomas & Betts-5120 (compression type) Series.
·
OZ-Gedney-6000S (compression type) Series.
b. For EMT to RMC conduit to conduit combination coupling:
·
Thomas & Betts-HT221 (set screw type) Series.
·
OZ/Gedney-ESR (set screw type) Series.
·
Thomas & Betts-530 (compression type) Series.
·
OZ/Gedney-ETR (compression type) Series.
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC):
1.
Round flexible conduit, fabricated from a single continuous steel
strip. The steel shall be factory formed into continuous interlocking
convolutions to form a complete lock between steel strips and
provide raceway flexibility.
2.
Metal to metal grounding contact shall be maintained throughout
the length of the FMC conduit.
3.
FMC shall be allowed for conduit size ranges from 0.5 inch
through 4.0 inch.
4.
FMC shall comply with ANSI –C.33.84 and ANSI C33.92; NEMA
FB-a; CEC 12-1100.
5.
FMC Fittings
·
FMC fittings shall be malleable iron construction or steel
10/18/11
16111-3
·
·
F.
construction
Fitting shall automatically cause the FMC raceway throat
opening to be centered with respect to the fitting throat
opening.
Straight and angled connector termination fittings shall be
threaded on one end and shall include a threaded
locknut, suitable for connection to threaded and
unthreaded enclosures.
Fasteners
1.
2.
3.
Channel Fasteners
·
Channel fasteners shall “pre-locate” and lock into the
channel “turned lips” and channel “walls”
·
A separate metal strap shall “tie” each conduit to each
channel with conduit channel fasteners.
Structure Fasteners
·
Structure fasteners for wall and floor mounted conduit
attachments shall attach to existing masonry and concrete
structure with structure fasteners using drilled, mechanical,
expansion shield anchors.
·
attachments shall attach to new masonry and concrete
structures with structure fasteners using steel threaded inserts
precast into the structures.
·
Structure fasteners shall attach to steel structural members
with “swing-beam clamps”, with set-locking screw structure
fasteners. Beam clamps shall include integral safety rod,
strap or “J” hook to secure the clamp to the beam flanges
on both sides of the beam.
·
attachments shall attach to wood structural members with
flush “through-bolted” wood beam/wood framing stud
structure fasteners.
·
Structure fasteners for wall mounted conduit attachments
shall attach to steel framing studs and steel structural
elements with spot welded steel structure fasteners or drilled
and bolted structure fasteners.
Brace Fasteners
1. Provide lateral brace connectors to resist horizontal, lateral and
vertical movement of suspended conduits during seismic
earthquakes.
2. The braces shall connect from each conduit support, attach as
close to the conduit as possible, and attach to fixed rigid,
non-suspended building “main” structural elements with fixed
anchoring.
3. Brace attachment connectors and fasteners shall be rigid
preformed steel channels or flexible #10 gauge steel hanger
wire.
4. Connect and attach the brace connectors to fixed structural
elements in the same manner as conduit support hangers.
The connection of braces to structural elements shall be
independent of the conduit support hanger structure fasteners.
10/18/11
16111-4
2.2
Wire and Cable
A.
All wire and cable shall be copper, 600 volt, #12 AWG minimum unless
specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. Conductors #10 AWG and
smaller shall be solid. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
Type of insulation as noted on drawings as follows: Insulation of
conductor connected to circuit protection devices required to be “100%”
rated, shall be 90 degree rated insulation:
·
Type THHN/THWN insulation used for #4 AWG and smaller.
·
Type THW/XHHW or THHN/THWN insulation used for #2 AWG
and larger.
·
Type THWN or XHHW insulation used for all panel feeders’
switchboard feeders, motor control center feeders,
transformer feeders and service conductors.
·
Type THHN insulation used for circuit conductors installed in
fluorescent lighting fixture raceways, for conductors
connected to the secondary of fluorescent or mercury
vapor fixture ballast or other hot locations.
·
Type XHHW or THWN insulation shall be used where
conductors are installed in conduit exposed to the outdoor
weather.
·
The following color code for branch circuits:
Neutral…White (Tape feeder neutrals with white tape near
connections)
a.
Normal Power
120/208 Volt
Ground Green
Phase A Black
Phase B Red
Phase C Blue
b.
Isolated ground insulation shall be green with a
longitudinal yellow stripe.
·
When individual neutral conductors are shown for each
branch circuit, the color code for the neutral conductors
shall be as follows:
a.
120/208 volt; Phase A – White with Black stripe; Phase B –
White with Red stripe; Phase C – White with Blue stripe.
·
Feeders identified as to phase or leg in each panelboard
with printed identifying tape.
·
Fire alarm conductors: Use 600-volt, type THHN/THWN
conductors and color-coded per equipment
manufacturer’s recommendations and approved and
listed for use on fire alarm systems by the State Fire Marshal.
·
Panel feeders, copper or aluminum: Wire size shown on the
drawings is for copper; If aluminum wire is proposed,
increase wire size to ampere capacity of copper wire and
voltage drop not to exceed that of copper feeders
indicated on drawings. Increase conduit size and quantity
as required by code. Provide feeder calculation sheet, 8
copies, if aluminum percentage for original copper feeders
and for equal aluminum feeders. Aluminum conductors
smaller than #2 AWG shall not be used.
·
Color coding for mechanical and plumbing control wiring
shall be an agreed upon color code between the
Mechanical Plumbing CONTRACTOR and the Electrical
CONTRACTOR, and color code shall be submitted to the
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE in writing for approval prior to
installation.
10/18/11
16111-5
·
B.
2.3
Conductor insulation and jacket shall be all resistant,
complying with “Oil Resistant=1” and “Oil Resistant-2” UL
83.
Aluminum Conductors (600 Volt or Less Only): CONTRACTOR has the
option of using aluminum conductors in lieu of copper conductors for
feeders only to panels, distribution boards/panels, transformers,
motor control centers, and dimmer switchboard. If aluminum
conductors are used, the following requirements shall be followed:
·
Conductors shall be Aluminum Association 8000 Series Alloy, with
the same (XHHW, THW, THWN) insulation as called for under
copper conductors. Aluminum conductor larger than 750 kcmil
shall not be used, aluminum conductors smaller than #2 AWG shall
not be used.
·
If the conductor termination is to be made on a bus bar or similar
flat surface, a Burndy Type YA-A HYPLUG compression terminal
intended for the specific conductor size, factory filed with oxide
inhibitor compound shall be used. Terminal must be installed using
a hydraulic compression tool equipment with a die head for the
particular terminal used. Only Burndy Hypress tools shall be used
for compression.
·
If the conductor termination is to be made into a circuit breaker or
similar insert compartment it shall be terminated by use of a Bundy
AYP HYPLUG compression connector intended for the specific
conductor size, factory filled with oxide inhibitor compound.
Connector must be installed using only Bundy Hydraulic
compression tool specifically approved for each respective
connector.
·
Connector aid shall be used for all terminations and connections.
Connector aid shall be Bundy Petrol A, NO-OX-1D Grade “A”
·
When a aluminum lug is terminated to a copper bus with a steel or
copper stud or bolt place aluminum lug on stud or bolt followed
by a flat steel washer, and steel or copper nut, in that order.
GROUND ROD
A.
General
1.
Self contained ground rod(s) using chemically enhanced grounding shall be
provided where specifically indicated on the drawings. As manufactured by
Lincoln XIT Grounding Systems, 22412 South Normandy Avenue, Torrance, CA Tel#
(800) 962-2610; Superior Grounding Systems, Irwin dale, CA Tel# (800) 747-7925;
ERICO
The ground rod shall operate from changes in atmospheric pressure pumping air
through the ground rod, hygroscopically extracting moisture from the air to
activate the ground electrolytic chemicals and improve the ground rod
performance.
Ground rod system shall be U.L. listed
Ground rod system shall be 100% self-activating, sealed and maintenance free.
The addition of chemical or water solutions shall not be required.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Ground Rod
1.
Ground rod shall consist of a 2 inch nominal diameter hollow, copper tube. The
tube shall be permanently capped on the top and bottom, air breather holes hall
be provided in the top of tube. Draining holes shall be provide in the bottom
and sides of the tube for electrolyte drainage into the surrounding soil.
The ground rod shall be chemically filled at the factory with environmentally non-
2.
10/18/11
16111-6
3.
4.
hazardous water-soluble metallic salts to enhance electrical grounding
performance.
Ground rod shall be a minimum of ten feet long for straight (vertical) installation;
or “L” shape minimum twenty feet long for horizontal installation.
Ground wire clamping “U-Bolt” with pressure plate on the top end of the tube size
for 1#2 thru 500 MCM AWG ground electrode conductor connection, and
stranded 4/0 AWG copper pigtail exothermically welded to the side of rod for
ground electrode conductor connection.
C.
Ground Box
1.
Pre-cast concrete box with slots for conduit entrances. Approximately ten inch
diameter by twelve inches high. Cast iron grate flush cover with “Breather” slots
XIT Box #XB-12.
D.
Backfill Material
1.
2.
Natural volcanic, non-corrosive Betonies Clay backfill material.
Shall absorb water at a minimum of thirteen times its dry volume or approximately
14 gallons for 50 pounds of clay.
PH value 8-10 with maximum resistively of 2.5 OHMS-M at 300% moisture content
by weight.
3.
Part 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
TRENCHING, FOOTINGS,SLEEVES
A.
Provide trenching, concrete encasement of conduits, backfilling, and
compaction for the underground electrical work, in accordance with applicable
sections of this specification.
B.
Provide footings for all post and/or pole-mounted lighting fixtures: concrete shall
conform to the applicable sections of this specification.
C.
Sleeves
1.
Provide sleeves for raceways and conduit passing through the following
construction elements:
Concrete and masonry foundations, floors, walls and slabs.
Lath and plaster walls and ceilings.
Building structures (i.e., foundation, walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs) with a fire
rating exceeding 20 minutes
Sleeves shall extend 1.5 inches above floors, except under floor standing
electrical equipment. Sleeves shall be flush with wall ceiling foundations and
partitions exposed to public view and extend approximately 0.5 inch past
penetration in fire rated construction. Sleeves shall be installed at exact
penetration locations and angles to accommodate raceway and conduit
routings.
Joists, girders, beams, columns or reinforcing steel shall not be cut or weakened.
Where construction necessitates the routing conduit or raceways through
structural members, framing or footings, written permission to make such
installation shall first be obtained from the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Such
permission will not be granted, however, if any other method of installation is
possible.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
GROUNDING
10/18/11
16111-7
A.
Grounding shall be executed in accordance with all applicable codes and
regulations, both of the State of California and local authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Where nonmetallic conduit is used in the distribution system, the CONTRACTOR
shall install the proper sized copper ground wire in the conduit with the feeder for
use as an equipment ground. The electrical metallic raceway system shall be
grounded to this ground wire.
C.
The maximum ground/bond resistance to the grounding electrode shall not
exceed 1 ohms from any location in the electrical system. The maximum ground
resistance of the grounding electrode to earth shall not exceed 5 ohms.
D.
Feeder, Sub feeders & Branch Minimum Equipment
Circuit Protection
15 Amp
20 Amp
30 to 60 Amp
70 to 100 Amp
101 to 200 Amp
201 to 400 Amp
401 to 600 Amp
801 to 1000 Amp
1001 to 1200 Amp
1201 to 1600 Amp
1601 to 2000 Amp
2001 to 2500 Amp
2501 to 4000 Amp
Ground Wire Size
#12
#12
#10
#8
#6
#2
#1
2/0
3/0
4/0
250 MCM
350 MCM
500 M
10/18/11
16400-1
16400 SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION
A. General
1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and
appliances for a complete electrical job,
including all controls and fixtures as shown on
the plans. Obtain and pay for all permits and
inspections which are required for the work by
legally constituted authority having jurisdiction.
Deliver all certificates of inspections which are
required for the work by legally constituted
authority having jurisdiction, and deliver all
certificates of inspection to the owner or his
representative. The contractor is to provide
lighting fixtures as noted on plans, with energy
saving lamps included.
2. Furnish and install all conduit and wiring for
power and control of mechanical equipment,
including thermostat wiring.
3. Furnish and install all conduit and wiring for
owner furnished equipment such as kitchen
equipment.
4. Furnish and install all control devices, conduit,
and wiring as indicated on mechanical
drawings.
5. Furnish and install approved duct smoke
detectors for A/C units of 2000 cfm or more.
6. Furnish and install approved smoke detectors
for elevator recall purposes at each elevator
lobby, per UBC Sect. 3003.2.
7. Furnish and install all required circuit breakers,
disconnect switches, fuses, motor starters
(manual and magnetic) , and time clocks to
provide code approved power to all
mechanical devices and owner furnished
equipment.
8. Furnish and install dimmers and dimmer controls
at sound console or as shown on plans.
9. The entire electrical system is to be installed in
accordance with all of the requirements of all
legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction,
including all local ordinance, the safety orders
of the state industrial accident commission, and
all rules and regulations of the National Board
of Fire Underwriters.
Where plans and
specifications differ from code requirements,
furnish and install the higher quality or more
conservative design.
10. All materials and equipment used in installation
of the work will be new and in perfect condition
when installed. All equipment used for the same
purpose shall be of the same make.
All
materials used in the fabrication and
construction of the work shall be in accordance
with the latest standard specifications of the
American Society for Testing Materials, and the
National Board of Fire Underwriters, as they
apply.
B. Products
1. The main switch board and service section shall
be factory-assembled voltage, phase, wire,
location, arrangement and components shall
be as shown on the drawings.
2. Securely anchor switchboard to a minimum 1 x
2 inch channel base (1-inch vertical; 2-inch
horizontal), which shall be furnished with, and
form part of the switchboards and shall be
fastened securely to the floor to meet seismic
conditions for respective zone.
3. Transformers: Shall have rated KVA, primary &
secondary voltage, and phase as indicated on
drawings. All transformers 30 KVA or larger shall
be provided with 2 - 2-1/2% above and below
normal primary taps minimum. transformers shall
have class
1
insulation
with
average
temperature rise not to exceed 150 degrees
centigrade based on 40 degree centigrade
ambient temperature, with 100% of the rated
nameplate load connected to the secondary.
Transformers mounted from underside of
building steel shall be supported by vibration
isolators between transformer enclosure &
hanger rods. Structural calcs shall be supplied
with submittals. Floor mounted units shall be
installed in vibration pads. Transformer core &
coil shall be contained within a steel, properly
ventilated enclosure.
Enclosure shall be
thoroughly cleaned & corrosion treated, primed
with rust-inhibiting primer & finished with two
coats of manufacturers standard gray enamel.
Enclosure shall be provided with lifting brackets.
Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where indicated on
drawings. Sound levels shall be guaranteed by
the manufacturer not to exceed the following
values: 10 to 45 KVA, 45 db.; 50 to 300 KVA,
52 db.
4. Panelboards: Shall have galvanized cabinet
with dead front, dead rear, as shown on
drawings with bolt on breakers as shown on
panel schedules, hinged, lockable doors, index
card-holders, bussing and lugs as required.
Buses shall be full panel height. Panelboards
shall have flush catch and lock and operate
from one key. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures
where indicated on drawings. Panels shall have
a minimum width of type as shown on plans.
Door hinges and front clamps shall be
completely concealed when door is in closed
position. Circuit breakers shall be automatic,
molded case, quick-make, with handles
indicating tripped position and indicating
breaker size.
Breakers shall be ambient
compensated. Minimum interrupting capacity
10,000 amperes symmetrical, or as indicated on
drawings. Contractor shall provide typewritten
index cards for all panelboards. All busses must
be copper.
-
16400-2
5. Disconnect switches:
30 amp to 600 amp
capacity shall be of the enclosed quick-make
and quick break type, horsepower-rated,
complete with fuse clips as required. Switches to
be heavy duty type, as manufactured by
Square-D or equal. Waterproof (nema 4 or 12)
where indicated on drawings.
6. Fuses: Shall be provided for all switches. Fuses
shall be as designated on drawings by bus
manufacturing co. All installed fuses shall be of
one manufacturer.
7. Grounding materials: Grounding clamps, hubs,
fittings and connectors shall be solderless
pressure type, copper alloy, specifically
manufactured for ground connection purposes.
Wire shall be soft- drawn copper, green
insulated where installed in conduit. All grounds
for transformer shall be exothermic or
mechanical connections.
8. Conduits and raceways:
Shall include the
following types and shall be used where
specified herein or indicated on drawings:
9. Galvanized rigid metal conduit, galvanized
intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic
tubing, flexible metallic conduit and liquid tight
flexible metal conduit.
10. Rigid metal, intermediate metal and i.m.t.
conduit shall be zinc coated, hot dip
galvanized. Weights and dimensions shall be
within tolerances protective coating. Conduit
shall be as manufactured by National Electric or
accepted equal. Flexible metallic conduit shall
be zinc coated, hot dip galvanized, continuous
steel strip, spiral-wound and interlocked. Flexible
metallic conduit shall be as manufactured by
National or accepted equal. Liquidtight flexible
metallic conduit shall be similar in construction
to flexible metallic conduit, except with a
continuous pvc jacket.
Liquidtight flexible
metallic conduit shall be as manufactured
Anaconda or accepted equal.
11. Boxes and fittings: General use junction and
pull boxes shall be the galvanized steel type for
dry locations for use with E.M.T. and the cast
metal, threaded hub type for wet or damp
locations for use with rigid or intermediate metal
conduit. Minimum size box shall be 4" square by
1-1/2" deep. Larger sizes shall be provided as
necessary to
comply with NEC space
requirements. Extension or plaster rings shall be
compatible with boxes and provided as
necessary. Fittings for rigid or intermediate
metal conduit shall be malleable iron with sharp,
clean cut threads. All couplings and connectors
shall be concrete-tight type where used in
masonry or concrete and shall be raintight
where installed in wet locations. Fittings for
flexible and liquidtight flexible metallic conduit
shall be as manufactured by Ideal or accepted
equal.
12. Conductors: All wire and cable to secondary
power and light distribution shall be new,
annealed soft-drawn copper, 600v insulated
and shall be U.L. listed for types listed below for
use in accordance with the NEC. For all feeders
less than 100 amps and lighting circuits, type
THHN, 90 degrees centigrade dry and 75
degrees centigrade wet. Conductors shall not
by less than #12 awg. Low voltage wiring shall
not be less than #18 awg unless specifically
noted otherwise. Conductor sizes indicated on
homeruns on the drawings is the minimum size
for the entire circuit up to the connection of the
last load.
Conduit sizes may be reduced
according to the NEC as the quantity of
conductors
are
reduced,
unless
noted
otherwise. All wire and cable shall be color
coded per NEC requirements.
13. Wire joints and connectors: For connections to
c/b's and wiring devices; Conductor sizes #12
and #10; Formed clockwise around binding
post or screw. for #8 or #6 , crimp on ring
terminal as manufactured by Ideal or accepted
equal.
For terminations of #4 or larger;
compression solderless type or Ideal "Surlock".
Circuit wiring connections to fixtures, devices or
circuiting joints; Conductor sizes #12 through #8,
threaded pressure-type with insulator, Ideal
"wing-nut" or accepted equal. Branch circuit
wiring connections within multi-outlet assemblies,
shall be "Scotch-lock". All feeder splices for
cable sizes #6 or larger shall compression type
applied with tool and die, or mechanicallybolted type specifically made for the purpose.
14. Wiring devices: All duplex receptacles shall be
equal to Hubbell #5262-1. All switches (120v277v) shall be equal to Hubbell #1221-1.
Device plates for interior finish shall be phenolic
plastic, ivory color unless noted otherwise.
Telephone outlets shall be provided with single
hole wall plates.
15. Tapes:
Corrosion protective tape shall be
pressure sensitive, pvc, plastic backed 20-mil
adhesive. (Scotchwrap #51, Slipknot #200).
Color coding tape shall be pressure sensitive,
vinyl, 5-mil adhesive. (Slipknot #45.)
16. Test:
C. Execution
1. Carefully examine each of the relevant drawings
and notify the designer of any discrepancies.
Examine the building site and compare the
drawings with existing conditions in order to
determine the best methods, exact locations,
routes, building obstructions, etc., and include
the installation of all equipment in available
locations.
2. Receiving the bids will indicate that such
examinations have been made, conditions
-
16400-3
have been accepted and allowances have
been made in preparing bid.
3. It is the intention of this specification and
accompanying plans that all equipment,
conduit, wiring systems, fixtures, etc., be left
complete and in operating condition, unless
specifically mentioned otherwise.
If the
contractor does not call any discrepancies to
the attention of the owner or his representative
before accepting the contract, the electrical
contractor shall be required to make corrections
at his own expense.
-
16425-1
Section 16425
SWITCHBOARDS
Part 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Scope
A.
Work included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for
and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery
and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the drawings
and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the
following:
·
Examine all other specification sections and drawings for related work
required to be included as work under Division Sixteen
·
1.2
A.
Provide schematic “ladder type” logic control wiring diagrams and “point-topoint” control wiring diagrams showing control and protective systems interlocks.
B.
Provide nameplate engraving schedule.
C.
Factory Tests: Switchgear tests – ANSI C37.20 Certified copies of design tests,
production tests, and conformance tests of the switchgear shall be submitted and
review comments shall be received before delivery of equipment to the project
site. In lieu of the above test, a report of these tests previously performed on
identical units of each rating will be acceptable.
1.3
Applicable Standards
A.
The switchgear equipment shall be designed, tested and assembled of ANSI, IEEE,
and NEMA and U.L.
B.
Equipment components/devices, switchboards and/or switchgear shall be
manufactured by Cutler Hammer. Other acceptable manufacturer’s are General
Electric, Square-D or Siemens provided that equipment does not exceed sizes
shown on drawings.
Part 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Bussing
A.
Horizontal and vertical busses shall be full lengths in each equipment section.
Buses shall have a minimum withstand rating equal to available fault current
indicated on drawings, but in no case shall the rating be less than 65,000
amperes, symmetrical
B.
Provide interconnected full capacity neutral bus in each section with the same
ratings and construction as the phase busses.
C.
Provide interconnected ground bus in each section.
D.
Provide space and all hardware and mounting attachments for future devices as
10/18/11
16425-2
indicated on the drawings.
E.
Main horizontal bussing shall be full capacity in all switchboard sections.
F.
Vertical buss may be tapered, to not less than one third the ampacity rating of the
main horizontal buss; but in no case shall the vertical buss be of less capacity than
the sum of the frame size ampacities of overcurrent devices mounted in the
respective sections including any indicated spares and spaces.
G.
The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL
Standard 891 on temperature rise Bus shall be copper with silver plated bus joints
or extruded aluminum with tin plated bus joints. The through bus shall have
provisions for the addition of future sections. The through bus supports
connections and joints are to be bolted with grade 5 hex head bolts and
Belleville washers to minimize maintenance requirements.
2.2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General
·
·
·
·
·
B.
Circuit protective devices as indicated on the drawings. All devices shall
have an interrupting capacity not less than the maximum available fault
current at the circuit breaker as indicated on the drawings, but in no case
shall the interrupting capacity be less than 65,000 ampere symmetrical for
208/120 volt devices.
Provide padlock-off devices on each device. Breakers shall provide time
over current and instantaneous circuit protection.
Circuit breakers shall employ a stored energy, quick make-quick break,
and trip free operating system on each phase, with common trip. Breakers
shall comply with U.L. 489 and NEMA AB1 latest revisions.
Circuit breakers noted as “100%” on the drawings shall be tested and
rated to carry the breaker full rated (100%) ampere load continuously
including the assemblies the circuit breakers are installed into.
Provide conductor lugs on circuit breakers to accept conductor sizes and
quantities shown on drawings.
Performance requirements for circuit breakers conforming to one or more of the
following applications:
·
600 Ampere or larger frame size
·
Larger than 400 Ampere trip
·
Service entrance in main switchboard
·
Noted as main circuit breakers on the drawings
Part 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Install switchboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and
applicable portions of NECA’s “Standards of Installations” for switchboards and
motor control centers.
3.2
Bolt switchboard to floor and wall where wall exists. Where units are free standing
provide preformed steel channel or angle iron bracing to nearest wall or building
structural member. Switchboard anchoring shall be designed for a 1.0 gravity
lateral acceleration of the equipment. Submit structural calculations and details.
3.3
Testing (Additional Requirements)
Adjustable settings shall be set and tested after the equipment installation is
10/18/11
16425-3
complete, for proper operation at set pickup and/or drop-out points, by an
independent test laboratory. Testing shall comply with the equipment
manufacturer recommendations. Submit three copies of all test results to Owner’s
Representative. Correct any deficiencies and retest.
3.4
Identification (Additional Requirements)
Manufacturer shall stencil the equipment name on each device and
equipment section to correspond to the identification of the drawing.
Devices mounted in equipment controlling protective devices shall be
provided with nameplates indicating device controlled or monitored.
10/18/11
16500-1
Section 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Part 1 – GENERAL
1.1
General
Provide light fixtures complete including lamps, ballasts, lamp
sockets, housings, ceiling trim rings for special ceilings,
mounting and adapter support brackets, diffusers/lenses and
outlet boxes.
The catalog numbers included in the description of the various
types of lighting fixtures shall be basically considered to
establish the type or class of the fixture with a particular
manufacturer only. The fixture length, number of lamps,
component materials, accessories, mounting type and all other
features required to fulfill the total description of the fixture
based on all drawing and specification information shall be
compiled with regardless of whether or not the catalog number
specifically includes these features. If any conflict exists
between the catalog number and the description, the
CONTRACTOR shall either resolve the conflict with the
ARCHITECT prior to submittal of his bid or furnish the fixture to
meet the intent as later interpreted by the ARCHITECT without
change in contract price.
1.2
Scope
Work included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools,
equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all
operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and
installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on
the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not
necessarily limited to the following:
1. Examine all other specification sections and drawings for
related work required to be included as work under Division
Sixteen.
2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work.
1.3
Submit certification letter from manufacturers of lamps and
Ballasts stating the specific lamp and ballast combination
comply with manufacturer approval for the combined use,
shown on the drawings.
Submit manufacturers certified lamp and ballast tests report
data showing compliance with contract document.
If requested by the ARCHITECT, provide a sample of any fixture
proposed as a substitution for a specified fixture. Sample
fixture shall be complete with lamps, cord and plug for 120-volt
operation. Fixture shall be delivered to the ENGINEER’S office
for review and shall be picked up within ten (10) working days
after review comments have been receive; any samples left
over this time will be discarded by the ENGINEER. Decision of
10/18/11
16500-2
ENGINEER regarding acceptability of any fixture is final.
Provide complete manufacturers catalog data information for
each light fixture, ballast and lamp.
Part 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Ballasts (Hid and Fluorescent)
General
Fluorescent lamp lighting fixtures shall be equipped with UL, ANSI ETL
approved C.B.M. certified high power factor (90% minimum) Ballasts,
Class “A” or better sound rating. Fluorescent fixtures shall be designed
to accommodate rapid start T-12 460 mA or 430 mA. and T-8 lamps
except where specified otherwise.
Ballast shall provide Class “P” thermal protection. Ballasts shall be full
light output rated with specified lamps.
Ballasts shall comply with FCC Part 18 and NEMA limits as to EMI or RFI
and not interferes with normal electrical or electronic data processing
equipment.
Ballast open circuit voltage, crest voltage and lamp-operating
voltage shall comply with requirements of the manufacturer of the
installed lamps.
Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be for use with the specific fluorescent
lamps provided as part of the Contract. Fluorescent Ballasts rated for
use with instant start fluorescent lamps or othger non-rapid start
fluorescent lamps are not acceptable unless instant start or other types
of fluorescent lamps are required in the Contract Documents.
Ballasts shall be suitable for use with automatic sensing occupancy
type switching “on-off” control systems with multiple “on-off” cycles per
hour, on a 24 hours a day basis, without loss of performance in ballast
and/or lamp operating characteristics.
Ballasts shall be high power factor (H.P.F.), with lowest sound rating
available.
Ballast fusing
1.
Each HD ballast shall be independently fused on the incoming line side within
ballast compartment.
2.
Alternately the ballast manufacturer may install the equipment fuse inside the
ballast.
3.
Provide a label next to ballast cover reading: Ballast is fused,
check fuse prior
to relamping”. Provide an additional quantity of 10% spare fuses and deliver to
Owner.
Ballast, which are judged by the ARCHITECT to be excessively noisy,
shall be removed and replaced at the CONTRACTOR’S expense with
low noise ballasts.
10/18/11
16500-3
Solid State Electronic Fluorescent Lamp Ballast
Fluorescent Ballasts shall be electronic type for straight or “U” lamps,
T12 and T8 series lamps, as manufactured by Triad-Utrad Ballastar
series, Advance, Motorola or equal.
Ballast manufacturer shall have been producing electronic ballasts for
a minimum of five years.
Ballast shall operate lamps at frequency of 20 to 35 kilohertz without
visually detectable flicker and shall deliver lamp manufacturers normal
rated lamp file.
Multi-lamp ballasts shall provide continued operation of remaining
lamps after one lamp has failed. Ballasts shall not be affected by
lamp failure.
Ballast shall be surge and transient protected to 6000 volts, provide
soft/stable start of rapid start lamps and maintain cathode heat during
operation. Maximum total harmonic distortion created on the line
(input) side of the ballast shall not exceed 25% (20%).
The ballast shall provide an isolated output to the lamps. Ballast case
shall be positively grounded to the light fixture metal housing.
The ballast shall incorporate transient surge protection to prevent
damage to the ballast due to line side transients complying with IEEE
587.
The ballast lamp current crest factor shall be 1.6 or less.
The ballast factor shall be not less than 87.
Normal rapid start (continuous full filament voltage) Rapid Start
F40 T12 Rapid Start (RS)
Lamp Wattage
Average Input Watts
Three- 40W (Standard)
Three- 34/35W (Energy Saver)
Two- 40W (Standard)
Two-34/35W (Energy Saver)
One- 40W (Standard)
One- 34/35W (Energy Saver)
109
96
71
60
38
34
T-8 rapid Start Lamps
Lamp Wattage
Four- 32W
Three- 32W
Two- 32W
One- 32W
Average Input Watts
124
93
62
32
10/18/11
16500-4
T-8 Rapid Start Lamps
Lamp Wattage
Four- 32W
Three- 32W
Two- 32W
One-32W
Average Input Watts
112
91
66
44
Note: Both standard and energy savings ballast are identified.
H.I.D. lamp Ballasts including mercury vapor, metal halide and highpressure sodium fixtures shall be provided with constant wattage Ballast.
Light fixtures shown connected to both normal power and emergency
power branch circuits, shall be furnished with separate lamp ballasts for
the normal and emergency power circuits. The ballast(s) for the lamps
connected to the emergency branch circuit shall be in a separate wireway
isolated and barriered from the ballast(S) for the lamps connected to the
normal power branch circuits.
b.
Lamps
Lamps shall be new, of wattage indicated and shall be as manufactured by
General Electric, Phillips, Osram or Sylvania. Each fixture or lighting outlet shall
be supplied with the proper lamp.
General-purpose incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, medium base for
200 watts and smaller.
Reflector lamps shall be PAR-20, PAR-30 or PAR-38 as required, unless
otherwise specified in fixture schedule.
Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type, bi-pin, rapid-start, T-8, 48”, 32
watt, 265 ,m.a., minimum CRI of 75 except as specified differently, General
Electric, Philips, Osram/Sylvania or equal.
c.
Light Fixtures
Lighting fixtures shall have all parts, Ballasts, sockets, support attachments, trim
flanges and fittings necessary to complete and properly install the fixture at the
indicated installation locations. All fixtures shall be provided with lamps of size
and type specified.
Fixtures shall be wired from outlet boxes supplied with fixture to socket with #14
AWG Underwriters’ Type “AF” or “CF” fixture wire.
Surface and/or wall mounted lighting fixtures shall not have any exposed
chase nipples or conduit knockouts visible to view within fixture housing.
Lighting fixtures mounted in continuous rows shall have chase nipples or
conduit knockouts between lighting fixture housing, but shall not have visible
chase nipples/conduit knockouts on the visible ends of the continuous row of
lightning fixtures.
Where fixture color is indicated to be selected by the ARCHITECT, provide two
color chip samples for review.
Recessed fixtures where noted to have attached junction box shall be
10/18/11
16500-5
provided with a junction box permanently attached to the plaster ring so that
the junction box is accessible through the fixture opening when the fixture is
removed. Connection between fixture and pull box shall be flexible conduit
and 2 #14 AWG “AF” wires. The flexible conduit shall be sufficient length, so
that when the fixture is removed, the pillbox is readily accessible.
Recessed fixtures shall be Underwriters’ Laboratory approved for recessed
installation with plaster frame and attached pull box. Lamp enclosure,
reflectors and finish wiring shall not be installed until plastering is completed.
Finish trim shall not be installed until finish painting of the adjacent surface is
completed.
The fixture shall bear Underwriters’ Laboratory label of approval for the
wattage and installation indicated.
Light fixtures installed outdoors in damp or wet locations shall be U.L. labeled
for said location.
d.
Lens and Diffusers
Whenever this specification calls for acrylic, acrylic plastic or Plexiglas for the
diffusers or lighting fixtures, these diffusers shall be manufactured by Rohm and
Haas Company, called Plexiglas G, or specifically approve equal. Diffusers
shall be formed from cast sheet having a minimum unpenetrated thickness of
0.125” and in any event, shall be of sufficient thickness and or proper
construction and camber to prevent the diffusers from having any noticeable
sag over the entire normal life of the installation. Diffusers shall be formed from
cast sheet by a vacuum and/or pressure technique.
Acrylic lenses shall be manufactured from 100% acrylic as manufactured by
Rohm & Haas, called Plexiglas V, V Type 920, VM, or an approved equal by
either injection molding or by extrusion.
e.
Lighting Standards (Poles)
Lighting poles pole bases, pole arms, lighting fixture supports with all lighting
pole attachments and anchors shall be designed and constructed to
withstand 100 mile per hour steady horizontal wind loading and 130 mile per
hour horizontal wind gust loading, without any damage to the lighting
standards.
Anchor bolts shall be threaded the entire bolt length, not less than four (4)
bolts for each pole equally spaced around the pole base. Provide a
minimum of two threaded nuts for each anchor bolt. Install a nut on the top
and bottom sides of each base plate anchor bolt location. Not less than
three (3) threads shall be exposed after pole is installed and leveled.
Provide a base plate at the bottom of each pole to attach the pole to the
pole anchor bolts. The base plate shall be permanently attached to the
bottom of the pole.
Part 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
Light Fixture Installation
It is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to verify actual ceiling construction type
as defined on the Architectural drawings and furnish all lighting fixtures with the
10/18/11
16500-6
correct mounting devices and proper operating voltage whether or not such
variations are indicated by fixture catalog number. The CONTRACTOR shall
verify depth of all recessed lighting fixtures with Architectural drawings prior to
ordering fixtures. Any discrepancies that would cause recessed lighting fixtures
not to fit into ceiling shall be reported to the ARCHITECT prior to ordering of the
fixtures.
Lighting fixtures installed in ceiling grade – suspended lay-in “T-bar” and
concealed spine ceilings.
Provide two seismic clips at opposite ends of each recessed light fixture,
the clip shall connect to the ceiling grid main runners and the light fixture.
The light fixture, seismic clips and ceiling grid runner connections shall resist
a horizontal seismic force equal to the total weight of the light fixture
assembly.
Each light fixture weighing 40 pounds or less and where the ceiling grid
system is “heavy duty” type, shall be suspended directly from the ceiling
grid or suspended independent of the ceiling grid support system. Each
light fixture weighing more than 40 pounds or where the ceiling grid system
is not a “heavy duty” type, shall be supported independent of the ceiling
grid and ceiling grid and ceiling grid support system.
Each light fixture supported directly from the ceiling grid or ceiling grid
support system shall be additionally connected with a minimum of two
independent slack safety support wires. One wire at each opposite
diagonal fixture corner. Each 4 ft x 4 ft light fixture shall be supported in
the same manner, except provide a minimum of four independent slack
safety wires, one at each fixture corner.
Each light fixture supported independent of the ceiling grid system shall be
supported with a minimum of four taut independent support wires, one
wire at each fixture corner.
Light fixtures surface mounted to a suspended “tee” ceiling shall be
installed with a one and one-half inch steel channel or angle which spans
across and above the main ceiling grid runners. Each channel or angle
member shall be provided with a minimum of two threaded studs for
attaching to the fixture housing through the lay-in ceiling tile. Two
members shall be installed for each four-foot fixture. Install the channels or
angles within six inches of each end of the light fixture to span a minimum
of two ceiling grid main runners. Provide two seismic clips connecting the
ceiling grid main runners to each channel or angle. Provide support wires
connecting to the channels or angles in lieu of connecting to the light
fixtures. Bolt the light fixtures to the threaded studs on the channels or
angles.
The support wires for light fixture support shall be 12-gauge steel (minimum).
The wires including their building and light fixture attachments shall provide
support capacity of not less than four times the weight of the light fixture
assembly. Provide additional light fixture support wires and building anchors
to meet these requirements, as part of the contract. The support wires shall be
anchored to the building structural elements above the ceiling.
Pendant mounting fixtures shall be supplied with swivel hangers. Fixtures shall
swing in any direction a minimum of 45 degrees of gravity, position. Fixtures
shall have special stem lengths to give the mounting height indicated on the
drawings. Stem to be 1-piece without coupling, and to be finished the same
10/18/11
16500-7
color as the canopy and the fixture, unless otherwise noted. The
CONTRACTOR shall check all lock nuts and set screws to rigidly secure the
socket to the stem, and the stem to the outlet box.
Fixtures to be plumb and vertical. Where obstructions occur restricting 45
degrees swing of fixtures, the fixtures shall be guy wired to prevent fixtures from
striking obstructions. The ARCHITECT shall approve Method of guying.
Swinging fixtures shall have a safety hanger cable attached to the structure
and the fixture at each support, capable of supporting four times the vertical
weight of the light fixture assembly.
Suspended fixtures weighing in excess of 40 pounds shall be supported
independently of the fixture outlet box. Provide “air craft” (minimum 12
gauge) steel hanger cable for suspended fixtures route cable concealed or in
pendant where possible. Each cable attachments shall support four times the
weight of the fixture assembly. Securely attach the cable to the building
structure.
On acoustical tile ceilings, fixture outlets shall be accurately located in the
center, at the intersection of the four corners or at the center of the joints of
two tiles.
Surface mounted fixtures installed on drywall or plaster ceilings and weighing
less than 40 pounds may be supported from outlet box. Provide structural
supports above drywall or plaster ceilings for installation of fixtures weighing
more than 40 pounds and secure fixture to structural supports. The use of
toggle bolts is prohibited.
The CONTRACTOR shall aim the exterior adjustable lighting fixtures after dark in
the presence of, and at a time convenient to the ARCHITECT.
Recessed lighting Fixtures – Fire Rated Building Surfaces
1. Lighting fixtures recessed in ceiling or wall which has a fire resistive rating of
1 hour or more shall be enclosed in a fully enclosed box (except over
fixture lens/diffuser) which has a fire rating equal to that of the ceiling or
wall. The space from the fixture to the box enclosure shall be a minimum
of 3 inches. The light fixture shall be provided with Advance Mark III KookKoil ballast (full light output).
3.2
Lamps
Fluorescent and H.I.D. lamps controlled by dimming equipment shall be
operated (aged) for 100 continuous hours without interruption, at 100%
output prior to occupancy of the building by the OWNER.
Energy saving fluorescent lamps shall not be used in dimming systems
unless specifically recommended by the dimming system manufacturer.
3.3
Lens and Diffusers
Lens and diffusers shall be completely cleaned of all dust, dirt and
fingerprints after the installation of the light fixture, ceiling, painting, lamps
and prior to occupancy of the facility by the OWNER.
3.4
Ballasts
10/18/11
16500-8
Ballasts remote from the lighting fixture, mounted as shown on the
drawings and designed for remote operation. Additional wiring and
conduit shall be provided whether shown on the drawing or not, between
lighting fixture and remote Ballasts with required quantity of “THHN” wire to
operate said fixture(s).
Provide proper type and quantity of conductors with conduit system for
proper operation of dimming system, whether or not shown on drawings.
10/18/11
16700-1
16700 SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
A. General
1. The purpose of this specification is to provide
the general specifications for the sound system
performance specifications.
2. The contractor shall engineer the sound system
for the sanctuary in accordance with the
performance
specifications
and
general
specifications as detailed herein.
3. The contractor shall furnish all equipment,
material, cable, conduit, and supplies required
to effect the complete installation of the sound
system.
B. Products
1. The contractor shall provide two complete sets
of the following data:
Installation wiring
diagrams,
complete
instruction
manuals,
schematic drawings, service instructions, and
test documentation.
2. The system shall be guaranteed for a minimum
of one year from the date of acceptance
against
defective
materials,
design,
workmanship and improper adjustment. Any
defective material shall be replaced at no
expense to the owner, provided it does not
show abuse.
C. Execution
1. The work herein specified shall be performed by
fully competent workmen, in a thorough
manner.
All materials furnished by the
contractor shall be new and "UL" listed.
2. All equipment, except portable units, shall be
held firmly in place.
This shall include
loudspeakers, amplifiers, cables, console. etc.
Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to
support their loads with a safety factor of at
least three. All switches, connectors, outlets,
etc., shall be clearly, logically, and permanently
marked during installation.
3. The contractor must take such precautions as
are necessary to guard against electromagnetic
and electrostatic hum, to supply adequate
ventilation, and to install the equipment so as to
provide maximum safety to the users.
4. All speakers, horns, wire, junction boxes, jacks,
etc., shall be decoratively baffled, covered, or
painted so that they fit into the decor of the
building.
5. Final tests & demonstration shall be made in the
presence of a representative of the contractor,
owner, and owners audio consultant.
See
minimum performance specifications.
6. The quantity and location of the microphone
jacks shall be determined by a representative of
the church.
7. The system shall be of modular design to
facilitate both expansion and service and shall
be completely transistorized.
8. A "central loudspeaker cluster", mounted from
the ceiling above the front of the platform, shall
be used.
9. Room equalizers shall have active filters of the
minimum-phase, band-rejection type. Any filter
whose impedance changes at its resonant
frequency will not be accepted.
10. The sound system shall not produce audible
noise (hiss and hum) or distortion within the
seating area to exceed the average acoustic
ambient noise level in the room.
11. A wooden control console shall be designed
and shall be provided by the sound or furniture
contractor and located in the seating area.
Only the components necessary to operate the
system shall be accessible, such as the mixer,
recorder and jack panel, etc. The console shall
have a locking cover to protect the
components
from
theft,
damage
and
readjustment.
a The remainder of the system, including the
equalizers and amplifiers, shall be mounted
in a locked rack in a remote and accessible
area as near to the speakers as possible.
This method will reduce cable losses to the
speakers and reduce the size of the control
console in the seating area. The amps and
equalizers in the remote rack shall be
adjusted only by a qualified audio engineer
with test equipment including a 1/3 - octave
analyzer.
12. All microphone and line level cables over 20
feet shall be low impedance and balanced to
reduce cable losses and interference.
13. Care shall be taken in wiring so as to avoid
damage to the cables and to the equipment.
All joints and connectors shall be made with
resincore solder or with mechanical crimp
connectors.
14. Microphones for hand held (solo) use shall be
of heavy duty construction, have very low
handling noise and include a pop (blast) filter.
These mics shall typically be of uni-directional
dynamic type.
15. Microphones for choir, instrument, pulpit and
recording use shall be chosen for their flat
(natural) response and sensitivity. These mics
shall typically be of the condenser type. The
condenser mics shall be powered by internal
batteries or (for higher performance and
freedom from batteries) a "phantom power"
supply.
-
16700-2
16. Any wireless microphone system to be used with
this sound system shall be crystal-controlled and
of professional quality, VHF Hi Band type.
Tuneable or 49 Mhz type units are not
acceptable under this specification.
17. If high quality recordings are required, a
recording room shall be provided by the owner.
A mixer, recorder, compressor monitor amp and
speakers shall be installed. This recording system
shall be totally isolated from the main
reinforcement sound system acoustically and
electrically.
18. Final tests shall be made in the presence of a
representative of the contracting officer and the
audio contractor/consultant, who shall be
notified of the test date a minimum of five days
in advance.
19. The sound consultant or contractor shall perform
all tests necessary to verify and document
performance of sound system as outlined in
paragraphs 5A-5F including level settings and
polarity. Copies of these tests shall be given to
the system owner and the audio consultant or
architect.
20. Performance specifications:
a. Even distribution of sound. The system shall
provide even distribution of the reinforced
sound throughout 90% of the seating area
typically +2db for the 500-5,000 Hz range.
Total variation shall not exceed +3 db.
b. Frequency response. A response of 50 - 15
Khz+3db shall be provided by the system,
thus assuring full range music and vocal
reproduction.
c. Sound level. The system shall provide a
concert sound level of at least 80 db-spl
average program level and an additional
10 db-spl peaking margin at any seat (d2).
d. Distortion. Total harmonic distortion (thd)
shall be below 5% at 90 db-spl.
e. Signal to noise. S/N shall be 25 db minimum.
f. Articulation loss.
Al-cons loss shall not
exceed 15% within the seating area.
-
16720-1
16720 ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Items specified in this section are to be
provided by the installer as part of a designbuild contract.
2. Items in question include: Fire alarm systems.
installation, anchorage and interface of work
of this Section with work of adjacent trades.
4. A fire alarm system shall be provided in
compliance with Title 24, California Building
Code, UBC and Uniform Fire Code Article 14.
5. Security alarm systems:
Coordinate requirements of owner for security
alarm as an additive alternate. (N.I.C.)
10/18/11
16931-1
SECTION 16931
OCCUPANCY MOTION SENSORS
Part 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Summary
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
Work included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment
necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in
connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of
this Section, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or specified
herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the
following:
·
Examine all other specification sections and drawings for related
work required to be included as work under Division Sixteen.
·
Submit data sheets on sensors, wiring diagrams, relays,
transformers, junction boxes and mounting accessories, specific to
this installation.
Instruction of Owners Personnel
A.
Provide training, at the OWNER’S facility, the training necessary to
familiarize the OWNER in the operation and adjustment of the
devices. Provide a minimum of one 2-hour class.
Part 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Motion Sensors
A.
General
·
Motion sensors shall be self-contained, solid state low voltage devices
designed specifically for energy conservation lighting control. Units shall
be U.L. listed. Housing shall be white and impact-resistant.
Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has
been set. No automatic reduction in coverage shall occur when air
conditioning or healing fans are in operation or when sensor has turned
off lighting due to not sensing motion.
Sensitivity and time-on after activation shall be such that there will be no
nuisance on/off switching of the lights by the motion sensor while the room
is occupied.
Motion sensors shall be compatible with all electronic ballasts.
All sensors shall be provided with an indicator light to verify that motion is
being detected and that the unit is operation.
All sensors shall be California Energy Commission Title 24 approval and
certified.
·
·
·
·
·
B.
Wall Mount Motion Sensors
·
Wall mount motion sensors shall be passive infrared type, capable of
detection of motion at desk top up to 200 square feet within a volume
dimension of up to approximately 20’ x 25’. Wall switch sensors shall be
10/18/11
16931-2
·
·
·
·
C.
Ceiling Mounted Motion Sensors
·
Ceiling mounted motion sensors shall be ultrasonic type. One way type
shall be capable of detection of motion up to 600 square feet. Two-way
types shall be capable of detection of motion up to 2000 square feet.
Corridor type shall be capable of detection of motion up to 90 linear feet.
Ceiling mounted motion sensors shall operate with power pack capable
of switching up to 20 amps of ballast lighting load or 15 amps of
incandescent load and shall be compatible with all types of electronic
ballasts. The power pack shall provide the required low voltage control
power to operate a minimum of two (2) occupancy sensors.
Power packs shall be powered from the lighting circuit, which they control.
Ceiling mounted motion sensors shall be Watt Stopper #WT-2200 UNICCO
#C800-1500 or Levittown #ODC20-UDW.
·
·
·
2.2
U.L. listed and have a load capacity of 0-800 watts, 120V, 0-1200 watts,
277V.
Wall mounted motion sensors shall allow choice of automatic-on of
manual-on operation and shall be equipped with push-button to turn
“on” the lights and turn “off” the lights. Sensor shall automatically turn
“off” lights if there no movement after the preset time delay interval, yet
lights shall remain “on” with movement. In the manual-on mode, there
shall be a “grace” period after the unit turns itself off (because of lack of
motion) during which a new motion will automatically turn lights on
without the push-button having to be pressed.
Light level sensing feature shall hold lighting off when user-adjusted level of
ambient light is available.
Switching by motion sensor shall occur at voltage zero crossing to reduce
relay stress.
Wall mount motion sensors shall be Watt Stopper #WI-300, UNICCO #SOM10-2 or Levittown #ODSOD-ID.
Wiring
A.
Wiring between sensors and power packs shall be #18AWG;
stranded U.L. listed for plenum use.
Part 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
A.
3.2
Install motion occupancy sensor’s in accordance to manufacturer’s
recommendations. All power packs shall be mounted to junction
boxes in accessible ceiling spaces. Adjust and test each
sensor/control unit in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. Be certain that no obstructions block proper
sensor coverage of areas desired, and minimize sensor pickup
zone.
Warranty
A.
CONTRACTOR shall warrant all equipment furnished in
accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in
materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the
specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or
10/18/11
16931-3
replacement, and testing without charge to the OWNER, all or any
parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or
non-conforming and returned to the supplier. Warranty on sensors
and control units will be for a period of two years. The warranty
shall commence upon OWNER’S acceptance of the project.
Warranty on labor shall be for a period of minimum one year.
10/18/11

First United Methodist Church of Palmdale

Transcription

Similar documents

` A S H B O R O U G H `

Thin-Set - Bomanite of Wisconsin

Permaguard - Cyntech.ca

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

yaggy colby - Olmsted County

Skateboard Deterrents

hafeilobopartsmanual

GranQuartz - Ameripolish